Z30RG (En) 04

DIGITAL CAMERA
Reference Guide
• Read this document thoroughly before using the camera.

• To ensure proper use of the camera, be sure to read “For
your safety” (page 20).
• After reading this document, keep it readily accessible for
future reference.
When your first photo can’t wait
❚Getting ready
❚
1 Insert the battery and memory card (062).
For information on charging the battery, see “Charging the battery”

(065).
2 Attach a lens (068).
･ Align the indicator on the camera body with the indicator on the
lens (q) and rotate the lens in the direction shown (w).
･ A strap can be attached to the camera. For more information, see
“Attaching the strap” (061).
3 Turn the camera on and then choose a language and set the
clock (071).
Z 30 Model Name: N2121

2
❚Take (075) and view (086) pictures
❚
1 Rotate the mode dial to b.
2 To focus, press the shutter-release button halfway (i.e, lightly

press the shutter-release button, stopping when it is pressed
halfway).
3 Without lifting your finger from the shutter-release button,

press the button the rest of the way down to take the picture.
4 View the picture.

3
Package contents
Be sure all items listed here were included with your camera.
❏ Camera ❏ EN-EL25 rechargeable Li-ion
battery
❏ Strap (061)
❏ Warranty
❏ User’s Manual
❏ UC-E24 USB cable (0484)
❏ BF-N1 body cap
･ Memory cards are sold separately.

･ Purchasers of the lens kit option should confirm that the package
also includes a lens.
D The Nikon Download Center

Visit the Nikon download center to download the latest firmware for cameras
and lenses, NX Studio and other Nikon software, and documentation for
Nikon products including cameras, NIKKOR lenses, and flash units.
https://downloadcenter.nikonimglib.com/
Package contents
4
About this document
❚Symbols
❚
This document employs the following symbols and conventions. Use
them to help locate the information you need.
This icon marks notes, information that should be read before using
D this product.
This icon marks tips, additional information you may find helpful
A when using this product.
0 This icon marks references to other sections in this document.
❚Conventions
❚
･ This camera uses SD, SDHC, and SDXC memory cards, referred to
throughout this document as “memory cards”. SD, SDHC, and SDXC
may also on occasion be referred to as “SD memory cards”.
･ Throughout this document, battery chargers are referred to as
“battery chargers” or “chargers”.
･ Throughout this document, the display in camera monitor during
shooting is referred to as the “shooting display”.
･ Throughout this document, smartphones and tablets are referred to
as “smart devices”.
･ Throughout this document, the term “default settings” is used to
refer to the settings in effect at shipment. The explanations in this
document assume that default settings are used.
A For your safety

“For your safety” contains important safety instructions. Be sure to read them
before using the camera. For more information, see “For your safety” (020).
About this document

5
Table of contents
When your first photo can’t wait ..........................................................................2
Package contents .......................................................................................................4
About this document ............................................................................................... 5
For your safety .......................................................................................................... 20
Notices .........................................................................................................................25
Getting to know the camera 29

Parts of the camera ................................................................................................. 29
Camera body .............................................................................. 29
Monitor ......................................................................................... 33
Camera controls ....................................................................................................... 36
The mode dial .............................................................................36
The command dials ..................................................................37
The S button ..........................................................................37
The E (exposure compensation) button ..........................38
Monitor ......................................................................................... 39
Touch controls ............................................................................42
The DISP button ........................................................................48
The X and W (Q) buttons ......................................................50
The A (g) button ................................................................... 51
The G button ......................................................................... 52
The i button (the i menu) ....................................................56
The Fn1 and Fn2 buttons ...................................................... 59
First steps 61
Attaching the strap ................................................................................................. 61
Inserting the battery and a memory card .......................................................62
Battery level ................................................................................ 63
Number of exposures remaining ........................................ 64
Charging the battery .............................................................................................. 65
Attaching a lens ........................................................................................................68
Table of contents
6
Detaching lenses .......................................................................69
Opening the monitor ............................................................................................. 70
Turning on the camera .......................................................................................... 71
Basic photography and playback 75

Taking photographs (b auto) ............................................................................. 75
Recording videos (b auto) ...................................................................................80
Taking photos in video mode ...............................................83
Viewing photos .........................................................................................................86
Viewing videos ...........................................................................86
Deleting unwanted pictures ................................................. 88
Basic settings 90
Focus ............................................................................................................................ 90
Focus mode .................................................................................90
AF-area mode .............................................................................92
The touch shutter ...................................................................101
Manual focus ............................................................................103
Save focus position/Recall focus position ..................... 106
White balance .........................................................................................................109
Adjusting white balance ......................................................109
Silent photography ...............................................................................................114
Rating pictures ....................................................................................................... 116
Protecting pictures from deletion ...................................................................118
Shooting controls 120

The mode dial .........................................................................................................120
Using the mode dial ..............................................................120
P (programmed auto) ........................................................... 121
S (shutter-priority auto) ....................................................... 121
A (aperture-priority auto) ....................................................123
M (manual) ................................................................................124
U1, U2, and U3 (user settings modes) .............................128
The S button ......................................................................................................131
Table of contents
7
Adjusting ISO sensitivity ......................................................131
Auto ISO sensitivity control ................................................ 132
The E (exposure compensation) button ......................................................134
Adjusting exposure compensation ................................. 134
The c/E (release mode/self-timer) button ................................................136
Choosing a release mode ....................................................136
The self-timer ...........................................................................140
The A (g) button ............................................................................................... 142
Exposure lock ...........................................................................142
Focus lock ..................................................................................142
Locking focus and exposure .............................................. 142
The i menu 145

The i menu ............................................................................................................. 145
Still images .............................................................................................................. 147
Set Picture Control .................................................................147
White balance ..........................................................................153
Image quality ...........................................................................161
Image size ................................................................................. 162
Flash mode ............................................................................... 163
Metering .................................................................................... 163
Wi-Fi connection .....................................................................165
Active D-Lighting ................................................................... 165
Release mode .......................................................................... 167
Vibration reduction ............................................................... 168
AF-area mode .......................................................................... 169
Focus mode .............................................................................. 170
Videos ........................................................................................................................ 171
Set Picture Control .................................................................172
White balance ..........................................................................172
Frame size and rate/Video quality ....................................172
Microphone sensitivity .........................................................175
Wind noise reduction ........................................................... 177
Table of contents
8
Metering .................................................................................... 177
Wi-Fi connection .....................................................................178
Active D-Lighting ................................................................... 178
Electronic VR ............................................................................ 178
Vibration reduction ............................................................... 179
AF-area mode .......................................................................... 179
Focus mode .............................................................................. 179
Playback 180
Viewing pictures ....................................................................................................180
Full-frame playback ............................................................... 180
Thumbnail playback ..............................................................181
Calendar playback ..................................................................181
Photo information ................................................................................................ 183
File information .......................................................................184
Exposure data .......................................................................... 185
Highlight display .................................................................... 185
RGB histogram .........................................................................186
Shooting data .......................................................................... 189
Location data ........................................................................... 193
Overview ................................................................................... 194
The i button (playback mode) ........................................................................ 196
Photos .........................................................................................196
Videos ......................................................................................... 198
Videos (playback paused) ................................................... 199
Playback zoom ....................................................................................................... 206
Using playback zoom ............................................................206
Deleting pictures ...................................................................................................208
Using the delete button .......................................................208
Deleting multiple pictures .................................................. 209
Menu guide 212

Defaults .....................................................................................................................212
Table of contents
9
Playback menu defaults .......................................................212
Photo shooting menu defaults ......................................... 213
Video recording menu defaults ........................................ 217
Custom Settings menu defaults ....................................... 219
Setup menu defaults .............................................................224
D The playback menu: Managing images ..................................................229
Delete ................................................................................................................... 229
Playback folder ..................................................................................................230
Playback display options ...............................................................................230
Picture review ....................................................................................................231
Rotate tall ............................................................................................................231
Slide show ...........................................................................................................231
Viewing slide shows .............................................................. 232
Rating ................................................................................................................... 233
C The photo shooting menu: Shooting options ..................................... 234
Reset photo shooting menu ........................................................................ 235
Storage folder ....................................................................................................235
Renaming folders ................................................................... 236
Select folder by number ...................................................... 236
Select folder from list ............................................................238
File naming .........................................................................................................239
Choose image area ..........................................................................................240
Image quality .....................................................................................................241
Image size ........................................................................................................... 241
RAW recording .................................................................................................. 242
ISO sensitivity settings ................................................................................... 242
White balance ....................................................................................................244
The white balance menu: Fine-tuning ........................... 244
The white balance menu: Choosing a color
temperature ............................................................................. 246
Preset manual: Copying white balance from a
photograph .............................................................................. 248
Set Picture Control ...........................................................................................251
Table of contents
10
Modifying Picture Controls from the menus ................251
Manage Picture Control .................................................................................253
Creating custom Picture Controls .................................... 254
Color space .........................................................................................................258
Active D-Lighting ............................................................................................. 258
Long exposure NR ............................................................................................258
High ISO NR ........................................................................................................259
Vignette control ................................................................................................260
Diffraction compensation .............................................................................260
Auto distortion control .................................................................................. 261
Flicker reduction shooting ............................................................................261
Metering ..............................................................................................................262
Flash control .......................................................................................................263
Flash control mode ................................................................263
Wireless flash options ........................................................... 264
Group flash options ...............................................................264
Flash mode ......................................................................................................... 265
Flash compensation ........................................................................................265
Release mode .................................................................................................... 265
Focus mode ........................................................................................................265
AF-area mode .................................................................................................... 266
Vibration reduction ......................................................................................... 266
Auto bracketing ................................................................................................266
Exposure and flash bracketing .......................................... 267
White balance bracketing ................................................... 272
ADL bracketing ........................................................................275
Multiple exposure ............................................................................................277
Creating a multiple exposure ............................................ 279
HDR (high dynamic range) ........................................................................... 285
Taking HDR photographs .................................................... 286
Interval timer shooting .................................................................................. 292
Interval-timer photography ................................................295
Time-lapse video ..............................................................................................305
Table of contents
11
Recording time-lapse videos ............................................. 306
Focus shift shooting ........................................................................................314
Focus shift photography ......................................................316
Silent photography ......................................................................................... 322
1 The video recording menu: Video recording options ........................ 324
Reset video recording menu ........................................................................325
File naming .........................................................................................................325
Frame size/frame rate .....................................................................................325
Video quality ......................................................................................................325
Video file type ................................................................................................... 326
ISO sensitivity settings ................................................................................... 326
White balance ....................................................................................................327
Set Picture Control ...........................................................................................328
Manage Picture Control .................................................................................328
Active D-Lighting ............................................................................................. 328
High ISO NR ........................................................................................................329
Vignette control ................................................................................................329
Diffraction compensation .............................................................................329
Auto distortion control .................................................................................. 329
Flicker reduction ...............................................................................................329
Metering ..............................................................................................................330
Release mode (save frame) ...........................................................................330
Focus mode ........................................................................................................330
AF-area mode .................................................................................................... 331
Vibration reduction ......................................................................................... 331
Electronic VR ...................................................................................................... 331
Microphone sensitivity .................................................................................. 331
Attenuator .......................................................................................................... 332
Frequency response ........................................................................................332
Wind noise reduction ..................................................................................... 333
Timecode .............................................................................................................333
A Custom Settings: Fine-tuning camera settings .................................... 335
Reset custom settings .................................................................................... 337
Table of contents
12
a: Autofocus ....................................................................................................... 338
a1: AF-C priority selection .................................................................... 338
a2: AF-S priority selection .....................................................................338
a3: Focus tracking with lock-on ......................................................... 339
a4: Focus points used .............................................................................339
a5: Store points by orientation ...........................................................340
a6: AF activation ...................................................................................... 342
Out-of-focus release ..............................................................342
a7: Limit AF-area mode selection ...................................................... 343
a8: Focus point wrap-around .............................................................. 343
a9: Focus point options .........................................................................344
Manual focus mode ...............................................................344
Dynamic-area AF assist ........................................................ 344
a10: Low-light AF .....................................................................................344
a11: Manual focus ring in AF mode .................................................. 345
b: Metering/exposure .....................................................................................345
b1: Easy exposure compensation ......................................................345
b2: Center-weighted area .....................................................................346
b3: Fine-tune optimal exposure .........................................................346
c: Timers/AE lock .............................................................................................. 347
c1: Shutter-release button AE-L ......................................................... 347
c2: Self-timer ............................................................................................. 348
c3: Power off delay ..................................................................................348
d: Shooting/display ......................................................................................... 349
d1: CL mode shooting speed .............................................................. 349
d2: Maximum shots per burst .............................................................349
d3: Exposure delay mode ..................................................................... 349
d4: Shutter type ....................................................................................... 350
d5: File number sequence ....................................................................350
d6: Apply settings to live view ............................................................352
d7: Framing grid display ....................................................................... 353
d8: Focus peaking ................................................................................... 353
Peaking level ............................................................................ 353
Table of contents
13
Peaking highlight color ........................................................353
d9: View all in continuous mode ....................................................... 354
e: Bracketing/flash ........................................................................................... 354
e1: Flash sync speed ...............................................................................354
e2: Flash shutter speed ..........................................................................355
e3: Exposure comp. for flash ................................................................355
e4: Auto c ISO sensitivity control ...................................................... 356
e5: Auto bracketing (mode M) ............................................................356
e6: Bracketing order ............................................................................... 357
f: Controls ............................................................................................................358
f1: Customize i menu ..........................................................................358
Bluetooth connection ...........................................................359
f2: Custom controls (shooting) ........................................................... 359
f3: Custom controls (playback) ........................................................... 369
f4: Customize command dials .............................................................370
Reverse rotation ......................................................................370
Change main/sub ...................................................................371
Menus and playback ............................................................. 371
Sub-dial frame advance ....................................................... 372
f5: Release button to use dial ..............................................................373
f6: Reverse indicators ............................................................................. 374
g: Video ................................................................................................................374
g1: Customize i menu .........................................................................374
Bluetooth connection ...........................................................375
g2: Custom controls ................................................................................375
g3: AF speed ..............................................................................................383
g4: AF tracking sensitivity .................................................................... 384
g5: Highlight display .............................................................................. 384
Display pattern ........................................................................384
Highlight display threshold ................................................385
B The setup menu: Camera setup ...................................................................386
Format memory card ......................................................................................387
Save user settings ............................................................................................ 387
Table of contents
14
Reset user settings ...........................................................................................388
Language ............................................................................................................ 388
Time zone and date .........................................................................................388
Monitor brightness ..........................................................................................389
Monitor color balance .................................................................................... 389
REC lamp brightness .......................................................................................390
Information display ......................................................................................... 391
AF fine-tuning options ...................................................................................392
Creating and saving fine-tuning values .........................393
Choosing a default fine-tuning value .............................394
Non-CPU lens data .......................................................................................... 394
Save focus position ......................................................................................... 395
Image Dust Off ref photo ..............................................................................395
Acquiring Image Dust Off reference data ..................... 396
Pixel mapping ....................................................................................................398
Image comment ............................................................................................... 398
Input comment ....................................................................... 399
Attach comment .....................................................................399
Copyright information ................................................................................... 399
Artist/Copyright ...................................................................... 399
Attach copyright information ............................................400
Beep options ......................................................................................................400
Beep on/off ...............................................................................400
Volume ....................................................................................... 401
Pitch .............................................................................................401
Touch controls ...................................................................................................401
Enable/disable touch controls ...........................................401
Full-frame playback flicks .................................................... 402
Self-portrait mode ........................................................................................... 402
HDMI .....................................................................................................................402
Airplane mode .................................................................................................. 402
Connect to smart device ............................................................................... 403
Pairing (Bluetooth) .................................................................403
Table of contents
15
Select for upload (Bluetooth) .............................................403
Wi-Fi connection .....................................................................404
Upload while off ..................................................................... 405
Location data (smart device) ..............................................405
Connect to computer ..................................................................................... 405
Wi-Fi connection .....................................................................406
Network settings .................................................................... 406
Options .......................................................................................407
MAC address ............................................................................ 408
Wireless remote (ML-L7) options ................................................................408
Wireless remote connection ...............................................408
Save wireless remote controller ........................................409
Delete wireless remote controller .................................... 409
Assign Fn1 button/Assign Fn2 button ............................409
Conformity marking ........................................................................................409
USB power delivery ......................................................................................... 410
Energy saving (photo mode) ....................................................................... 412
Slot empty release lock ..................................................................................412
Save/load menu settings .............................................................................. 413
Save menu settings ............................................................... 416
Load menu settings ...............................................................417
Reset all settings ...............................................................................................417
Firmware version ..............................................................................................417
N The retouch menu: Creating retouched copies ................................... 419
Creating retouched copies ................................................. 420
RAW processing: Converting RAW to JPEG .............................................423
Trim ....................................................................................................................... 426
Resize ....................................................................................................................427
Resizing multiple images .................................................... 427
D-Lighting ...........................................................................................................431
Red-eye correction .......................................................................................... 432
Straighten ........................................................................................................... 433
Distortion control .............................................................................................433
Table of contents
16
Perspective control ..........................................................................................434
Monochrome ..................................................................................................... 435
Overlay pictures ................................................................................................436
Add .............................................................................................. 436
Lighten and darken ............................................................... 440
Trim video ........................................................................................................... 443
O My Menu/m Recent settings .......................................................................444
O My Menu: Creating a custom menu ...........................444
m Recent settings: Accessing recently-used settings.......
....................................................................................................... 450
Establishing wireless connections to computers

or smart devices 451
Network options ....................................................................................................451
Connecting to computers via Wi-Fi ................................................................452
What Wi-Fi can do for you ...................................................452
The Wireless Transmitter Utility ........................................ 452
Infrastructure and access-point modes ......................... 452
Connecting in access-point mode ................................... 454
Connecting in infrastructure mode .................................460
Uploading pictures ................................................................ 468
Disconnecting and reconnecting .....................................472
Connecting to smart devices ............................................................................474
The SnapBridge app ..............................................................474
What SnapBridge can do for you ......................................474
Wireless connections ............................................................ 475
Connecting via Bluetooth (pairing) ................................. 475
Connecting via Wi-Fi (Wi-Fi mode) .................................. 478
Troubleshooting .................................................................................................... 483
Cabled connections to computers and HDMI

devices 484
Connecting to computers via USB ..................................................................484
Table of contents
17
Installing NX Studio ...............................................................484
Copying pictures to a computer using NX Studio ......484
Connecting to HDMI devices ............................................................................ 489
TVs ................................................................................................489
Recorders ...................................................................................489
On-camera flash photography 493

“On-camera” versus “remote” ........................................................................... 493
Camera-mounted flash units ............................................. 493
Remote flash photography .................................................493
Using an on-camera flash .................................................................................. 494
Flash control mode ...............................................................................................497
Flash modes ............................................................................................................ 498
Flash compensation ............................................................................................. 501
FV lock ....................................................................................................................... 502
Remote flash photography 505

What is remote flash photography? ...............................................................505
Controlling remote flash units ..........................................................................506
Using optical AWL with the SB-500 ................................. 506
Troubleshooting 510
Before contacting customer support .............................................................510
Problems and solutions ...................................................................................... 512
Battery/display ........................................................................ 512
Shooting .................................................................................... 512
Playback .....................................................................................517
Bluetooth and Wi-Fi (wireless networks) ....................... 518
Miscellaneous .......................................................................... 519
Alerts and error messages ................................................................................. 521
Alerts ........................................................................................... 521
Error messages ........................................................................ 523
Table of contents
18
Technical notes 526
Compatible lenses and accessories ................................................................526
Display in the monitor .........................................................................................527
Monitor .......................................................................................527
Compatible flash units ........................................................................................ 535
The Nikon Creative Lighting System (CLS) ....................535
Features available with CLS-compatible flash units .. 535
Notes and tips for optional flash units ........................... 551
Other compatible accessories .......................................................................... 555
Charging the camera with the charging AC adapter.........
....................................................................................................... 557
ML-L7 Remote Control ..........................................................559
Software ....................................................................................................................566
Caring for the camera ..........................................................................................568
Storage ....................................................................................... 568
Cleaning .....................................................................................568
Manual cleaning ..................................................................... 569
Caring for the camera and battery: Cautions ..............................................572
Camera care ..............................................................................572
Battery care ...............................................................................575
Specifications ..........................................................................................................578
Nikon Z 30 digital camera ................................................... 578
Approved memory cards ....................................................................................590
Portable chargers (power banks) .................................................................... 591
Memory card capacity .........................................................................................592
Available recording time .................................................................................... 593
Battery endurance ................................................................................................ 595
Trademarks and licenses .................................................................................... 597
Notices ...................................................................................................................... 600
Bluetooth and Wi-Fi (wireless LAN) ................................................................ 603
Index 609
Table of contents
19
For your safety
To prevent damage to property or injury to yourself or to others, read
“For your safety” in its entirety before using this product.
After reading these safety instructions, keep them readily accessible for
future reference.
DANGER: Failure to observe the precautions marked with this icon

carries a high risk of death or severe injury.
WARNING: Failure to observe the precautions marked with this icon
could result in death or severe injury.
CAUTION: Failure to observe the precautions marked with this icon
could result in injury or property damage.
WARNING
Do not use while walking or operating a vehicle.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in accidents or other injury.
Do not disassemble or modify this product. Do not touch internal

parts that become exposed as the result of a fall or other accident.
Failure to observe these precautions could result in electric shock or other
injury.
Should you notice any abnormalities such as the product producing

smoke, heat, or unusual odors, immediately disconnect the battery or
power source.
Continued operation could result in fire, burns or other injury.
Keep dry. Do not handle with wet hands. Do not handle the plug with
wet hands.
Failure to observe these precautions could result in fire or electric shock.
Do not let your skin remain in prolonged contact with this product
while it is on or plugged in.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in low-temperature burns.
For your safety

20
Do not use this product in the presence of flammable dust or gas such
as propane, gasoline or aerosols.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in explosion or fire.
Do not directly view the sun or other bright light source through the
lens.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in visual impairment.
Do not aim the flash at the operator of a motor vehicle.

Failure to observe this precaution could result in accidents.
Keep this product out of reach of children.

Failure to observe this precaution could result in injury or product
malfunction. In addition, note that small parts constitute a choking hazard.
Should a child swallow any part of this product, seek immediate medical
attention.
Do not entangle, wrap or twist the straps around your neck.

Failure to observe this precaution could result in accidents.
Do not use batteries, chargers, AC adapters, or USB cables not

specifically designated for use with this product. When using
batteries, chargers, AC adapters, and USB cables designated for use
with this product, do not:
･ Damage, modify, forcibly tug or bend the cords or cables, place
them under heavy objects, or expose them to heat or flame.
･ Use travel converters or adapters designed to convert from one
voltage to another or with DC-to-AC inverters.
Failure to observe these precautions could result in fire or electric shock.
Do not handle the plug when charging the product or using the AC
adapter during thunderstorms.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in electric shock.
For your safety

21
Dust on or near the metal parts of the plug should be removed with a
dry cloth.
Continued use could result in fire.
Do not handle with bare hands in locations exposed to extremely high

or low temperatures.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in burns, or frostbite.
CAUTION
Do not leave the lens pointed at the sun or other strong light sources.
Light focused by the lens could cause fire or damage to product’s internal
parts. When shooting backlit subjects, keep the sun well out of the frame.
Sunlight focused into the camera when the sun is close to the frame could
cause fire.
Turn this product off when its use is prohibited. Disable wireless
features when the use of wireless equipment is prohibited.
The radio-frequency emissions produced by this product could interfere
with equipment onboard aircraft or in hospitals or other medical facilities.
Remove the battery and disconnect the AC adapter if this product will
not be used for an extended period.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in fire or product
malfunction.
Do not fire the flash in contact with or in close proximity to the skin or
objects.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in burns or fire.
Do not leave the product where it will be exposed to extremely high

temperatures, for an extended period such as in an enclosed
automobile or in direct sunlight.
malfunction.
For your safety

22
Do not look at the REC lamp from short distances or for long periods.
Failure to observe this precaution could have adverse effects on vision.
Do not transport cameras or lenses with tripods or similar accessories

attached.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in injury or product
malfunction.
DANGER (Batteries)
Do not mishandle batteries.
Failure to observe the following precautions could result in the batteries
leaking, overheating, rupturing, or catching fire:
･ Use only rechargeable batteries approved for use in this product.
･ Do not expose batteries to flame or excessive heat.
･ Do not disassemble.
･ Do not short-circuit the terminals by touching them to necklaces,
hairpins, or other metal objects.
･ Do not expose batteries or the products in which they are inserted
to powerful physical shocks.
･ Do not step on batteries, pierce them with nails, or strike them with
hammers.
Charge only as indicated.

Failure to observe this precaution could result in the batteries leaking,
overheating, rupturing, or catching fire.
If battery liquid comes into contact with the eyes, rinse with plenty of
clean water and seek immediate medical attention.
Delaying action could result in eye injuries.
Follow the instructions of airline personnel.

Batteries left unattended at high altitudes in an unpressurized
environment may leak, overheat, rupture, or catch fire.
For your safety

23
WARNING (Batteries)
Keep batteries out of reach of children.
Should a child swallow a battery, seek immediate medical attention.
Keep batteries out of reach of household pets and other animals.

The batteries could leak, overheat, rupture, or catch fire if bitten, chewed,
or otherwise damaged by animals.
Do not immerse batteries in water or expose to rain.

malfunction. Immediately dry the product with a towel or similar object
should it become wet.
Discontinue use immediately should you notice any changes in the

batteries, such as discoloration or deformation. Cease charging EN-
EL25 rechargeable batteries if they do not charge in the specified
period of time.
Failure to observe these precautions could result in the batteries leaking,
overheating, rupturing, or catching fire.
When batteries are no longer needed, insulate the terminals with

tape.
Overheating, rupture, or fire may result should metal objects come into
contact with the terminals.
If battery liquid comes into contact with a person’s skin or clothing,

immediately rinse the affected area with plenty of clean water.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in skin irritation.
For your safety

24
Notices
･ No part of the documentation included with this product may be
reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or
translated into any language in any form, by any means, without
Nikon’s prior written permission.
･ Nikon reserves the right to change the appearance and specifications
of the hardware and software described in this documentation at any
time and without prior notice.
･ Nikon will not be held liable for any damages resulting from the use
of this product.
･ While every effort has been made to ensure that the information in
this documentation is accurate and complete, we would appreciate it
were you to bring any errors or omissions to the attention of the
Nikon representative in your area (address provided separately).
● Notice concerning prohibition of copying or reproduction

Note that simply being in possession of material that has been digitally
copied or reproduced by means of a scanner, digital camera, or other device
may be punishable by law.
･ Items prohibited by law from being copied or reproduced
Do not copy or reproduce paper money, coins, securities, government
bonds, or local government bonds, even if such copies or reproductions are
stamped “Sample”.
The copying or reproduction of paper money, coins, or securities which are
circulated in a foreign country is prohibited.
Unless the prior permission of the government has been obtained, the
copying or reproduction of unused postage stamps or post cards issued by
the government is prohibited.
The copying or reproduction of stamps issued by the government and of
certified documents stipulated by law is prohibited.
･ Cautions on certain copies and reproductions
The government has issued cautions on copies or reproductions of
securities issued by private companies (shares, bills, checks, gift certificates,
Notices
25
etc.), commuter passes, or coupon tickets, except when a minimum of
necessary copies are to be provided for business use by a company. Also,
do not copy or reproduce passports issued by the government, licenses
issued by public agencies and private groups, ID cards, and tickets, such as
passes and meal coupons.
･ Comply with copyright notices
Under copyright law, photographs or recordings of copyrighted works
made with the camera cannot be used without the permission of the
copyright holder. Exceptions apply to personal use, but note that even
personal use may be restricted in the case of photographs or recordings of
exhibits or live performances.
● Use only Nikon brand electronic accessories

Nikon cameras are designed to the highest standards and include complex
electronic circuitry. Only Nikon brand electronic accessories (including lenses,
chargers, batteries, AC adapters, and flash accessories) certified by Nikon
specifically for use with this Nikon digital camera are engineered and proven
to operate within the operational and safety requirements of this electronic
circuitry.
The use of non-Nikon electronic accessories could damage the camera and
may void your Nikon warranty. The use of third-party rechargeable Li-ion
batteries not bearing the Nikon holographic seal shown below could
interfere with normal operation of the camera or result in the batteries
overheating, igniting, rupturing, or leaking.
For more information about Nikon brand accessories, contact a local

authorized Nikon dealer.
● Memory cards
･ Memory cards may be hot after use. Observe due caution when
removing memory cards from the camera.
･ Do not perform the following operations during formatting or while
data are being recorded, deleted, or copied to a computer or other
Notices
26
device. Failure to observe these precautions could result in loss of
data or in damage to the camera or card.
- Do not remove or insert memory cards
- Do not turn the camera off
- Do not remove the battery
･ Do not touch the card terminals with your fingers or metal objects.
･ Do not use excessive force when handling memory cards. Failure to
observe this precaution could damage the card.
･ Do not bend or drop memory cards or subject them to strong
physical shocks.
･ Do not expose memory cards to water, heat, or direct sunlight.
･ Do not format memory cards in a computer.
Notices
27
D Before taking important pictures
Before taking pictures on important occasions (such as at weddings or before
taking the camera on a trip), take a test shot to ensure that the camera is
functioning normally. Nikon will not be held liable for damages or lost profits
that may result from product malfunction.
D Life-long learning
As part of Nikon’s “Life-long learning” commitment to ongoing product
support and education, continually-updated information is available on-line
at the following sites:
･ For users in the U.S.A.: https://www.nikonusa.com/
･ For users in Canada: https://www.nikon.ca/
･ For users in Mexico: https://www.nikon.com.mx/
･ For users in Latin America: https://www.nikonamericalatina.com/
･ For users in Europe: https://www.europe-nikon.com/support/
･ For users in Asia, Oceania, the Middle East, and Africa: https://
www.nikon-asia.com/
Visit these sites to keep up-to-date with the latest product information, tips,
answers to frequently-asked questions (FAQs), and general advice on digital
imaging and photography. Additional information may be available from the
Nikon representative in your area. See the following URL for contact
information: https://imaging.nikon.com/
Notices
28
Getting to know the camera
Parts of the camera
Camera body
1 Eyelet for camera strap (061) 7 E button (038, 0134)

2 E (focal plane mark; 0105) 8 Main command dial (037)
3 Stereo microphone (080) 9 Video-record button (080)
4 S button (037, 0131) 10 Mode dial (036, 0120)
5 Power switch (071) 11 Accessory shoe (for optional
6 Shutter-release button (075) flash unit; 0494, 0535)
12 Speaker (087)
Parts of the camera

29
1 Sub-command dial (037) 9 HDMI connector (0489)
2 Image sensor (0569) 10 Charge lamp (065, 0557)
3 CPU contacts 11 USB connector (0410, 0484)
4 Lens mounting mark (068) 12 Lens release button (069)
5 REC lamp (082, 0390) 13 Lens mount (068, 0105)
Self-timer lamp (0140) 14 Body cap (068)
6 Cover for microphone 15 Fn2 button (059, 090)
connector 16 Fn1 button (059, 0109)
7 Cover for HDMI and USB
connectors
8 Connector for external
microphone (0556)
Parts of the camera

30
1 DISP button (048) 11 Memory card access lamp
2 Photo/video selector (075, (078, 082)
080) 12 Battery-chamber/memory card
3 A (g) button (051, 0118, slot cover
0142)
13 Battery-chamber/memory card
slot cover latch
4 i button (056, 0145)
14 Memory card slot (062)
5 J button (053)
15 Battery latch (062)
6 Multi selector (053, 097)
16 Tripod socket
7 G button (052, 0212)
17 Monitor (039, 042, 0101)
8 K button (086, 0180)
18 c (E) button (0136, 0140)
9 W (Q) button (050, 056,
19 O button (088, 0208)
0180, 0206)
10 X button (050, 0103, 0180,
0206)
Parts of the camera

31
D Do not touch the image sensor
Under no circumstances should you exert pressure on the image sensor, poke
it with cleaning tools, or subject it to powerful air currents from a blower.
These actions could scratch or otherwise damage the sensor. For information
on cleaning the image sensor, see “Manual cleaning” (0569).
D Product serial number

The serial number for this product can be found by opening the monitor.
Parts of the camera

32
Monitor
❚Photo mode
❚
At default settings, the following indicators appear in the monitor. For
more information, see “Display in the monitor” (0527) in “Technical
notes”.
1 Shooting mode (0120) 6 Active D-Lighting (0165)

2 Focus point (092) 7 Picture Control (0147, 0251)
3 Release mode (0136) 8 White balance (0109, 0153,
4 Focus mode (090) 0244)
5 AF-area mode (092)
Parts of the camera

33
9 Image area (0240) 19 Shutter speed (0121, 0124)
10 Image size (0162) 20 Subject-tracking AF (0100)
11 Image quality (0161) 21 Metering (0163)
12 i icon (0145) 22 Battery indicator (063)
13 Exposure indicator 23 Shutter type (0350)
Exposure (0125) 24 1 icon (074)
Exposure compensation 25 Vibration reduction indicator
(0134) (0168)
14 “k” (appears when memory 26 Touch shooting (0101)
remains for over 1000 27 AF-area brackets (093)
exposures; 064)
15 Number of exposures
remaining (064, 0592)
16 ISO sensitivity (0131)
17 ISO sensitivity indicator (0131)
Auto ISO sensitivity indicator
(0132)
18 Aperture (0123, 0124)
Parts of the camera

34
❚Video mode
❚
1 Recording indicator (080) 4 Release mode (still

“No video” indicator (082) photography; 0139)
2 Frame size and rate/Video 5 Sound level (0175)
quality (0172) 6 Microphone sensitivity (0175)
3 Time remaining (080) 7 Frequency response (0332)
Parts of the camera

35
Camera controls
The mode dial

Rotate the mode dial to choose a shooting mode.
Mode Description
A simple, “point-and-shoot” mode that leaves
b Auto
the camera in charge of settings (075, 080).
The camera sets shutter speed and aperture for

P Programmed auto
optimal exposure.
Shutter-priority You choose the shutter speed; the camera

S
auto selects the aperture for best results.
Aperture-priority You choose the aperture; the camera selects the

A
auto shutter speed for best results.
M Manual You control both shutter speed and aperture.
U1
User settings Assign frequently-used settings to these
U2
modes positions for quick recall.
U3
Camera controls
36
The command dials
Rotate the command dials to choose settings for shutter speed,
aperture, or the functions assigned to other camera controls.
The S button
Adjust the camera’s sensitivity to light (ISO sensitivity) in accord with
lighting conditions.
❚Photo mode
❚
ISO sensitivity can be adjusted by holding the S button and rotating
the main command dial.
･ In modes P, S, A, and M, you can hold the S button and rotate the
sub-command dial to choose from “ISO AUTO” (auto ISO sensitivity
control enabled) or “ISO” (auto ISO sensitivity control disabled).
･ In b mode, the setting is fixed at ISO-A (AUTO), and the camera sets
the ISO sensitivity automatically.
Camera controls
37
❚Video mode
❚
ISO sensitivity can be adjusted by holding the S button and rotating
the main command dial. ISO sensitivity for video recording can be
adjusted in mode M only.
･ The value selected for [ISO sensitivity settings] > [ISO sensitivity
(mode M)] applies when [Off] is selected for [ISO sensitivity
settings] > [Auto ISO control (mode M)].
･ You can choose between “ISO AUTO” (auto ISO sensitivity control
enabled) and “ISO” (auto ISO sensitivity control disabled) by holding
the S button and rotating the sub-command dial.
The E (exposure compensation) button

Alter exposure from the value suggested by the camera. Exposure
compensation can be used to make pictures brighter or darker.
−1 EV No exposure +1 EV
compensation
･ Exposure compensation can be adjusted by holding the E button

and rotating either command dial.
･ Higher values make the subject brighter, lower values darker.
Camera controls
38
Monitor
The orientation and angle of the monitor can be adjusted.
● Normal shooting
When shooting normally, use the monitor so that it is facing out and set
in the camera body.
● Low angle shooting

Turn the monitor facing up to shoot with the camera at low positions.
Camera controls
39
● High angle shooting
Turn the monitor facing down to shoot with the camera at high
positions.
● Self-portrait mode
When the monitor is facing the front of the camera, the camera changes
to self-portrait mode (040).
D Precautions for the monitor

･ When rotating the monitor, rotate slowly within the allowable range.
Applying excessive force will result in damage to the camera body and
monitor.
･ When you are not using the monitor, turning it facing inward and setting
it in the camera body is recommended to prevent damage and dirt.
･ Do not carry the camera by holding the monitor. This could result in
damage to the camera.
❚Shooting in self-portrait mode

❚
If the monitor is set to the self-portrait mode position, it will switch to
self-portrait mode.
Camera controls
40
The monitor will display an image as if it were reflected on a mirror
(inverted image), but the actual image is saved from the perspective of
the camera.
･ In self-portrait mode, you can use touch controls on the monitor to

set the self-timer and exposure compensation during photo mode. In
video mode, you can set the exposure compensation.
･ If you tap the self-timer icon (q), you can set the shutter-release
delay and the number of shots.
･ If you tap the exposure compensation icon (w), you can change the
image brightness.
･ Press the shutter-release button halfway to focus. Press the shutter-

release button all the way down to take a photo.
･ You can use touch AF and touch shutter.
･ If you press the video-record button, a photo is taken in photo mode.
In video mode, video recording starts.
･ If the monitor is moved from the self-portrait mode position, self-
portrait mode ends.
Camera controls
41
D Self-portrait mode
In self-portrait mode, note the following:
･ During self-portrait mode, controls other than the power switch, shutter-
release button, video-record button, photo/video selector, and mode dial
are disabled.
･ If no operations are performed for about 1 minute when Custom Setting
c3 [Power off delay] > [Standby timer] is set to less than 1 minute, or for
the specified time when set to 1 minute or more, the standby timer will
expire.
･ The following settings are fixed.
- [Release mode]: [Self-timer]
- [Focus mode] in the video recording menu: [Full-time AF]
- [Touch controls] > [Enable/disable touch controls]: [Enable]
･ The following functions cannot be used.
- [Long exposure NR]
- [Auto bracketing]
- [HDR (high dynamic range)]
- [Exposure delay mode]
･ When [Self-portrait mode] (0402) in the setup menu is set to [Disable],
the monitor will not switch to self-portrait mode even if it is set to the self-
portrait mode position.
Touch controls
The touch-sensitive monitor offers a variety of controls that can be
operated by touching the display with your fingers.
Camera controls
42
❚Focusing and releasing the shutter
❚
･ Touch the monitor to focus on the selected point (touch AF).
･ In photo mode, the shutter will be released when you lift your finger
from the display (touch shutter).
･ Touch shutter/AF settings can be adjusted by tapping the W icon
(0101).
❚Adjusting settings
❚
･ Tap highlighted settings in the display.
･ You can then choose the desired option by tapping icons or sliders.
Camera controls
43
･ Tap Z or press J to select the chosen option and return to the
previous display.
❚Playback
❚
･ Flick left or right to view other pictures during full-frame playback.
･ In full-frame playback, touching the bottom of the display brings up

a frame-advance bar. Slide your finger left or right over the bar to
scroll rapidly to other pictures.
･ To zoom in on a picture displayed during full-frame playback, use a

stretch gesture or give the display two quick taps. You can adjust the
Camera controls
44
zoom ratio using stretch gestures to zoom in and pinch gestures to
zoom out.
･ Use slide gestures to view other parts of the image during zoom.
･ Giving the display two quick taps while zoom is in effect cancels
zoom.
･ To “zoom out” to a thumbnail view, use a pinch gesture during full-
frame playback. Use pinch and stretch to choose the number of
images displayed from 4, 9, and 72 frames.
･ Using a pinch gesture when 72 frames are displayed selects calendar

playback. Use a stretch gesture to return to the 72-frame display.
❚Viewing videos
❚
･ Videos are indicated by a 1 icon; to start playback, tap the on-screen
guide.
･ Tap the display to pause. Tap again to resume.
Camera controls
45
･ Tap Z to exit to full-frame playback.
❚The i menu
❚
･ Tap the i icon to display the i menu during shooting (056,
0145).
･ Tap items to view and change options.
❚Text entry
❚
･ When a keyboard is displayed, you can enter text by tapping the keys.
1 Text display area 3 Keyboard selection

2 Keyboard area
･ To position the cursor, tap e or f or tap directly in the text display

area.
Camera controls
46
･ To cycle through the upper- and lower-case and symbol keyboards,
tap the keyboard selection button.
❚Navigating the menus

❚
･ Slide up or down to scroll.
･ Tap a menu icon to choose a menu.
･ Tap menu items to display options. You can then choose the desired
option by tapping icons or sliders.
･ To exit without changing settings, tap Z.
Camera controls
47
D The touch screen
･ The touch screen responds to static electricity. It may not respond when
touched with fingernails or gloved hands.
･ Do not touch the screen with sharp objects.
･ Do not use excessive force.
･ The screen may not respond when covered with third-party protective
films.
･ The screen may not respond when touched simultaneously in multiple
locations.
A Enabling or disabling touch controls

Touch controls can be enabled or disabled using the [Touch controls] item in
the setup menu.
The DISP button

Use the DISP button to cycle through the following displays:
Camera controls
48
❚Photo mode
❚
1 Indicators on 4 Virtual horizon

2 Simplified display 5 Information display (0531)
3 Histogram 1, 2
1 Displayed when [On] is selected for Custom Setting d6 [Apply settings

to live view].
2 Not displayed if [On] is selected for [Overlay shooting] during multiple
exposure photography.
A Turning off the information display

In Custom Setting f2 [Custom controls (shooting)], you can assign [Live
view info display off] to turn off the information display at the press of a
button. Press it again to turn on the display.
Camera controls
49
❚Video mode
❚
1 Indicators on 3 Histogram
2 Simplified display 4 Virtual horizon
The X and W (Q) buttons

Zoom the display in the monitor in or out during shooting or playback.
❚Shooting
❚
Press X to zoom in on the view through the lens during shooting. Press
X to increase the zoom ratio, W (Q) to zoom out.
Camera controls
50
❚Playback
❚
Press X to zoom in on pictures during full-frame playback. Press X to
increase the zoom ratio, W (Q) to zoom out. Pressing W (Q) when the
picture is displayed full frame “zooms out” to the thumbnail list. Pressing
W (Q) when 72 frames are displayed selects calendar playback.
The A (g) button

Lock the focus and exposure when shooting, or protect images during
playback.
❚Shooting
❚
Lock the focus and exposure at the same time.
❚Playback
❚
Protect the current image.
Camera controls
51
The G button
Press the G button to view the menus.
1 D [PLAYBACK MENU] (0229) 6 N [RETOUCH MENU] (0419)

2 C [PHOTO SHOOTING MENU] 7 O [MY MENU]/m [RECENT
(0234) SETTINGS]* (0444)
3 1 [VIDEO RECORDING MENU] 8 The d Help icon (056)
(0324) 9 Current settings
4 A [CUSTOM SETTINGS MENU]
(0335)
5 B [SETUP MENU] (0386)
* You can choose the menu displayed. The default is [MY MENU].
Camera controls
52
❚Using the menus
❚
You can navigate the menus using the multi selector and J button.
1 Move cursor up 4 Move cursor down

2 Select highlighted item 5 Cancel and return to previous
3 Display sub-menu, select menu, or move cursor left
highlighted item, or move
cursor right
1 Highlight the icon for the current menu.

Press 4 to place the cursor in the menu-selection area.
Camera controls
53
2 Select a menu.
Press 1 or 3 to select the desired menu.
3 Position the cursor in the selected menu.

Press 2 to position the cursor in the selected menu.
4 Highlight a menu item.

Press 1 or 3 to highlight a menu item.
Camera controls
54
5 Display options.
Press 2 to display options for the selected menu item.
6 Highlight an option.
Press 1 or 3 to highlight an option.
7 Select the highlighted option.
･ Press J to select the highlighted option.

･ To exit without making a selection, press the G button.
･ To exit the menus and return to shooting mode, press the shutter-
release button halfway.
D Grayed-out items
Some items and menu options may be unavailable depending on the mode
and camera status. Unavailable items are displayed in gray.
Camera controls
55
A The d (help) icon
･ Where available, a description of the currently-selected item can be
viewed by pressing the W (Q) button.
･ Press 1 or 3 to scroll.
･ Press W (Q) again to return to the menus.
A Touch controls
You can also navigate the menus using touch controls (042).
The i button (the i menu)

For quick access to frequently-used settings, press the i button or tap
the i icon to view the i menu.
･ Different menus are displayed during photo mode and video mode.
Camera controls
56
･ Options can be viewed by tapping items in the display or by
highlighting items and pressing J; selections can then be made
using the multi selector.
･ Items for which the camera displays an on-screen guide can be
adjusted by highlighting them in the i menu and rotating a
command dial. In some cases, adjustments can be made using both
the main and sub-command dials.
A The playback i menu

Pressing the i button during playback displays a context-sensitive i menu of
frequently-used playback options.
❚Customizing the i menu

❚
The items displayed in the i menu during shooting can be chosen using
Custom Setting f1 or g1 [Customize i menu].
Camera controls
57
1 Highlight Custom Setting f1 or g1 [Customize i menu] and
press J.
See “The G button” (052) for information on using the menus.
2 Highlight the position you want to change and press J.
A list of the items available for the selected position will be

displayed.
3 Highlight the desired item and press J.
･ The item will be assigned to the selected position and the options
shown in Step 2 will be displayed.
･ Repeat Steps 2 and 3 as desired.
4 Press the G button.

Changes will be saved and the Custom Settings menu will be
displayed.
Camera controls
58
The Fn1 and Fn2 buttons
Use the Fn1 or Fn2 button for quick access to selected settings.
･ By default, the Fn1 button is assigned white balance (0109) and the
Fn2 button focus- and AF-area–mode selection (090).
･ The assigned setting can be adjusted by holding the Fn1 or Fn2
button and rotating the command dials. In some cases, adjustments
can be made using both the main and sub-command dials.
❚Choosing roles for the Fn1 and Fn2 buttons

❚
The roles played by the Fn1 and Fn2 buttons can be selected by using
Custom Setting f2 [Custom controls (shooting)] or g2 [Custom
controls] > [Fn1 button] and [Fn2 button].
1 Highlight Custom Setting f2 [Custom controls (shooting)] or g2

[Custom controls] and press J.
See “The G button” (052) for information on using the menus.
Camera controls
59
2 Highlight the option for the desired button and press J.
A list of the items available for the selected button will be displayed.
3 Highlight the desired item and press J.
･ The item will be assigned to the selected button and the options
shown in Step 2 will be displayed.
･ Repeat Steps 2 and 3 to assign a role to the remaining button.
4 Press the G button.

Changes will be saved and the Custom Settings menu will be
displayed.
Camera controls
60
First steps
Attaching the strap
To attach a strap (whether the supplied strap or one that has been
purchased separately):
Attaching the strap

61
Inserting the battery and a memory
card
･ Turn the camera off before inserting or removing the battery and
memory card.
･ Using the battery to keep the orange battery latch pressed to one
side, slide the battery into the battery chamber until the latch locks it
in place.
･ Holding the memory card in the orientation shown, slide it straight
into the slot until it clicks into place.
Inserting the battery and a memory card

62
D Removing the battery
To remove the battery, turn the camera off and open the battery-chamber/
memory card slot cover. Press the battery latch in the direction shown by the
arrow to release the battery and then remove the battery by hand.
D Removing the memory card

After confirming that the memory card access lamp is off, turn the camera off
and open the battery-chamber/memory card slot cover. Press the memory
card in to eject it (q), and pull it out to remove it (w).
Battery level
･ The battery level is shown in the shooting display while the camera is
on.

63
･ The battery level display changes as the battery level diminishes,
from L through K, and H. When the battery level falls to H,
suspend shooting and charge the battery or ready a spare battery.
･ If the message [Shutter release disabled. Recharge battery.] is
displayed, charge or exchange the battery.
D The standby timer

The camera uses a standby timer to help reduce the drain on the battery. If
no operations are performed for about 30 seconds, the standby timer will
expire and the monitor will turn off. A few seconds prior to turning off, the
display will dim. They can be reactivated by pressing the shutter-release
button halfway. The length of time before the standby timer expires
automatically can be selected using Custom Setting c3 [Power off delay] >
[Standby timer].
Number of exposures remaining

･ When the camera is on, the shooting display shows the number of
photographs that can be taken at current settings.
･ Values over 1000 are rounded down to the nearest hundred. For
example, values between 1500 and 1599 are shown as 1.5 k.

64
Charging the battery
Fully charge the supplied EN-EL25 battery before use. With the battery
inserted in the camera, connect the camera with a computer using the
supplied USB cable to charge.
D Battery care
Read and follow the warnings and cautions in “For your safety” (020) and
“Caring for the camera and battery: Cautions” (0572).
1 Insert the EN-EL25 into the camera (062).

65
2 After confirming that the camera is off, connect the supplied
USB cable (q) to the camera, and then connect it to a computer.
Do not use force or attempt to insert the connectors at an angle.
･ Turn on the computer before charging.

･ The camera charge lamp (w) lights amber while charging is in
progress. The lamp turns off when charging is complete.
･ A battery will fully charge in about 7 hours and 40 minutes (when
charging an exhausted battery at an input of 5 V/500 mA).
Depending on the standard and type of USB connector on the
computer, the charging time may be shorter.
･ When charging is complete, disconnect the USB cable. Be sure to
keep the connectors straight when disconnecting them.
･ Computers will also supply current to power the battery when
connected via a UC-E25 USB cable (available separately).

66
D Notes when charging using the supplied USB cable
･ If the battery cannot be charged using the supplied USB cable to connect
the camera and computer, for example because the battery is not
compatible or the temperature of the camera is elevated, the charge lamp
will flash rapidly for about 30 seconds and then turn off. If the charge
lamp is off and you did not observe the battery charging, turn the camera
on and check the battery level.
･ When charging, do not use the connectors of a USB hub or keyboard.
Connect the camera and computer directly.
･ If the computer goes into hibernation (sleep mode) while charging, the
camera stops charging. To continue charging, wake up the computer from
hibernation (sleep mode).
･ Depending on the model and product specifications, some computers
will not supply current to charge the camera.
A Using the supplied USB cable or a separately sold UC-E25

USB cable to supply power
･ If [Enable] is selected for [USB power delivery] in the setup menu, the
camera will be supplied with power when it is turned on. For more
information, see ““Power delivery” versus “charging”” (0411).
･ The battery will not charge while the camera is powered by an outside
source.
･ If you use the supplied USB cable to supply power from a computer, the
camera battery will be consumed even while power is being supplied. If
you use the separately sold UC-E25 USB cable, the camera battery will not
be consumed (the camera battery may be consumed depending on your
computer model and specifications).
A Charging or supplying power from a household outlet

When charging or supplying power from a household outlet, use the
separately sold EH-7P Charging AC Adapter (0557).

67
Attaching a lens
･ The camera can be used with Z mount lenses. The lens generally used
in this document for illustrative purposes is a NIKKOR Z DX 16–50mm
f/3.5–6.3 VR.
･ Be careful to prevent dust entering the camera.
･ Confirm that the camera is off before attaching the lens.
- Remove the camera body cap (q, w) and rear lens cap (e, r).
- Align the mounting marks on the camera (t) and lens (y). Do not
touch the image sensor or lens contacts.
Attaching a lens
68
- Rotate the lens as shown until it clicks into place (u).
･ Remove the front lens cap before taking pictures.
D F mount lenses
･ Be sure to attach the FTZ II/FTZ mount adapter (available separately)
before using F mount lenses (0556).
･ Attempting to attach F mount lenses directly to the camera could damage
the lens or image sensor.
Detaching lenses
･ After turning the camera off, press and hold the lens release button
(q) while turning the lens in the direction shown (w), and then
detach the lens.
･ After removing the lens, replace the lens caps and camera body cap.
Attaching a lens
69
Opening the monitor
Slowly rotate the monitor without using excessive force.
Opening the monitor

70
Turning on the camera
When the camera is turned on for the first time, the language selection
screen is displayed. Choose a language and then set the camera clock
(no other operations can be performed until the clock is set).
1 Turn the camera on.
･ The [Language] selection screen will be displayed.
2 Select a language.
･ Press 1 or 3 to highlight the desired language and press J (the
languages available vary with the country or region in which the
camera was originally purchased).
･ The [Time zone] screen will be displayed.

71
3 Choose a time zone.
･ Press 1 or 3 to choose a time zone and press J.

･ The display shows the selected cities in the chosen zone and the
difference between the time in the chosen zone and UTC.
･ The [Date format] screen will be displayed.
4 Choose a date format.
･ Highlight the desired date (year, month, and day) display order
and press J.
･ The [Daylight saving time] screen will be displayed.

72
5 Turn daylight saving time on or off.
･ Highlight [On] (daylight saving time on) or [Off] (daylight saving

time off) and press J.
･ Selecting [On] advances the clock one hour; to undo the effect,
select [Off].
･ The [Date and time] screen will be displayed.
6 Set the clock.
･ Press 4 or 2 to highlight date and time items and press 1 or 3 to

change them.
･ Press J to confirm the date and time setting.
･ The message [Done.] will be displayed and the camera switches to
shooting mode.

73
D The 1 icon
A flashing 1 icon in the shooting display indicates that the camera clock has
been reset. The date and time recorded with new photographs will not be
correct; use the [Time zone and date] > [Date and time] option in the setup
menu to set the clock to the correct time and date. The camera clock is
powered by an independent clock battery. The clock battery charges when
the main battery is inserted in the camera. It takes about 2 days to charge.
Once charged, it will power the clock for about a month.

74
Basic photography and
playback
Taking photographs (b auto)
Select b (auto) mode for simple “point-and-shoot” photography.
D Lenses with retractable barrels

Lenses with retractable barrels must be extended before use. Rotate the
zoom ring as shown until the lens clicks into the extended position.
1 Select photo mode by rotating the photo/video selector to C.

75
3 Ready the camera.
Holding the handgrip in your right hand and cradling the camera
body or lens with your left, bring your elbows in against the sides of
your chest.
Landscape (wide) Portrait (tall) orientation

orientation
4 Frame the photograph.
Position the main subject in the AF-area brackets (5).

･ The AF-area brackets will disappear and a yellow border indicating
the focus point appears around the faces of human subjects
detected by the camera. If the camera detects the subject’s eyes,
the yellow focus point will instead appear over one or the other of
their eyes.

76
5 Press the shutter-release button halfway to focus.
･ The focus point will be displayed in green when the camera

focuses. If the camera is unable to focus, the AF-area brackets will
flash.
･ If the camera detects human faces or eyes, the focus point will
light green when the subject is in focus. The focus point will flash
in red when the camera does not focus.
6 Smoothly press the shutter-release button the rest of the way

down to take the photograph.

77
D The memory card access lamp
The memory card access lamp will light while the photograph is being
recorded. Do not remove the memory card or battery.

78
A The touch shutter
You can also take a photograph by touching the monitor. Touch your subject
to focus and lift your finger to release the shutter.
A Zooming in photo mode

Press the X button in photo mode to zoom in on the view (up to about 31×).
･ The zoom ratio increases every time you press the X button, and
decreases every time you press the W (Q) button.
･ A navigation window showing the area currently visible will appear at the
bottom right corner of the display.
･ Use the multi selector to scroll to areas of the frame not visible in the
monitor.

79
Recording videos (b auto)
b (auto) mode can also be used for simple, “point-and-shoot” video
recording.
1 Select video mode by rotating the photo/video selector to 1.
Note that optional flash units cannot be used when the camera is in
video mode.

80
3 Press the video-record button to start recording.
･ The REC lamp will light and a recording indicator will be displayed
in the monitor. The monitor also shows the time remaining, or in
other words the approximate amount of new footage that can be
recorded to the memory card.
1 Recording indicator
2 Time remaining
･ Sound is recorded via the built-in microphone. Do not cover the
microphone during recording.
･ If you tap your subject in the monitor during recording, the focus
point will track the subject as it moves through the frame (0100).
4 Press the video-record button again to end recording.

81
D The memory card access lamp
The memory card access lamp will light while the video is being recorded. Do
not remove the memory card or battery.
D The 0 icon
A 0 icon indicates that videos cannot be recorded.
D The REC lamp

･ If there is a risk of video recording being interrupted, the REC lamp will
flash as follows.
Status Description
When the remaining time that can be recorded on
Flashes slowly
the memory card is short while recording videos
Flashes twice quickly

When the battery is low during video mode
(repeats)
Flashes 4 times When the temperature inside the camera

quickly (repeats) increases during video mode
･ The brightness of the REC lamp can be changed using [REC lamp
brightness] in the setup menu. To prevent the light from the REC lamp
from appearing in videos, set [Video recording] to [Off].
D Recording videos
･ Video recording will end automatically if:
- the maximum length is reached,
- the battery is fully discharged,
- another mode is selected,

82
- you switch modes using the photo/video selector,
- the lens is removed, or
- the temperature inside the camera increases.
･ Sounds made by the camera may be audible in footage recorded:
- during autofocus,
- during vibration reduction, or
- when power aperture is used.
Taking photos in video mode

Photos can be taken in video mode by pressing the shutter-release
button all the way down. If you rotate either command dial while
pressing the c (E) button in video mode, you can select the single
frame or continuous release mode.
･ A C icon will flash in the display when a photo is taken.
･ The frame advance rate for [Continuous] release mode varies with
the option selected for [Frame size/frame rate].
･ Photos can be taken while recording is in progress. Taking photos
does not interrupt video recording. Note, however, that only one
photo will be taken each time the shutter-release button is pressed,
even if [Continuous] is selected for release mode.

83
D Taking photos in video mode
･ Photo-mode settings do not apply to photos taken in video mode.
･ Up to 40 photographs can be taken with each video.
･ Note that photos can be taken even when the subject is not in focus.
･ Photos are recorded at the dimensions currently selected for video frame
size.
･ Image quality is fixed at [JPEG fine].
･ A N icon indicates that photos cannot be taken.
D Photography and video recording

･ You may notice the following in the shooting display. These phenomena
will also be visible in any photos or footage recorded with the camera.
- Flicker or banding in scenes lit by such sources as fluorescent, mercury
vapor, or sodium lamps
- Moving objects in the display appear distorted (individual subjects such
as trains or cars moving at high speed through the frame may be
distorted, or the entire frame may appear distorted when the camera is
panned horizontally)
- Jagged edges, color fringing, moiré, and bright spots may appear in the
display
- Bright regions or bands may appear in scenes lit by flashing signs and
other intermittent light sources or when the subject is briefly
illuminated by a strobe or other bright, momentary light source
- Flicker occurring when power aperture is used during video recording
･ Note that noise (randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, or lines) and
unexpected colors may appear if you use the X button to zoom in on the
view through the lens during recording.
･ When recording, avoid pointing the camera at the sun or other strong
light sources. Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to
the camera’s internal circuitry.

84
A Zooming in video mode
Press the X button in video mode to zoom in on the view (079). Press the X
button during video recording to display at 1:1 (100%). Press the W (Q)
button to cancel zoom.

85
Viewing photos
Press the K button to view photos and videos recorded with the
camera on the monitor.
･ Press 4 or 2, or flick left or right on the monitor to view other

images.
･ Videos are indicated by a 1 icon at the upper left of the monitor.

Press the J button, or tap the a icon in the monitor to play back
videos.
･ To end playback and return to shooting mode, press the shutter-

release button halfway.
Viewing videos
Monitor display and operation during video playback are as follows.
Viewing photos
86
❚Monitor display during video playback
❚
The following information is displayed during video playback, allowing
you to confirm the video length and playback time. Your approximate
position in the video can also be confirmed from the video progress bar.
1 1 icon 5 Progress bar

2 Length 6 Volume
3 a icon 7 Guide
4 Current position/total length
❚Video playback operations

❚
You can perform the following during video playback.
Operation Description
Pause Press 3 to pause playback.
Press the J button to resume playback when playback is

Resume
paused or during rewind/advance.
･ Press 4 to rewind, 2 to advance. Speed increases with

each press, from 2× to 4× to 8× to 16×.
Rewind/ ･ Keep 4 or 2 pressed to skip respectively to the first
advance frame or last frame.
･ The first frame is indicated by a h in the top right
corner of the display, the last frame by a i.
Viewing photos
87
Operation Description
Start slow-
Press 3 while the video is paused to start slow-motion
motion
playback.
playback
･ Press 4 or 2 while the video is paused to rewind or

Jog rewind/ advance one frame at a time.
advance ･ Keep 4 or 2 pressed for continuous rewind or
advance.
Rotate the main command dial one stop to skip ahead or

Skip 10 s
back 10 s.
Skip to last or Rotate the sub-command dial to skip to the last or first
first frame frame.
Adjust volume Press X to increase volume, W (Q) to decrease.
To display the [EDIT VIDEO] menu, pause playback and

Trim video
press the i button.
Exit Press 1 or K to exit to full-frame playback.
Resume Press the shutter-release button halfway to return to

shooting shooting mode.
Deleting unwanted pictures

Pictures can be deleted as described below. Note that pictures cannot
be recovered once deleted.
Viewing photos
88
1 Display the picture.
･ Press the K button to start playback and press 4 or 2 until the

desired picture is displayed.
2 Delete the picture.
･ Press the O button; a confirmation dialog will be displayed. Press

the O button again to delete the image and return to playback.
･ To exit without deleting the picture, press K.
A The playback menu [Delete] item

Use [Delete] in the playback menu to:
･ Delete multiple pictures
･ Delete pictures taken on selected dates
･ Delete all pictures in selected folders
Viewing photos
89
Basic settings
Focus
Focus mode
Choose how the camera focuses.
❚Choosing a focus mode

❚
･ The focus mode can be selected using the [Focus mode] items in the
i menu, photo shooting menu, and video recording menu (0170,
0265, 0330).
･ At default settings, the focus mode can also be selected by holding

the Fn2 button and rotating the main command dial (059).
Option Description
･ The camera uses AF-S for stationary subjects, and
[AF mode
AF-A AF-C for moving subjects.
auto-switch]
･ Available only in photo mode.
Focus
90
Option Description
･ Use with stationary subjects. When you press the
shutter-release button halfway to focus, the focus
point will turn from red to green and focus will
lock. If the camera fails to focus, the focus point
AF-S [Single AF] will flash red and the shutter release will be
disabled.
･ At default settings, the shutter can only be
released if the camera is able to focus (focus
priority).
･ For moving subjects. The camera adjusts focus

continuously in response to changes in the
distance to the subject while the shutter-release
[Continuous
AF-C button is pressed halfway.
AF]
･ At default settings, the shutter can be released
whether or not the subject is in focus (release
priority).
･ The camera adjusts focus continuously in

response to subject movement or changes in
composition.
AF-F [Full-time AF] ･ When the shutter-release button is pressed
halfway, the focus point will turn from red to
green and focus will lock.
･ This option is only available in video mode.
Focus manually (0103). The shutter can be released

MF [Manual focus]
whether or not the subject is in focus.
Focus
91
D Autofocus
･ The camera may be unable to focus if:
- The subject contains lines parallel to the long edge of the frame
- The subject lacks contrast
- The subject in the focus point contains areas of sharply contrasting
brightness
- The focus point includes night-time spot lighting or a neon sign or other
light source that changes in brightness
- Flicker or banding appears under fluorescent, mercury-vapor, sodium-
vapor, or similar lighting
- A cross (star) filter or other special filter is used
- The subject appears smaller than the focus point
- The subject is dominated by regular geometric patterns (e.g., blinds or a
row of windows in a skyscraper)
- The subject is moving
･ The monitor may brighten or darken while the camera focuses.
･ The focus point may sometimes be displayed in green when the camera is
unable to focus.
A Focus position memory

To save the focus position even when the camera is turned off, set [Save
focus position] in the setup menu to [On]. However, some time may be
required until the camera can be used after turning it on (depending on
zoom operation and changes in temperature, the focus position after turning
on the camera may change from the position before the camera was turned
off).
AF-area mode
Choose how the camera selects the focus point for autofocus.
･ In modes other than [Auto-area AF], [Auto-area AF (people)], and
[Auto-area AF (animals)], the focus point can be positioned using
the multi selector (097).
Focus
92
❚Choosing an AF-area mode
❚
･ AF-area mode can be selected using the [AF-area mode] items in the
i menu, photo shooting menu, and video recording menu (0169,
0266, 0331).
･ At default settings, AF-area mode can also be selected by holding the

Fn2 button and rotating the sub-command dial (059).
Option Description
･ With a focus area smaller than that employed for
single-point AF, pinpoint AF is used for pinpoint focus
on a selected spot in the frame.
･ Focusing may be slower than with single-point AF.
[Pinpoint
3 ･ Recommended for shots involving static subjects,
AF]
such as buildings, in-studio product photography, or
close-ups.
･ This option is only available when photo mode is
selected and [Single AF] is chosen for [Focus mode].
[Single- ･ The camera focuses on a point selected by the user.

d
point AF] ･ Use with stationary subjects.
Focus
93
Option Description
･ The camera focuses on a point selected by the user. If
the subject briefly leaves the selected point, the
camera will focus based on information from
surrounding focus points.
[Dynamic-
e ･ Use for photographs of athletes and other active
area AF]
subjects that are hard to frame using single-point AF.
･ This option is only available when photo mode is
selected and [AF mode auto-switch] or [Continuous
AF] is chosen for focus mode.
Focus
94
Option Description
[Wide-area ･ As for single-point AF except that the camera focuses
f
AF (S)] on a wider area.
･ Choose for snapshots, subjects that are in motion, and
[Wide-area
g other subjects that are difficult to photograph using
AF (L)]
single-point AF.
[Wide-area ･ During video recording, wide-area AF can be used for
1 AF (L- smooth focus when making panning or tilting shots or
people)] recording moving subjects.
･ If the selected focus area contains subjects at different
distances from the camera, the camera will assign
priority to the closest subject.
･ The focus areas for [Wide-area AF (L)] are larger than
those for [Wide-area AF (S)].
[Wide-area
･ If [Wide-area AF (L-people)] is selected, the camera
2 AF (L-
detects and focuses on human faces or eyes (eye-
animals)]
detection AF/face-detection AF, 097).
･ If [Wide-area AF (L-animals)] is selected, the camera
detects and focuses on faces or eyes of dogs and cats
(animal-detection AF, 099).
Focus
95
Option Description
[Auto-area ･ The camera automatically detects the subject and
h
AF] selects the focus area.
･ Use on occasions when you don’t have time to select
[Auto-area
5 the focus point yourself, for portraits, or for snapshots
AF (people)]
and other spur-of-the-moment photos.
･ If [Auto-area AF (people)] is selected, the camera
detects and focuses on human faces or eyes (eye-
detection AF/face-detection AF, 097).
･ If [Auto-area AF (animals)] is selected, the camera
detects and focuses on faces or eyes of dogs and cats
[Auto-area
(animal-detection AF, 099).
6 AF
･ Subject tracking (0100) can be initiated by pressing
(animals)]
the J button. Custom Setting f2 [Custom controls
(shooting)] or g2 [Custom controls] can be used to
configure the Fn1 or Fn2 button to start subject-
tracking AF (0359, 0375). Subject-tracking AF can
also be assigned to the lens Fn or Fn2 button.
A s: The center focus point

A dot appears in the focus point when it is in the center of the frame.
A Quick focus-point selection

･ For quicker focus-point selection, choose [Alternating points] for Custom
Setting a4 [Focus points used] to use only a quarter of the available focus
points. The number of points available for [Pinpoint AF], [Wide-area AF
(L)], [Wide-area AF (L-people)], or [Wide-area AF (L-animals)] does not
change even if [Alternating points] is selected.
･ You can choose [Select center focus point] for Custom Setting f2
[Custom controls (shooting)] > [OK button] to allow the J button to be
used to quickly select the center focus point.
Focus
96
❚Focus-point selection
❚
The multi selector can be used to choose the focus point when an
option other than [Auto-area AF], [Auto-area AF (people)], or [Auto-
area AF (animals)] is selected for AF-area mode (092).
❚Detecting faces or eyes of portrait subjects (face/

❚
eye-detection AF)
If [Wide-area AF (L-people)] or [Auto-area AF (people)] is selected for
[AF-area mode] in the photo shooting menu or video recording menu,
the camera detects human faces and eyes (eye-detection AF/face-
detection AF).
･ A yellow border indicating the focus point appears around the faces
of human subjects detected by the camera. If the camera detects the
Focus
97
subject’s eyes, the yellow focus point will instead appear over one or
the other of their eyes.
･ If AF-C is selected for focus mode or if AF-A is selected and the

camera is using AF-C, the focus point will light yellow when faces or
eyes are detected.
･ If AF-S is selected for focus mode or if AF-A is selected and the
camera is using AF-S, the focus point will turn green when the
camera focuses.
･ If more than one human face or eye is detected when [Auto-area AF
(people)] is selected, e and f icons will appear on the focus point.
You will be able to position the focus point over a different face or
eye by pressing 4 or 2.
･ If the subject looks away after their face is detected, the focus point
will move to track their motion.
･ During playback, you can zoom in on the face or eye used for focus
by pressing J.
D Face/eye-detection AF
Eye and face detection may not perform as expected if:
･ the subject’s face occupies a very large or very small proportion of the
frame,
･ the subject’s face is lit too brightly or too poorly,
･ the subject is wearing glasses or sunglasses,
･ the subject’s face or eyes are obscured by hair or other objects, or
･ the subject moves excessively during shooting.
Focus
98
❚Focusing on the faces or eyes of animals (animal-
❚
detection AF)
If [Wide-area AF (L-animals)] or [Auto-area AF (animals)] is selected
for [AF-area mode] in the photo shooting menu or video recording
menu, the camera detects the faces and eyes of dogs and cats (animal-
detection AF).
･ When the camera detects a face of a dog or cat, a yellow border

indicating the focus point will appear around the subject’s face. If the
camera detects the subject’s eyes, the yellow focus point will instead
appear over one or the other of their eyes.
･ If AF-C is selected for focus mode or if AF-A is selected and the

camera is using AF-C, the focus point will light yellow when faces or
eyes are detected.
･ If AF-S is selected for focus mode or if AF-A is selected and the
camera is using AF-S, the focus point will turn green when the
camera focuses.
･ If [Auto-area AF (animals)] is selected and more than one animal or
more than one eye is detected, e and f icons will appear on the
focus point. You will be able to position the focus point over a
different face or eye by pressing 4 or 2.
Focus
99
･ During playback, you can zoom in on the face or eye used for focus
by pressing J.
D Animal-detection AF
･ Animal face- and eye-detection may not perform as expected if:
- the subject’s face occupies a very large or very small proportion of the
frame,
- the subject’s face is lit too brightly or too poorly,
- the subject’s face or eyes are obscured by fur or other objects,
- the subject’s eyes are similar in color to the rest of their face, or
- the subject moves excessively during shooting.
･ Depending on shooting conditions, the camera may fail to detect the
faces or eyes of some breeds when [Wide-area AF (L-animals)] or [Auto-
area AF (animals)] is enabled. Alternatively, the camera may display a
border around subjects that are not the faces or eyes of dogs or cats.
❚Subject-tracking AF
❚
When [Auto-area AF], [Auto-area AF (people)], or [Auto-area AF
(animals)] is selected for AF-area mode, the camera can track the
subject in the selected focus point.
･ Press J to enable focus tracking; the focus point will change to a
targeting reticle.
･ Position the reticle over the target and press J again to start
tracking; the focus point will track the selected subject as it moves
through the frame. To end tracking and select the center focus point,
press J again. In photo mode, if subject tracking was initiated in
focus mode AF-C or AF-A by pressing the shutter-release button
Focus
100
halfway, the camera will track the subject only while the shutter-
release button is pressed; releasing the shutter-release button ends
tracking and restores the focus point selected before tracking started.
･ To exit subject-tracking mode, press the W (Q) button.
D Subject tracking
The camera may be unable to track subjects if they:
･ are similar in color or brightness to the background,
･ change visibly in size, color, or brightness,
･ are too large or too small,
･ are too dark or too bright,
･ move quickly, or
･ leave the frame or are obscured by other objects.
The touch shutter

Touch the display to focus on the selected point. The shutter will be
released when you lift your finger from the display.
Tap the icon shown in the illustration to choose the operation

performed by tapping the display.
Focus
101
Option Description
･ Touch the display to focus on the selected point and
lift your finger to release the shutter. If [Wide-area AF
(L-people)], [Wide-area AF (L-animals)], [Auto-area
[Touch AF (people)], or [Auto-area AF (animals)] is selected
W shutter/ for AF-area mode and the camera detects human faces
touch AF] or eyes or the faces or eyes of dogs or cats, the camera
will focus on the face or eye* closest to the selected
point.
･ Available only in photo mode.
･ Touch the display to focus on the selected point.

Lifting your finger from the display does not release
the shutter.
･ If [Auto-area AF], [Auto-area AF (people)], or [Auto-
area AF (animals)] is selected for AF-area mode, the
V [Touch AF] camera will track the selected subject as it moves
through the frame. To switch to a different subject, tap
it in the display. If the camera detects human faces or
eyes or the faces or eyes of dogs or cats, the camera
will focus on and track the face or eye* closest to the
selected point.
X [Off] Touch shutter disabled.
･ Touch the display to position the focus point. The

camera will not focus and lifting your finger from the
display will not release the shutter.
･ If [Auto-area AF], [Auto-area AF (people)], or [Auto-
[Position
area AF (animals)] is selected for AF-area mode, the
f focus
camera will track the selected subject as it moves
point]
through the frame. To switch to a different subject, tap
it in the display. If the camera detects human faces or
eyes or the faces or eyes of dogs or cats, the camera
will track the face or eye* closest to the selected point.
Focus
102
* When choosing an eye using touch controls, note that the camera may
not focus on the eye on the side you intend. Use the multi selector to
choose the desired eye.
D Taking pictures using touch shooting options

･ Touch controls cannot be used for manual focus.
･ The shutter-release button can be used to take pictures when the W icon
is displayed.
･ Touch controls cannot be used to take photographs during video
recording.
･ Even if the camera is set to a continuous release mode, touch controls can
be used only to take one picture at a time. Use the shutter-release button
for burst photography.
･ In self-timer mode, focus locks on the selected subject when you touch
the monitor and the shutter is released about 10 seconds after you lift
your finger from the display. If the number of shots selected is greater
than 1, the remaining shots will be taken in a single burst.
Manual focus
Manual focus is available in manual focus mode. Use manual focus
when, for example, autofocus does not produce the desired results.
･ Position the focus point over your subject and rotate the focus or
control ring until the subject is in focus.
Focus
103
･ For greater precision, press the X button to zoom in on the view
through the lens.
･ The focus indicator (I) in the shooting display can be used to

confirm whether the subject in the selected focus point is in focus
(electronic rangefinding). The focus point will also light green when
the subject is in focus.
1 Focus distance indicator 2 Focus indicator
Focus indicator Description
The subject is in focus.

(steady)
The focus point is in front of the subject.

(steady)
The focus point is behind the subject.

(steady)
The camera is unable to focus.

(flashes)
Focus
104
･ When using manual focus with subjects not suited to autofocus, note
that the in-focus indicator (I) may be displayed when the subject is
not in focus. Zoom in on the view through the lens and check focus.
Use of a tripod is recommended when the camera is having trouble
focusing.
D Lenses with focus-mode selection

Manual focus mode can be chosen using focus-mode selection controls on
the lens (where available).
D The focal plane mark and flange-back distance

Focus distance is measured from the focal plane mark (E) on the camera
body, which shows the position of the focal plane inside the camera (q). Use
this mark when measuring the distance to your subject for manual focus or
macro photography. The distance between the focal plane and the lens
mounting flange is known as the “flange-back distance” (w). On this camera,
the flange-back distance is 16 mm (0.63 in.).
Focus
105
A Focus peaking
･ If an option other than [Off] is selected for Custom Setting d8 [Focus
peaking] > [Peaking level], objects that are in focus will be indicated by
colored outlines that appear when focus is adjusted manually (focus
peaking).
･ Note that focus peaking may not be displayed if the camera is unable to
detect outlines. Check focus in the shooting display.
Save focus position/Recall focus position

You can use the lens Fn and Fn2 buttons to register the focus position
beforehand and quickly recall the focus position. You can use this
function if a Z mount lens with an autofocus function that has Fn and
Fn2 buttons is attached.
･ If the attached lens has an Fn button but no Fn2 button, you can
assign [Save focus position] to the lens Fn button, but the focus
position cannot be registered even if you press the lens Fn button.
1 In Custom Setting f2 [Custom controls (shooting)] or g2 [Custom

controls], assign the functions to the lens buttons.
Set as follows.
･ [Lens Fn button]: [Save focus position]
･ [Lens Fn2 button]: [Recall focus position]
Focus
106
2 Focus on the subject and then press and hold the lens Fn button
to register the focus position.
･ When the focus position is registered, the 4 icon appears in the

shooting display.
･ The focus position can be registered regardless of the focus mode
setting.
･ The registered focus position is saved even when the camera is
turned off, and the registered focus position is canceled when the
lens is removed.
3 Press the lens Fn2 button to recall the registered focus position.
･ When using autofocus, autofocus features such as Custom Setting

a6 [AF activation] will be available after the focus position is
recalled. To prevent focusing by pressing the shutter-release
button halfway after recalling the focus position, set [AF
activation] to [AF-ON only].
Focus
107
D About beeps
･ If you select an option other than [Off] for [Beep options] > [Beep on/off]
in the setup menu, 2 short beeps sound when:
- you press and hold the lens Fn button to register the focus position, or
- you press the lens Fn2 button to recall the registered focus position.
･ During silent photography or video mode, a beep does not sound even if
you register the focus position or recall the focus position regardless of
the option chosen for [Beep options] in the setup menu.
D [Save focus position]/[Recall focus position]

･ If the information display appears in the monitor, the focus position
cannot be registered.
･ Depending on temperature changes, the focus position may change
when it is registered and when it is recalled.
･ If the focal length changes due to zoom operation, the focus position is
likely to change when it is registered and when it is recalled. If you select
an option other than [Off] for [Beep options] > [Beep on/off] in the setup
menu and the focus position is recalled, 4 short beeps sound.
Focus
108
White balance
White balance ensures that white objects appear white, regardless of
the color of the light source. The default setting (auto white balance, or
j) is recommended with most light sources; if the desired results
cannot be achieved with auto white balance, choose another option as
described below.
Adjusting white balance

･ White balance can be selected using the [White balance] items in
the i menu and the photo shooting menu or video recording menu
(0153, 0244, 0327).
･ At default settings, white balance can also be selected by holding the

Fn1 button and rotating the main command dial (059).
White balance
109
･ When 4 [Auto] or I [Fluorescent] is selected, you can choose a
sub-option by holding the Fn1 button and rotating the sub-
command dial.
Color
Option Description
temperature*
White balance is adjusted
automatically for optimal results
with most light sources. If an
4 [Auto] optional flash unit is used, white
balance will be adjusted in accord
with the conditions in effect when
the flash fires.
i [Keep white
Approx. 3500– Eliminate the warm color cast
(reduce warm
8000 K produced by incandescent lighting.
colors)]
j [Keep Partially preserve the warm color

Approx. 3500–
overall cast produced by incandescent
8000 K
atmosphere] lighting.
k [Keep warm Approx. 3500– Preserve the warm color cast

lighting colors] 8000 K produced by incandescent lighting.
When used under natural light in

D [Natural light Approx. 4500– place of 4 [Auto], this option
auto] 8000 K produces colors closer to those
seen by the naked eye.
White balance
110
Color
Option Description
temperature*
H [Direct Use with subjects lit by direct
Approx. 5200 K
sunlight] sunlight.
Use in daylight under overcast

G [Cloudy] Approx. 6000 K
skies.
Use in daylight with subjects in

M [Shade] Approx. 8000 K
shade.
J [Incandescent] Approx. 3000 K Use under incandescent lighting.
I [Fluorescent]
[Cool-white
Approx. 4200 K
fluorescent] Use under fluorescent lighting;
[Day white choose the bulb type according to
Approx. 5000 K the light source.
fluorescent]
[Daylight
Approx. 6500 K
fluorescent]
5 [Flash] Approx. 5400 K Use for flash photography.
･ Choose the color temperature

directly.
K [Choose color Approx. 2500–
･ To choose a color temperature,
temperature] 10000 K
hold the Fn1 button and rotate
the sub-command dial.
White balance
111
Color
Option Description
temperature*
･ Measure white balance for the
subject or light source or copy
white balance from an existing
photograph.
･ To choose a white balance
L [Preset manual]
preset, hold the Fn1 button and
rotate the sub-command dial.
･ To enter direct measurement
mode, press and hold the Fn1
button (0156).
* Values when fine-tuning is set to 0.
D D [Natural light auto]

D [Natural light auto] may not produce the desired results under artificial
light. Choose 4 [Auto] or an option that matches the light source.
D White balance fine-tuning

At settings other than K [Choose color temperature], white balance can be
fine-tuned. Use the [White balance] items in the i menu, the photo shooting
menu, or video recording menu (0154, 0244).
D Studio flash lighting

4 [Auto] may not produce the desired results with large studio flash units.
Use preset manual white balance or set white balance to 5 [Flash] and use
fine-tuning to adjust white balance.
White balance
112
A Color temperature when shooting with 4 or D
･ The photo info for pictures shot using 4 [Auto] or D [Natural light
auto] lists the color temperature selected by the camera at the time the
picture was taken. You can use this as reference when choosing a value for
K [Choose color temperature].
･ To view shooting data during playback, select [Playback display

options] > [Additional photo info] in the playback menu and place a
check (M) next to [Shooting data].
A Color temperature
The perceived color of a light source varies with the viewer; some may have a
red cast while others appear blue. Color temperature is an objective measure
of the color of a light source, expressed in Kelvins (K). The lower the color
temperature, the redder the cast (q); the higher the temperature, the bluer
the cast (w).
A Choosing a color temperature

In general, choose lower values if your pictures have a red cast or to
intentionally make pictures bluer, higher values if your pictures are tinged
blue or to intentionally make pictures redder.
White balance
113
Silent photography
To enable the electronic shutter and eliminate the noise and vibration
caused by operation of the mechanical shutter, select [On] for [Silent
photography] in the photo shooting menu.
･ An icon is displayed while silent photography is in effect.
･ There is no limit to the number of photos that can be taken in a

single burst, regardless of the option chosen for Custom Setting d2
[Maximum shots per burst].
･ The electronic shutter is used, regardless of the option selected for
Custom Setting d4 [Shutter type].
･ If a release mode other than [Continuous H (extended)] is selected,
the display will briefly go dark when the shutter is released. This
signals that a photo has been taken.
･ Regardless of the settings selected for [Beep options] in the setup
menu, beeps will not sound when the camera focuses or while the
self-timer is in operation.
･ Enabling silent photography disables some features, including:
- the flash,
- long exposure noise reduction,
- flicker reduction, and
Silent photography
114
- high ISO sensitivities (Hi 1, Hi 2).
D Silent photography
･ Selecting [On] for [Silent photography] does not completely silence the
camera. Camera sounds may still be audible, for example during
autofocus or aperture adjustment, in the latter case most noticeably at
apertures smaller (i.e., at f-numbers higher) than f/5.6.
･ You may notice the following in photographs and in the shooting display:
- Flicker or banding in scenes lit by such sources as fluorescent, mercury
vapor, or sodium lamps
- Distortion associated with motion (moving subjects may be distorted,
or the entire frame may appear distorted if the camera is moved during
shooting)
- Jagged edges, color fringing, moiré, and bright spots in the display
- Bright regions or bands in scenes lit by flashing signs and other
intermittent light sources or when the subject is briefly illuminated by a
strobe or other bright, momentary light source
･ The frame advance rate for burst photography changes when [On] is
selected for [Silent photography] (0138).
･ Silent photography mutes the shutter, but this does not absolve
photographers of the need to respect their subjects’ privacy and image
rights.
Silent photography
115
Rating pictures
Selected pictures can be rated or marked as candidates for later
deletion. Ratings can also be viewed in NX Studio. Protected pictures
cannot be rated.
1 Press the K button to start playback.
2 Select the desired picture and press the i button.
The playback i menu will be displayed.
3 Highlight [Rating] and press J.
Rating pictures
116
4 Choose a rating.
･ Rotate the main command dial to choose a rating of from zero to

five stars, or select d to mark the picture as a candidate for later
deletion.
･ Press J to select the highlighted option.
Rating pictures
117
Protecting pictures from deletion
Pictures can be protected to prevent their being deleted accidentally.
Protected pictures will however be deleted when the memory card is
formatted.
1 Press the K button to start playback.
2 Select the desired picture and press the A (g) button.
･ Protected pictures are marked with a P icon.
･ To remove protection, display or highlight the picture and press

the A (g) button again.

118
A Removing protection from all pictures
To remove protection from all pictures in the folder or folders currently
selected for [Playback folder] in the playback menu, select [Unprotect all]
in the i menu.

119
Shooting controls
The mode dial
Use the mode dial to choose whether shutter speed and/or aperture can
be adjusted manually or are set automatically by the camera.
Using the mode dial

Use the mode dial to choose a shooting mode.
Mode Description
A simple, “point-and-shoot” mode that leaves the
b Auto
camera in charge of settings (075, 080).
Programmed The camera sets shutter speed and aperture for

P
auto optimal exposure.
Use to freeze or blur motion. You choose the

Shutter-priority
S shutter speed; the camera selects the aperture for
auto
best results.
Use to blur backgrounds or bring both foreground

Aperture-priority and background into focus. You choose the
A
auto aperture; the camera selects the shutter speed for
best results.
The mode dial

120
Mode Description
You control both shutter speed and aperture. Set
M Manual shutter speed to “bulb” or “time” for long time-
exposures.
U1 Assign frequently-used settings to these positions.

User setting
U2 The settings can be recalled simply by rotating the
mode
U3 mode dial.
P (programmed auto)
･ In this mode, the camera automatically adjusts shutter speed and
aperture according to a built-in program to ensure optimal exposure
in most situations.
･ Different combinations of shutter speed and aperture that produce
the same exposure can be selected by rotating the main command
dial (“flexible program”).
- While flexible program is in effect, a flexible program indicator (U) is
displayed.
- To restore default shutter speed and aperture settings, rotate the

main command dial until the indicator is no longer displayed.
Flexible program also ends when the mode dial is rotated to
another setting or the camera is turned off.
S (shutter-priority auto)
･ In shutter-priority auto, you choose the shutter speed while the
camera automatically adjusts aperture for optimal exposure. Choose
The mode dial

121
fast shutter speeds to “freeze” motion, slow shutter speeds to
suggest motion by blurring moving objects.
･ Rotate the main command dial to set the shutter speed.

･ Shutter speed can be set to values between 1/4000 s and 30 s.
The mode dial

122
A (aperture-priority auto)
･ In aperture-priority auto, you choose the aperture while the camera
automatically adjusts shutter speed for optimal exposure.
･ Aperture can be adjusted by rotating the sub-command dial.

･ The minimum and maximum values for aperture vary with the lens.
A Video mode exposure settings

The following video settings can be adjusted during recording:
Mode Aperture Speed ISO sensitivity

P, S1 — — —2
A 4 — —2
M 4 4 43
1 Exposure control in shooting mode S is the same as in mode P.

2 The upper limit for ISO sensitivity can be selected using the [ISO
sensitivity settings] > [Maximum sensitivity] item in the video
recording menu.
3 If [On] is selected for [ISO sensitivity settings] > [Auto ISO control
(mode M)] in the video recording menu, the upper limit for ISO sensitivity
can be selected using [Maximum sensitivity].
The mode dial

123
M (manual)
･ You control both shutter speed and aperture. Choose this mode for
long time-exposures of such subjects as fireworks or the night sky
(“Bulb” or “Time” photography, 0126).
･ Shutter speed and aperture can be adjusted with reference to the
exposure indicator by rotating the command dials.
･ Rotate the main command dial to choose the shutter speed. Shutter
speed can be set to values between 1/4000 s and 30 s, to “Bulb”, or to
“Time”.
･ Aperture can be adjusted by rotating the sub-command dial.
･ The minimum and maximum values for aperture vary with the lens.
The mode dial

124
D The exposure indicator
･ The difference between the exposure value resulting from your setting
combination of the shutter speed, aperture, and ISO sensitivity, and the
appropriate exposure value measured by the camera, is displayed in the
monitor. The “exposure indicator” is displayed as follows.
Overexposed by over 3 1/3

Optimal exposureUnderexposed by 1/3 EV
EV
･ If exposure compensation was performed in mode M, the reference value

for proper exposure in the exposure indicator changes.
D Exposure warning
The exposure indicator will flash if the limits of the exposure metering are
exceeded, preventing the camera setting exposure.
A Auto ISO sensitivity control (mode M)

If auto ISO sensitivity control (0132) is enabled, ISO sensitivity will
automatically be adjusted for optimal exposure at the selected shutter speed
and aperture.
The mode dial

125
❚Long time-exposures
❚
The camera offers two options for long time-exposures: “Bulb” and
“Time”. Long time-exposures can be used for pictures of fireworks, night
scenery, the stars, or moving lights.
A 35-second exposure
shot at a shutter speed of
“Bulb” and an aperture of
f/25
Shutter
Description
speed
The shutter remains open while the shutter-release button is
Bulb
held down.
The exposure starts when the shutter-release button is

Time
pressed and ends when the button is pressed a second time.
1 Keep the camera steady, for example by using a tripod.
2 Rotate the mode dial to M.
The mode dial

126
3 Rotate the main command dial to choose a shutter speed of
Bulb (“Bulb”) or Time (“Time”).
Bulb Time
4 Focus and start the exposure.

･ “Bulb”: Press the shutter-release button all the way down to start
the exposure. Keep the shutter-release button pressed during the
exposure.
･ “Time”: Press the shutter-release button all the way down to start
the exposure.
5 End the exposure.

･ “Bulb”: Lift your finger from the shutter-release button.
･ “Time”: Press the shutter-release button all the way down a
second time.
D Long time-exposures
･ Note that “noise” (bright spots, randomly-spaced bright pixels or fog) may
be present in long exposures.
･ Bright spots and fog can be reduced by choosing [On] for [Long
exposure NR] in the photo shooting menu.
･ Nikon recommends using a fully-charged battery or an optional charging
AC adapter to prevent loss of power during long exposures.
･ Use of a tripod is recommended to reduce blur.
･ If you are using the optional ML-L7 Remote Control, bulb photography is
not available. If you set the camera to bulb photography, operation works
the same way as time photography.
The mode dial

127
U1, U2, and U3 (user settings modes)
Frequently-used settings can be assigned to user setting positions U1
through U3 and later recalled simply by rotating the mode dial.
❚Save user settings

❚
1 Adjust settings.
The settings that can be saved include:
･ photo shooting menu options,
･ video recording menu options,
･ Custom Settings, and
･ shooting mode, shutter speed (modes S and M), aperture (modes
A and M), flexible program (mode P), exposure compensation, and
flash compensation.
2 Highlight [Save user settings] in the setup menu.

Highlight [Save user settings] in the setup menu and press 2.
3 Select a position.
Highlight [Save to U1], [Save to U2], or [Save to U3] and press 2.
4 Save user settings.

Highlight [Save settings] using 1 or 3 and press J to assign
current settings to the selected position.
The mode dial

128
5 Take pictures using the saved settings.
Rotating the mode dial to U1, U2, or U3 recalls the settings last
saved to that position.
D User settings U1, U2, and U3

The following settings are not saved.
･ PHOTO SHOOTING MENU
- [Storage folder]
- [Manage Picture Control]
- [Multiple exposure]
- [Interval timer shooting]
- [Time-lapse video]
- [Focus shift shooting]
･ VIDEO RECORDING MENU
- [Manage Picture Control]
❚Resetting user settings

❚
1 Highlight [Reset user settings] in the setup menu.
Highlight [Reset user settings] in the setup menu and press 2.
The mode dial

129
2 Select a position.
Highlight [Reset U1], [Reset U2], or [Reset U3] and press 2.
3 Reset user settings.

Highlight [Reset] and press J to restore default settings for the
selected position (the camera will function in mode P).
The mode dial

130
The S button
The camera’s sensitivity to light (ISO sensitivity) can be adjusted
according to the amount of light available. In general, choosing higher
values allows faster shutter speeds at the same aperture.
Adjusting ISO sensitivity

･ Hold the S button and rotate the main command dial.
･ Choose from values of from ISO 100 to 51200. Extended settings of

about 1 EV or 2 EV above ISO 51200 are also available.
･ In b mode, the setting is fixed at ISO-A (AUTO), and the camera sets
the ISO sensitivity automatically.
･ The option currently selected is shown in the display during
shooting.
The S button
131
D High ISO sensitivities
The higher the ISO sensitivity, the less light needed to make an exposure,
allowing pictures to be taken when lighting is poor and helping prevent blur
when the subject is in motion. Note, however, that the higher the sensitivity,
the more likely the image is to be affected by “noise” in the form of
randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, or lines.
D Hi 1 and Hi 2
A setting of [Hi 1] corresponds to an ISO sensitivity approximately 1 EV
higher than ISO 51200 (equivalent to ISO 102400) and [Hi 2] to an ISO
sensitivity approximately 2 EV higher (equivalent to ISO 204800). Note that
pictures taken at these settings are particularly prone to “noise” in the form
of randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, or lines.
Auto ISO sensitivity control

Auto ISO sensitivity control automatically adjusts ISO sensitivity if
optimal exposure cannot be achieved at the value selected by the user
in modes P, S, A, and M. You can select an upper limit for auto ISO
sensitivity control (200–Hi 2) to prevent ISO sensitivity being raised too
high.
･ Hold the S button and rotate the sub-command dial to select from
ISO AUTO (auto ISO sensitivity control enabled) and ISO (auto ISO
sensitivity control disabled).
The S button
132
･ When auto ISO sensitivity control is enabled, the shooting display will
show ISO AUTO. When sensitivity is altered from the value selected
by the user, the ISO sensitivity will be shown in the shooting display.
･ Maximum sensitivity can be adjusted using the [ISO sensitivity

settings] item in the photo shooting menu.
D Auto ISO sensitivity control

･ If value currently selected for [ISO sensitivity settings] is higher than that
chosen for [Maximum sensitivity], the value chosen for [ISO sensitivity
settings] will serve as the upper limit for auto ISO sensitivity control.
･ During flash photography, shutter speed is limited to the range defined
by the values selected for Custom Settings e1 [Flash sync speed] and e2
[Flash shutter speed].
The S button
133
Use this button to alter exposure from the value suggested by the
camera. Exposure compensation can be used to make pictures brighter
or darker.
−1 EV No exposure +1 EV
compensation
Adjusting exposure compensation

･ Hold the E button and rotate a command dial.
･ Choose from values between –5 EV (underexposure) and +5 EV

(overexposure). Values between –3 EV and +3 EV are available in
video mode.
･ Changes are made in increments of 1/3 EV.
･ Normal exposure can be restored by setting exposure compensation
to ±0. Exposure compensation is not reset when the camera is turned

134
off (in b mode, exposure compensation is reset when the camera is
turned off).
･ At values other than ±0.0, the camera displays a E icon and the
exposure indicator in photo mode or a E icon in video mode. The
current value for exposure compensation can be confirmed by
pressing the E button.
D Mode M
･ In mode M, exposure compensation affects only the exposure indicator;
shutter speed, aperture, and ISO sensitivity do not change. The overall
brightness of the image also does not change.
･ The exposure indicator and the current value for exposure compensation
can be displayed by pressing the E button.
･ When auto ISO sensitivity control (0132) is in effect, ISO sensitivity is
automatically adjusted according to the value selected for exposure
compensation, and the overall brightness of the image changes.
D Using a flash
When an optional flash unit is used, exposure compensation affects both
flash level and exposure, altering the brightness of both the main subject and
the background. Custom Setting e3 [Exposure comp. for flash] can be used
to restrict the effects of exposure compensation to the background only.

135
The c/E (release mode/self-timer)
button
Choose the operation performed when the shutter is released.
Choosing a release mode

･ Hold the c (E) button and rotate the main command dial.

shooting.
❚Photo mode
❚
Option Description
The camera takes one photograph each time the
U [Single frame]
shutter-release button is pressed.
The c/E (release mode/self-timer) button

136
Option Description
･ The camera takes photographs at a selected rate
while the shutter-release button is pressed.
･ The frame advance rate can be chosen by
V [Continuous L] rotating the sub-command dial while holding the
c (E) button when [Continuous L] is selected in
the release-mode menu.
･ Choose from rates of from 1 to 4 fps.
The camera takes photos at up to 5 fps while the

W [Continuous H]
･ The camera takes photos at up to 11 fps while the

[Continuous H shutter-release button is pressed.
X
(extended)] ･ Optional flash units will not fire.
･ Flicker reduction does not take effect.
E [Self-timer] Take pictures with the self-timer (0140).

137
D The shooting display
In continuous low-speed and continuous high-speed modes, the display is
updated in real time even while shooting is in progress.
D Frame advance rate

Frame advance rate varies with camera settings.
Image RAW bit Silent photography

Release mode
quality depth Off On
JPEG —
[Continuous L] 12 bit User-selected frame advance rate

RAW
14 bit
JPEG —
Approx. 4.5 fps
[Continuous H] 12 bit Approx. 5 fps
RAW
14 bit Approx. 4 fps
JPEG —
[Continuous H Approx. 11 fps* Approx. 11 fps
12 bit
(extended)] RAW
14 bit Approx. 9 fps Approx. 8.5 fps
* Approx. 10 fps if [Electronic front-curtain shutter] is selected for

Custom Setting d4 [Shutter type].
D Burst photography
･ Depending on shooting conditions and memory card performance, the
memory card access lamp may light for anywhere from a few tens of
seconds to around a minute. Do not remove the memory card while the
memory card access lamp is lit. Not only could any unrecorded images be
lost, but the camera or memory card could be damaged.
･ If the camera is switched off while the memory card access lamp is lit, it
will not power off until all images in the buffer have been recorded.

138
･ If the battery is exhausted while images remain in the buffer, the shutter
release will be disabled and the images transferred to the memory card.
D Continuous H (extended)
Depending on the camera settings, continuous photography may result in
apparent variations in exposure. If you notice changes in exposure, perform
exposure lock (0142) to lock the exposure during burst photography.
D The memory buffer

･ While the shutter-release button is pressed halfway, the frame-count
display will show the number of pictures that can be stored in the
memory buffer.
･ When the buffer is full, the display will show r00 and the frame rate will
drop.
･ The number shown is approximate. The actual number of photos that can
be stored in the memory buffer varies with camera settings and shooting
conditions.
❚Video mode
❚
In video mode, you can choose the operation performed when the
shutter-release button is pressed (083).
Option Description
The camera takes one photograph each time the
U [Single frame] shutter-release button is pressed. Up to 40 photographs
can be taken with each video.

139
Option Description
･ The camera takes photos while the shutter-release
button is pressed.
･ The frame advance rate varies with the frame rate
selected for [Frame size/frame rate] in the video
recording menu.
c [Continuous]
･ The length of time available for the burst is shown in
the shooting display.
･ While video recording is in progress, only one photo
will be taken each time the shutter-release button is
pressed.
The self-timer
In self-timer mode, pressing the shutter-release button starts a timer,
and a photo is taken when the timer expires.
1 Press the c (E) button and rotate the main command dial to
select [Self-timer].
2 Press the c (E) button and rotate the sub-command dial to

select the time until the shutter is released.

140
3 Frame the photograph and focus.
The timer will not start if the shutter cannot be released, as may be
the case, for example, if the camera is unable to focus when AF-S is
selected for focus mode.
4 Start the timer.

･ A E icon appears in the shooting display when the self-timer is
enabled.
･ Press the shutter-release button all the way down to start the
timer; the self-timer lamp will begin to flash. The lamp stops
flashing and glows steadily two seconds before the timer expires.
D Taking multiple shots

The number of shots taken and the interval between shots can be selected
using Custom Setting c2 [Self-timer].

141
The A (g) button
Locks focus and exposure at the same time.
Exposure lock
･ Exposure lock can be used to recompose shots after metering a
subject that will not be in the selected focus area in the final
composition.
･ Exposure lock is particularly effective with spot and center-weighted
metering.
Focus lock
･ Use focus lock to lock focus on the current subject when AF-C is
selected for focus mode.
･ When using focus lock, choose an AF-area mode other than [Auto-
area AF], [Auto-area AF (people)], or [Auto-area AF (animals)].
Locking focus and exposure

1 Position the subject in the selected focus point and press the
shutter-release button halfway to set focus and exposure.
The A (g) button

142
2 Press the A (g) button.
･ Focus and exposure will lock while pressing the A (g) button.
Exposure will not change even when the composition is altered.
･ An AE-L icon will be displayed in the shooting display.
3 Keeping the A (g) button pressed, recompose the photograph

and shoot.
Do not change the distance between the camera and the subject. If
the distance to the subject changes, release the lock and focus again
at the new distance.
The A (g) button

143
D Locking focus when AF-S is selected for focus mode or when AF-
A is selected and you are shooting in AF-S
Focus locks while the shutter-release button is pressed halfway. You can also
lock focus by pressing the A (g) button.
D Locking exposure with the shutter-release button

If [On (half press)] is selected for Custom Setting c1 [Shutter-release button
AE-L], exposure will lock while the shutter-release button is pressed halfway.
D Taking multiple shots at the same focus distance

･ If you locked focus by pressing the A (g) button, focus will remain
locked between shots if you keep the A (g) button pressed.
･ Focus will also remain locked if you keep the shutter-release button
pressed halfway between shots.
The A (g) button

144
The i menu
The i menu
This menu is used for quick access to frequently-used settings. To view
the menu, press the i button.
･ Highlight items using the multi selector and press J to view options.
Highlight the desired option and press J to select and return to the
i menu.
･ To cancel and return to the previous display, press the i button.
The i menu
145
A The command dials
･ In some cases, the setting for the item currently highlighted in the i
menu can be chosen by rotating the main command dial. Options for the
selected setting, if any, can be selected by rotating the sub-command dial.
･ Some items can be adjusted by rotating either dial.

･ Press J to save changes. You can also save changes by pressing the
shutter-release button halfway or highlighting another item.
The i menu
146
Still images
1 Set Picture Control (0147) 7 Wi-Fi connection (0165)

2 White balance (0153) 8 Active D-Lighting (0165)
3 Image quality (0161) 9 Release mode (0167)
4 Image size (0162) 10 Vibration reduction (0168)
5 Flash mode (0163) 11 AF-area mode (0169)
6 Metering (0163) 12 Focus mode (0170)
Set Picture Control

Choose image processing (“Picture Control”) options for new photos
according to the scene or your creative intent.
Still images
147
Option Description
･ The camera automatically adjusts hues and
tones based on the [Standard] Picture
Control.
･ The complexions of portrait subjects will
appear softer than in pictures taken with the
n [Auto]
[Standard] Picture Control.
･ In outdoor shots, elements such as the foliage
and sky will appear more vivid than in
pictures taken with the [Standard] Picture
Control.
Standard processing for balanced results.

Q [Standard]
Recommended for most situations.
Minimal processing for natural results. Choose

R [Neutral] for photographs that will later be processed or
retouched.
Pictures are enhanced for a vivid, photoprint

S [Vivid] effect. Choose for photographs that emphasize
primary colors.
T [Monochrome] Take monochrome photographs.
Smooth complexions for natural-looking

o [Portrait]
portraits.
p [Landscape] Shoot vibrant landscapes and cityscapes.
Details are preserved over a wide tone range,

from highlights to shadows. Choose for
q [Flat]
photographs that will later be extensively
processed or retouched.
Still images
148
Option Description
･ Creative Picture Controls offer unique
combinations of hue, tone, saturation, and
[Creative Picture other settings tuned for particular effects.
k01– Control] ･ Choose the type from [Dream], [Morning],
k20 (Creative Picture [Pop], [Sunday], [Somber], [Dramatic],
Control) [Silence], [Bleached], [Melancholic], [Pure],
[Denim], [Toy], [Sepia], [Blue], [Red], [Pink],
[Charcoal], [Graphite], [Binary], or [Carbon].
･ To view Picture Control settings, highlight a Picture Control and press

3. Any changes to fine-tuning options can be previewed in the
display (0150).

shooting.
Still images
149
❚Modifying Picture Controls
❚
Highlighting [Set Picture Control] in the i menu and pressing J
displays a Picture Control list. Highlight a Picture Control and press 3 to
preview the effect in the display.
･ Press 1 or 3 to highlight settings. Press 4 or 2 to choose a value in

increments of 1, or rotate the sub-command dial to choose a value in
increments of 0.25.
･ The options available vary with the Picture Control selected.
･ To abandon any changes and start over from default settings, press
the O button.
･ Press J to save changes and return to the i menu.
･ Picture Controls that have been modified from default settings are
indicated by an asterisk (“U”).
Still images
150
D The j indicator
The j indicator under the value display in the Picture Control setting menu
indicates the previous value for the setting.
D [A] (auto)
･ Selecting the A (auto) option available for some settings lets the camera
adjust the setting automatically.
･ Results vary with exposure and the position of the subject in the frame.
A The “n Auto” Picture Control

Settings can be adjusted in the range [A−2] to [A+2].
❚Picture Control settings

❚
Option Description
Mute or heighten the effect of Creative Picture
[Effect level]
Controls.
Quickly adjust levels for balanced [Sharpening],

[Quick sharp] [Mid-range sharpening], and [Clarity]. These
parameters can also be adjusted individually.
[Sharpening] Control the sharpness of details and outlines.
[Mid-range Adjust the sharpness of patterns and lines in the

sharpening] range between [Sharpening] and [Clarity].
Adjust overall sharpness and the sharpness of

[Clarity] thicker outlines without affecting brightness or
dynamic range.
Still images
151
Option Description
[Contrast] Adjust contrast.
Raise or lower brightness without loss of detail in

[Brightness]
highlights or shadows.
[Saturation] Control the vividness of colors.
[Hue] Adjust hue.
Simulate the effect of color filters on

[Filter effects]
monochrome pictures.
Choose the tint used in monochrome pictures.

Pressing 3 when an option other than [B&W]
[Toning]
(black-and-white) is selected displays saturation
options.
[Toning] (Creative Choose the shade of color used for Creative

Picture Control) Picture Controls.
Still images
152
D Mid-range sharpening
When recording a video, set [Video quality] in the video recording menu to
[High quality] to apply the adjusted mid-range sharpening.
D [Filter effects]
Choose from the following [Filter effects]:
Option Description
[Y] (yellow)* These options enhance contrast and can be used to tone
down the brightness of the sky in landscape photographs.
[O] (orange)*
Orange [O] produces more contrast than yellow [Y], red [R]
[R] (red)* more contrast than orange.
[G] (green)* Green softens skin tones. Use for portraits and the like.
* The term in parentheses is the name of the corresponding third-party

color filter for black-and-white photography.
White balance
Adjust white balance. For more information, see “White balance” in
“Basic settings” (0109).
Option Option
4 [Auto] M [Shade]
i [Keep white (reduce warm J [Incandescent]

colors)]
I [Fluorescent]
j [Keep overall atmosphere]
[Cool-white fluorescent]
k [Keep warm lighting colors]
[Day white fluorescent]
D [Natural light auto]
[Daylight fluorescent]
H [Direct sunlight]
5 [Flash]
G [Cloudy]
K [Choose color temperature]
Still images
153
Option
L [Preset manual]
･ Pressing 3 when 4 [Auto] or I [Fluorescent] is highlighted

displays sub-options for the highlighted item.
･ Pressing 3 when L [Preset manual] is highlighted displays white

balance presets.

shooting.
❚Fine-tuning white balance

❚
Pressing J when [White balance] is highlighted in the i menu displays
a list of white balance options. If an option other than K [Choose color
temperature] is highlighted, fine-tuning options can be displayed by
Still images
154
pressing 3. Any changes to fine-tuning options can be previewed in the
display.
G Increase green
B Increase blue
A Increase amber
M Increase magenta
･ Tap the arrows in the display or use the multi selector to fine-tune
white balance.
･ If white balance has been fine-tuned, an asterisk (“U”) will be
displayed in the white balance icon.
Still images
155
❚Choosing a color temperature
❚
Pressing J when [White balance] is highlighted in the i menu displays
a list of white balance options. When K [Choose color temperature] is
highlighted, color temperature options can be viewed by pressing 3.
Value for Amber–Blue axis Value for Green–Magenta

axis
･ Press 4 or 2 to highlight digits on the A–B (amber–blue) axis. You

can also highlight the G–M (green–magenta) axis.
･ Press 1 or 3 to edit the selected item.
･ If a value other than 0 is selected for the green (G)–magenta (M) axis,
an asterisk (“U”) will appear in the white balance icon.
D Color-temperature selection
･ Do not use color-temperature selection with fluorescent light sources;
instead, use the I [Fluorescent] option.
･ When using color-temperature selection with other light sources, take a
test shot to determine if the selected value is appropriate.
❚Preset manual
❚
White balance settings such as 4 [Auto], J [Incandescent], and K
[Choose color temperature] may fail to produce the desired results
under mixed lighting or lighting with a strong color cast. Should this
occur, white balance can be set to a value measured under the light
Still images
156
source used in the final photograph. The camera can store up to six
values for preset manual white balance.
1 Select [White balance] in the i menu, then highlight L [Preset

manual] and press 3.
2 Select a preset.
･ Select from presets [d-1] through [d-6].

･ Press J to save changes and return to the i menus.
Still images
157
3 Highlight [White balance] in the i menu and hold the J button
to initiate direct measurement mode.
･ A L indicator will flash in the shooting display.
･ The white balance target (r) appears in the center of the frame.
Still images
158
4 Position the white balance target (r) over a white or gray object
and measure a value for preset manual white balance.
･ Position the target (r) using the multi selector.

･ To measure white balance, press the shutter-release button all the
way down or press J.
･ You can also position the target and measure white balance by
tapping the display.
･ You cannot move r if an optional flash unit is attached. Frame the
shot so that the white or gray reference object is in the center of
the display.
･ If the camera is unable to measure white balance, a message will
be displayed and the camera will return to direct measurement
mode. Try measuring white balance again, for example with the
target (r) positioned over a different area of the subject.
5 Press the i button to exit direct measurement mode.
Still images
159
D The preset manual white balance menu
The preset manual white balance menu can be accessed by selecting [White
balance] > L [Preset manual] in the photo shooting menu. The preset
manual white balance menu offers options for copying values for preset
manual white balance from an existing photograph or adding comments to
or protecting white balance presets.
D Protected presets
White balance presets indicated by g icons are protected and cannot be
changed.
D Preset manual: Selecting a preset

･ At shipment, presets d-1 through d-6 are set to 5200 K, equivalent to the
H [Direct sunlight] white balance option.
･ White balance presets can be viewed by selecting [White balance] > L
[Preset manual] in the photo shooting menu. To recall a stored value,
highlight a preset using the multi selector and press J.
D Direct measurement mode

Direct measurement mode will end if no operations are performed in the
time selected for Custom Setting c3 [Power off delay] > [Standby timer].
D Measuring white balance

Preset manual white balance cannot be measured during multiple exposures.
Still images
160
Image quality
Choose a file format for photographs.
Option Description
[RAW +
JPEG fine] ･ Record two copies of each photo: a RAW image and a JPEG
copy.
[RAW +
･ Only the JPEG copy is displayed during playback. The RAW
JPEG
copies can only be viewed using a computer.
normal]
･ Deleting the JPEG copies on the camera also deletes the
[RAW + RAW images.
JPEG basic]
[RAW]
[JPEG fine]
RAW images have the highest quality, and the quality
[JPEG decreases from “fine”, to “normal”, and to “basic”.
normal]
[JPEG basic]
The option currently selected is shown in the display during shooting.
Still images
161
A RAW
･ RAW files have the extension “*.nef”.
･ The process of converting RAW files to JPEG and other widely-supported
formats is referred to as “RAW processing”. A variety of settings can be
adjusted during this process, including exposure compensation, white
balance, and Picture Controls.
･ RAW processing has no effect on the original RAW data, meaning that it
can be repeated as often and using as many different combinations of
settings as desired while maintaining image quality.
･ RAW processing can be performed in-camera using the [RAW processing]
item in the retouch menu or on a computer using Nikon’s NX Studio
software. NX Studio is available free-of-charge from the Nikon Download
Center.
Image size
Choose the size at which photographs are recorded. The option
currently selected is shown in the display during shooting.
❚Image size versus number of pixels

❚
The physical dimensions of the photos in pixels vary with the option
selected for [Choose image area] in the photo shooting menu.
Image size
Image area
Large Medium Small
[DX (24×16)] 5568×3712 4176×2784 2784×1856
[1:1 (16×16)] 3712×3712 2784×2784 1856×1856
Still images
162
Image size
Image area
Large Medium Small
[16:9 (24×14)] 5568×3128 4176×2344 2784×1560
Flash mode
Choose a flash mode for optional flash units. The options available vary
with the shooting mode.
Option Available in
I [Fill flash] b, P, S, A, M
J [Red-eye reduction] b, P, S, A, M
L [Slow sync] P, A
K [Slow sync + red-eye] P, A
M [Rear-curtain sync] P, S, A, M
s [Flash off] b, P, S, A, M
Metering
Metering determines how the camera sets exposure.
Still images
163
Option Description
The camera meters a wide area of the frame and sets
[Matrix exposure according to tone distribution, color,
L
metering] composition, and distance for results close to those seen
by the naked eye.
･ The camera assigns the greatest weight to the center

of the frame. It can be used with subjects that
dominate the composition, for example.
[Center- ･ Center-weighted metering is also recommended
M weighted when using filters with an exposure factor (filter
metering] factor) over 1×.
･ The size of the area assigned the greatest weight can
be selected using Custom Setting b2 [Center-
weighted area].
･ The camera meters a circle with a diameter of 3.5 mm/

0.14 in. (equivalent to approximately 2.5% of the
frame). This ensures that the subject will be correctly
exposed even when the background is much brighter
[Spot or darker.
N
metering] ･ The metered area is centered on the current focus
point. If AF-area mode (092) is set to [Auto-area AF],
[Auto-area AF (people)], or [Auto-area AF
(animals)], the camera will instead meter the center
focus point.
The camera assigns the greatest weight to highlights.

[Highlight-
Use this option to reduce loss of detail in highlights, for
t weighted
example when photographing spotlit performers on
metering]
stage.
Still images
164
Wi-Fi connection
Enable or disable Wi-Fi.
･ Enable Wi-Fi to establish wireless connections to computers or
between the camera and smartphones or tablets (smart devices)
running the SnapBridge app (0478).
･ The camera displays a Wi-Fi icon when Wi-Fi is enabled.
･ To turn Wi-Fi off, highlight [Wi-Fi connection] in the i menu and

press J; if Wi-Fi is currently enabled, a [Close Wi-Fi connection]
prompt will be displayed. Press J to end the connection.
Active D-Lighting
Preserve details in highlights and shadows, creating pictures with
natural contrast. Use for high-contrast scenes, for example when
photographing brightly-lit outdoor scenery through a door or window
Still images
165
or taking pictures of shaded subjects on a sunny day. Active D-Lighting
is most effective when used with matrix metering.
[Off] [Y Auto]
Option Description
The camera automatically adjusts Active D-Lighting in
Y [Auto]
response to shooting conditions.
Z [Extra high]
P [High] Choose the amount of Active D-Lighting performed

Q [Normal] from [Extra high], [High], [Normal], and [Low].
R [Low]
c [Off] Active D-Lighting off.
Still images
166
D Active D-Lighting
･ “Noise” in the form of randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, or lines may
appear in photos taken with Active D-Lighting.
･ In mode M, [Y Auto] is equivalent to [Q Normal].
･ Uneven shading may be visible with some subjects.
･ This function does not apply at high ISO sensitivities (Hi 1, Hi 2), including
high sensitivities selected via auto ISO sensitivity control.
Release mode
Choose the operation performed when the shutter is released. For more
information, see “The c/E (release mode/self-timer) button” (0136).
Option Option
U [Single frame] X [Continuous H (extended)]
V [Continuous L] E [Self-timer]
W [Continuous H]
･ Pressing 3 when [Continuous L] is highlighted displays frame

advance rate options.
Still images
167
･ Pressing 3 when [Self-timer] is highlighted displays options for the
shutter-release delay and the number of shots taken when the timer
expires.

shooting.
Vibration reduction
Choose whether to enable vibration reduction. The options available
vary with the lens.
Option Description
[On] Choose for enhanced vibration reduction when
C
[Normal] photographing static subjects.
Choose when photographing athletes and other subjects

D [Sport]
that are moving rapidly and unpredictably.
E [Off] Vibration reduction is disabled.
Still images
168
An icon appears in the display when a setting other than [Off] is
selected.
D Using vibration reduction: Notes

･ Vibration reduction may be unavailable with some lenses.
･ We recommend that you wait for the image in the display to stabilize
before shooting.
･ Depending on the lens, when vibration reduction is active, the image in
the shooting display may jiggle after the shutter is released, but this does
not indicate a malfunction.
･ [Normal] or [Sport] is recommended for panning shots. In [Normal] or
[Sport] mode, vibration reduction applies only to motion that is not part
of the pan. If the camera is panned horizontally, for example, vibration
reduction will be applied only to vertical shake.
･ If you will use a tripod or monopod with a VR lens camera, the settings
may differ depending on the lens. Consult the lens documentation before
use for more information.
AF-area mode
AF-area mode controls how the camera selects the focus-point for
autofocus. For more information, see “AF-area mode” in the “Focus”
section of “Basic settings” (092).
Option Option
3 [Pinpoint AF] f [Wide-area AF (S)]
d [Single-point AF] g [Wide-area AF (L)]
e [Dynamic-area AF] 1 [Wide-area AF (L-people)]
Still images
169
Option Option
2 [Wide-area AF (L-animals)] 5 [Auto-area AF (people)]
h [Auto-area AF] 6 [Auto-area AF (animals)]
Focus mode
Focus mode controls how the camera focuses. For more information, see
“Focus mode” in the “Focus” section of “Basic settings” (090).
Option Option
AF-A [AF mode auto-switch] AF-C [Continuous AF]
AF-S [Single AF] MF [Manual focus]

Still images
170
Videos
1 Set Picture Control (0172) 7 Wi-Fi connection (0178)

2 White balance (0172) 8 Active D-Lighting (0178)
3 Frame size and rate/Video 9 Electronic VR (0178)
quality (0172) 10 Vibration reduction (0179)
4 Microphone sensitivity (0175) 11 AF-area mode (0179)
5 Wind noise reduction (0177) 12 Focus mode (0179)
6 Metering (0177)
A [Same as photo settings]

If [Same as photo settings] is selected for [Set Picture Control], [White
balance], [Active D-Lighting], or [Vibration reduction] in the video
recording menu, a h icon will appear at the top left corner of the i menu.
Changes made to the setting from the i menu in photo mode will also apply
in video mode and vice-versa.
Videos
171
Set Picture Control
Choose a Picture Control for video recording. For more information, see
“Still images” (0147).
White balance
Adjust white balance for video recording. For more information, see “Still
images” (0153).
Frame size and rate/Video quality

Select the video frame size (in pixels), frame rate, and video quality.
❚Video quality
❚
Choose from [High quality] and [Normal]. A star (“m”) appears in the
icon for [Frame size/frame rate] when [High quality] is selected. Some
frame size/rate options only support [High quality].
❚Frame size/frame rate

❚
The maximum bit rate and recording time for each [Frame size/frame
rate] option are shown below. The bit rate varies with the option
selected for video quality. If the battery is fully discharged or the
temperature inside the camera rises, recording may end before the
maximum length is reached or before the memory card is full.
Max. bit rate

Option1 Max. recording time
High quality Normal
r [3840×2160; 30p]2
s [3840×2160; 25p]2
144 Mbps —3 125 min.5, 6
t [3840×2160; 24p]2
w [1920×1080; 120p]4
Videos
172
Max. bit rate
Option1 Max. recording time
High quality Normal
x [1920×1080; 100p]4 144 Mbps —3
y/y [1920×1080; 60p]

56 Mbps 28 Mbps
z/z [1920×1080; 50p]
125 min.5, 6
1/1 [1920×1080; 30p]
2/2 [1920×1080; 25p] 28 Mbps 14 Mbps
3/3 [1920×1080; 24p]
[1920×1080; 30p ×4
A
(slow-motion)]4
36 Mbps
[1920×1080; 25p ×4
B —3 3 min.
(slow-motion)]4
[1920×1080; 24p ×5
C 29 Mbps
(slow-motion)]4
1 The frame rates for 120p, 100p, 60p, 50p, 30p, 25p, and 24p are
respectively 119.88 fps, 100 fps, 59.94 fps, 50 fps, 29.97 fps, 25 fps, and
23.976 fps.
2 Videos are recorded in 4K UHD.
3 Video quality fixed at [High quality].
4 The following features cannot be used.
･ Detection of human, dog, or cat faces or eyes when [Wide-area AF (L-
people)], [Wide-area AF (L-animals)], [Auto-area AF (people)], or
[Auto-area AF (animals)] is selected for [AF-area mode].
･ Flicker reduction
･ Electronic VR
･ HDMI output while recording videos
5 For memory cards 32 GB or less, videos may be divided between up to 8
files. Each divided file may be up to 4 GB in size. The number of files and
Videos
173
the length of each file vary with the options selected for [Frame size/
frame rate] and [Video quality].
6 When shooting after the camera has been off for some time at a [Frame
size/frame rate] setting of [1920×1080; 25p] or [1920×1080; 24p] in an
environment with an ambient temperature of approximately 25°C/77°F.
The camera’s ability to record up to the maximum 125 minutes is also
dependent on the remaining battery level and the camera’s internal
temperature. Approx. 35 minutes of recording time is available for 4K
UHD videos.
The option currently selected for [Frame size and rate/Video quality] is
shown in the display during shooting.
❚Slow motion videos

❚
You can record slow motion videos by selecting [1920×1080; 30p ×4
(slow-motion)], [1920×1080; 25p ×4 (slow-motion)], or [1920×1080;
24p ×5 (slow-motion)] for [Frame size/frame rate]. Sound is not
recorded.
･ In [1920×1080; 30p ×4 (slow-motion)] for example, images read at
a frame rate of 120p are recorded as a video in 30p. A video recorded
for about 10 seconds will be played back for about 40 seconds. You
can see momentary actions in slow motion, such as the impact of a
ball in sports.
Videos
174
･ The frame rates when reading images and when recording and
playing back videos are as follows.
Frame rate when

Frame rate when
Frame size/frame rate recording and
reading images*
playing back videos*
1920×1080; 30p ×4 (slow-
120p 30p
motion)
1920×1080; 25p ×4 (slow-

100p 25p
motion)
1920×1080; 24p ×5 (slow-

120p 24p
motion)
* 120p: 119.88 fps, 100p: 100 fps, 30p: 29.97 fps, 25p: 25 fps, 24p: 23.976
fps
D When recording slow motion videos

The following features cannot be used when recording slow motion videos.
･ Flicker reduction
･ Electronic VR
･ Recording timecodes
･ HDMI output while recording videos
Microphone sensitivity
Turn built-in or external microphones on or off or adjust microphone
sensitivity.
Option Description
bA Adjust microphone sensitivity automatically.
[Microphone off] Turn sound recording off.
Videos
175
Option Description
Adjust microphone sensitivity manually. Choose from
values of from [1] to [20]. The higher the value, the
b1–b20
higher the sensitivity; the lower the value, the lower the
sensitivity.
･ At settings other than bA, the option currently selected is shown in

the display.
･ If the sound level is displayed in red, the volume is too high. Reduce
microphone sensitivity.
D Videos without sound

Videos recorded with [Microphone off] selected for microphone sensitivity
are indicated by a 2 icon.
Videos
176
Wind noise reduction
Choose whether to use wind noise reduction when recording videos.
Option Description
Enables the low-cut filter, reducing noise produced by wind blowing
[On] over the built-in microphone. Note that other sounds may also be
affected.
[Off] Disables wind noise reduction.
An icon appears in the display when [On] is selected.
Selecting [On] for [Wind noise reduction] has no effect on optional

stereo microphones. Wind-noise reduction for optional stereo
microphones that support this feature can be enabled or disabled using
microphone controls.
Metering
Choose how the camera sets exposure during video recording. For more
information, see “Still images” (0163).
D Metering
[Spot metering] is not available in video mode.
Videos
177
Wi-Fi connection
Enable or disable Wi-Fi. For more information, see “Still images” (0165)
or see “Wi-Fi connection” in the “Connect to smart device” section of the
“Menu guide” (0404).
Active D-Lighting
Preserve details in highlights and shadows, creating videos with natural
contrast. Select [Same as photo settings] to use the option currently
selected for photos. For more information about Active D-Lighting, see
“Still images” (0165).
D [Same as photo settings]

Note that if [Same as photo settings] is selected for Active D-Lighting in the
video recording menu and [Auto] is selected in the photo shooting menu,
videos will be shot at a setting equivalent to [Normal].
Electronic VR
Choose whether to enable electronic vibration reduction in video mode.
Option Description
･ Enable electronic vibration reduction during video recording.
･ If the video frame size and rate is set to 1920×1080 120p,
1920×1080 100p, or 1920×1080 slow-motion, electronic vibration
[On]
reduction is disabled.
･ Note that when [On] is selected, the angle of view will be
reduced, slightly increasing the apparent focal length.
[Off] Electronic vibration reduction is disabled.
Videos
178
An icon appears in the display when [On] is selected.
Vibration reduction
Choose whether to enable vibration reduction in video mode. For more
information, see “Still images” (0168).
AF-area mode
AF-area mode controls how the camera selects the focus-point for
autofocus. For more information, see “AF-area mode” in the “Focus”
Option Option
d [Single-point AF] 2 [Wide-area AF (L-animals)]
f [Wide-area AF (S)] h [Auto-area AF]
g [Wide-area AF (L)] 5 [Auto-area AF (people)]
1 [Wide-area AF (L-people)] 6 [Auto-area AF (animals)]
Focus mode
Option Option
AF-S [Single AF] AF-F [Full-time AF]
AF-C [Continuous AF] MF [Manual focus]
Videos
179
Playback
Viewing pictures
Full-frame playback
Press the K button to view the most recent picture full frame in the
monitor.
･ Press 4 to return to the previous frame, 2 to skip to the next frame.

･ Press 1, 3, or the DISP button to view more information on the
current picture (0183).
Viewing pictures
180
Thumbnail playback
To view multiple pictures, press the W (Q) button when a picture is
displayed full frame.
･ The number of pictures displayed increases from 4 to 9 to 72 each

time the W (Q) button is pressed, and decreases with each press of
the X button.
･ Highlight pictures using 1, 3, 4, or 2.
Calendar playback
To view images taken on a selected date, press the W (Q) button when
72 images are displayed.
･ Use the multi selector (1, 3, 4, or 2) to highlight a date in the date

list (q) and press W (Q) to place the cursor in the thumbnail list (w).
Viewing pictures
181
Press 1 or 3 to highlight pictures in the thumbnail list. To return to
the date list, press the W (Q) button a second time.
･ To zoom in on the picture highlighted in the thumbnail list, press and
hold the X button.
･ To exit to thumbnail playback, press X when the cursor is in the date
list.
D Touch controls
Touch controls can be used when pictures are displayed in the monitor
(044).
D Rotate tall
To display “tall” (portrait-orientation) photographs in tall orientation, select
[On] for [Rotate tall] in the playback menu.
D Picture review
When [On] is selected for [Picture review] in the playback menu,
photographs are automatically displayed after shooting; there is no need for
you to press the K button.
･ In continuous release modes, display begins when shooting ends, with
the first photograph in the current series displayed.
･ Images are not rotated automatically during picture review even when
[On] is selected for [Rotate tall] in the playback menu.
Viewing pictures
182
Photo information
Photo information is superimposed on images displayed in full-frame
playback. Press 1, 3, or the DISP button to cycle through photo
information as shown below.
1 File information 5 Shooting data1, 2

2 Exposure data1 6 Location data3
3 Highlight display1 7 Overview data1
4 RGB histogram1 8 None (picture only)1
1 Displayed only if the corresponding option is selected for [Playback

display options] in the playback menu.
2 The shooting data list has multiple pages, which can be viewed by
pressing 1 or 3.
3 Location data are displayed only if embedded in the picture at the time it
was taken.
Photo information
183
File information
1 Protect status (0118) 8 Image area (0240)

2 Retouch indicator (0419) 9 Time of recording (0388)
3 Upload marking (0199) 10 Date of recording (0388)
4 Focus point* (075) 11 Rating (0116)
5 Frame number/total number of 12 Folder name (0235)
frames 13 File name (0239)
6 Image quality (0161)
7 Image size (0162)
* Displayed only if [Focus point] is selected for [Playback display options]

in the playback menu.
Photo information
184
Exposure data
1 Folder number–frame number 4 Aperture (0123, 0124)

(0235) 5 Exposure compensation value
2 Shooting mode (0120) (0134)
3 Shutter speed (0121, 0124) 6 ISO sensitivity* (0131)
* Displayed in red if the picture was taken in mode P, S, A, or M with auto

ISO sensitivity control enabled.
Highlight display
1 Highlights (areas that may be 2 Folder number–frame number

overexposed) (0235)
Photo information
185
RGB histogram
1 Folder number–frame number 3 Histogram (RGB channel)

(0235) 4 Histogram (red channel)
2 White balance (0109, 0153, 5 Histogram (green channel)
0244) 6 Histogram (blue channel)
Color temperature (0156)
Preset manual (0156)
White balance fine-tuning
(0154)
Photo information
186
D Playback zoom
To zoom in on the picture in the histogram display, press X. The histogram
will be updated to show only the data for the portion of the image visible in
the display. Use the multi selector to scroll to areas of the frame not visible in
the monitor. Press W (Q) to zoom out.
D Histograms
Histograms show tone distribution. Pixel brightness (tone) is plotted on the
horizontal axis and the number of pixels on the vertical axis.
･ If the image contains objects with a wide range of brightnesses, the
distribution of tones will be relatively even.
･ If the image is dark, the distribution will be shifted to the left.
･ If the image is bright, the distribution will be shifted to the right.
Increasing exposure compensation shifts the distribution of tones to the

right, while decreasing exposure compensation shifts the distribution to the
Photo information
187
left. Histograms can provide a rough idea of overall exposure when bright
ambient lighting makes it difficult to see pictures in the monitor.
D The histogram display

･ RGB histograms show tone distribution.
･ Camera histograms may differ from those displayed in imaging
applications. Use them as a guide to actual tone distribution.
Photo information
188
Shooting data
View the settings in effect at the time the picture was taken. The
shooting data list has multiple pages, which can be viewed by pressing
1 or 3.
❚Basic shooting data

❚
1 Metering (0163) 6 Focus mode (090)

Shutter type (0350) AF-area mode (092)
Shutter speed (0121, 0124) 7 Vibration reduction (0168)
Aperture (0123, 0124) 8 White balance3 (0109, 0153,
2 Shooting mode (0120) 0244)
ISO sensitivity1 (0131) 9 White balance fine-tuning
3 Exposure compensation value (0154)
(0134) 10 Color space (0258)
Optimal exposure tuning2 11 Camera name
(0346) 12 Image area (0240)
4 Focal length 13 Folder number–frame number
5 Lens data (0235)
1 Displayed in red if the picture was taken in mode P, S, A, or M with auto

2 Displayed if Custom Setting b3 [Fine-tune optimal exposure] has been
set to a value other than zero for any metering method.
Photo information
189
3 Also includes the color temperature for pictures taken using 4 [Auto].
Photo information
190
❚Flash data
❚
Flash data are displayed only for pictures taken with optional flash units
(0493, 0505).
1 Flash type 3 Flash mode (0498)

2 Remote flash control 4 Flash control mode (0497)
Flash compensation (0501)
❚Picture Control data

❚
The items displayed vary with the Picture Control in effect when the
picture was taken.
1 Picture Control (0147, 0251)
Photo information
191
❚Other shooting data
❚
1 High ISO noise reduction 4 Vignette control (0260)

(0259) 5 Retouch history (0419).
Long exposure noise reduction Changes are listed in the order
(0258) applied.
2 Active D-Lighting (0165) 6 Image comment (0398)
3 HDR exposure differential
(0285)
HDR smoothing (0285)
❚Copyright information
❚
Copyright information is only displayed if recorded using the
[Copyright information] item in the setup menu at the time the picture
was taken.
1 Photographer (0399) 2 Copyright holder (0399)
Photo information
192
Location data
The location data page lists the latitude, longitude, and other location
data downloaded from smartphones or tablets.
･ The items listed vary with the device supplying the location data.
･ The location data displayed with videos are those reported at the
start of recording.
Photo information
193
Overview
1 Frame number/total number of 9 Image quality (0161)

frames 10 Image size (0162)
2 Upload marking (0199) 11 Image area (0240)
3 Protect status (0118) 12 File name (0239)
4 Retouch indicator (0419) 13 Time of recording (0388)
5 Camera name 14 Date of recording (0388)
6 Image comment indicator 15 Folder name (0235)
(0398) 16 Rating (0116)
7 Location data indicator
8 Histogram (0187)
Photo information
194
1 Metering (0163) 8 Picture Control (0147, 0251)
2 Shooting mode (0120) 9 Color space (0258)
3 Shutter speed (0121, 0124) 10 Flash mode2 (0498)
4 Aperture (0123, 0124) 11 White balance (0109, 0153,
5 ISO sensitivity1 (0131) 0244)
6 Focal length Color temperature (0156)
7 Active D-Lighting (0165) Preset manual (0156)
White balance fine-tuning
(0154)
12 Flash compensation2 (0501)
Commander mode2
13 Exposure compensation value
(0134)
1 Displayed in red if the picture was taken in mode P, S, A, or M with auto

2 Flash data are displayed only for pictures taken with optional flash units
(0493, 0505).
Photo information
195
The i button (playback mode)
Pressing the i button during playback zoom or full-frame or thumbnail
playback displays the i menu for playback mode. Highlight items and
press J or 2 to select.
Press the i button again to return to playback.

･ During calendar playback, the i menu can be viewed by pressing the
i button when thumbnails are displayed.
Photos
Option Description
Save a copy of the current image cropped to the
area visible in the display. This option is not
[Quick crop]1
available when RGB histograms are displayed
(0186).
[Rating] Rate the current picture (0116).
[Select for upload to

smart device] Select the current picture for upload (0199). The
option displayed varies with the type of device
[Select for upload to connected.
computer]
Create a retouched copy of the current picture

[Retouch]
(0419).

196
Option Description
Choose a folder for playback. Highlight a folder and
[Choose folder]
press J to view the pictures it contains.
Add protection to or remove protection from the

[Protect]
current picture (0118).
Remove protection from all pictures in the folder

[Unprotect all]2 currently selected for [Playback folder] in the
playback menu.
[Side-by-side
Compare retouched copies to the originals.
comparison]3
1 Available only during playback zoom.

2 Not available during playback zoom.
3 Available only when a retouched copy (indicated by a p icon) or the
source picture for a retouched copy is selected.

197
A [Side-by-side comparison]
Choose [Side-by-side comparison] to compare retouched copies with the
unretouched originals.
1 Options used to create copy 3 Retouched copy

2 Source image
･ The source image is displayed on the left, the retouched copy on the
right.
･ The options used to create the copy listed at the top of the display.
･ Press 4 or 2 to switch between the source image and the retouched
copy.
･ If the copy is an overlay created from multiple source images, press 1 or
3 to view the other images.
･ If the source has been copied multiple times, press 1 or 3 to view the
other copies.
･ To view the highlighted picture zoomed in, press and hold the X button.
･ Press J to return to playback with the highlighted image displayed full-
frame.
･ To exit to playback, press the K button.
･ The source image will not be displayed if the copy was created from a
photograph that is now protected.
･ The source image will not be displayed if the copy was created from a
photograph that has since been deleted.
Videos
Option Description
[Rating] Rate the current video (0116).

198
Option Description
[Select for upload
Select the current video for upload (0199).
to computer]*
[Volume control] Adjust playback volume.
Trim footage from the current video and save the

[Trim video]
edited copy in a new file (0201).
Choose a folder for playback. Highlight a folder and

[Choose folder]
press J to view the pictures it contains.
Add protection to or remove protection from the

[Protect]
current video (0118).
Remove protection from all pictures in the folder

[Unprotect all] currently selected for [Playback folder] in the
playback menu.
* It will not appear if the camera and computer have never been connected
via wireless link.
Videos (playback paused)

Option Description
[Choose start/end Trim footage from the current video and save the
9
point] edited copy in a new file (0201).
[Save current
4 Save a selected frame as a JPEG still (0204).
frame]
❚Select for upload

❚
Follow the steps below to select the current picture for upload to a
smart device or computer.

199
･ The i menu items used to select pictures for upload vary with the
type of device connected:
- [Select for upload to smart device]: Displayed when the camera is
connected to a smart device via built-in Bluetooth using [Connect
to smart device] in the setup menu (0403).
- [Select for upload to computer]: Displayed when the camera is
connected to a computer via built-in Wi-Fi using [Connect to
computer] in the setup menu (0405).
･ Videos cannot be selected for upload when the camera is connected
to a smart device via the SnapBridge app.
･ The maximum file size for videos uploaded by other means is 4 GB.
1 Select the desired picture and press the i button.
2 Highlight [Select for upload to smart device] or [Select for

upload to computer] and press J.
The picture will be marked with a W icon.
D Removing upload marking

To remove upload marking, repeat Steps 1 and 2.

200
❚Choose start/end point
❚
Trim footage from the current video and save the edited copy in a new
file.
1 Display a video full frame.
2 Pause the video on the new opening frame.

･ Press the J button to start playback videos. Press 3 to pause.
･ Your approximate position in the video can be ascertained from
the video progress bar.
･ Press 4 or 2 or rotate the main command dial to locate the

desired frame.
3 Select [Choose start/end point].
Press the i button, highlight [Choose start/end point], and press

J.

201
4 Choose the start point.
To create a copy that begins from the current frame, highlight [Start
point] and press J.
5 Confirm the new start point.
･ If the desired frame is not currently displayed, press 4 or 2 to

advance or rewind.
･ Rotate the main command dial one stop to skip ahead or back 10 s.
･ Rotate the sub-command dial to skip to the last or first frame.

202
6 Choose the end point.
･ Press the A (g) button to switch to the end-point selection tool

(x) and then select the closing frame (x) as described in Step 5.
7 Press 1 to create the copy.
8 Preview the copy.
･ To preview the copy, highlight [Preview] and press J (to interrupt

the preview and return to the save options menu, press 1).
･ To abandon the current copy and return to Step 5, highlight
[Cancel] and press J.

203
9 Choose a save option.
･ Choose [Save as new file] and press the J button to save the
edited copy as a new file.
･ To replace the original video with the edited copy, highlight
[Overwrite existing file], press J, and then highlight [Yes] and
press J.
D Trimming videos
･ The copy will not be saved if there is insufficient space available on the
memory card.
･ Videos less than two seconds long cannot be edited using [Choose
start/end point].
･ Copies have the same time and date of creation as the original.
D Removing opening or closing footage

･ To remove only the closing footage from a video, choose [End point] in
Step 4, press the J button, and proceed to Step 7 without pressing the A
(g) button in Step 6.
･ To remove only the opening footage, proceed to Step 7 without pressing
the A (g) button in Step 6.
D The [Trim video] option (retouch menu)

Videos can also be edited using the [Trim video] item in the retouch menu.
❚Save current frame

❚
Save a selected frame as a JPEG still.

204
1 Pause the video on the desired frame.
･ Press 3 to pause playback.

･ Press 4 or 2 to locate the desired frame.
2 Choose [Save current frame].
Press the i button, then highlight [Save current frame] and press J
to create a JPEG copy of the current frame.
D [Save current frame]

･ Stills are saved at the dimensions selected for [Frame size/frame rate] in
the video recording menu when the video was recorded.
･ They cannot be retouched.
･ Some categories of photo information are not displayed during playback.

205
Playback zoom
Press X or J to zoom in on photos displayed in full-frame playback. [DX
(24×16)]-format images can be zoomed in to a maximum of
approximately 21× for Large, 16× for Medium, or 10× for Small.
Using playback zoom

To Description
･ Press the X button or

use stretch gestures
Zoom in/
to zoom in. A navigation window is displayed
zoom
･ To zoom out, press during the zoom ratio is altered, with
out
W (Q) or use pinch the area currently visible indicated by a
gestures. yellow border. A bar below the
navigation window shows the zoom
ratio, turning green at 1:1. The
navigation window clears from the
display after a few seconds.
View
Use the multi selector or glide gestures to view areas of image
other
not visible in the monitor. Keep the multi selector pressed to
areas of
scroll rapidly to other areas of frame.
image
Playback zoom
206
To Description
Faces detected during zoom are indicated by white borders in
the navigation window. Rotate the sub-command dial or tap the
on-screen guide to view other faces.
Select
faces
Rotate the main command dial to view the same location in

View
other photos without changing the zoom ratio (selecting a video
other
cancels zoom). You can also view other photos by tapping the e
pictures
or f icon at the bottom of the display.
Exit to
Press the shutter-release button halfway or press the K button
shootin
to exit.
g mode
View
Press the G button to view the menus.
menus
Playback zoom
207
Deleting pictures
Follow the steps below to delete pictures from memory cards. Note that
pictures cannot be recovered once deleted. Pictures that are protected,
however, cannot be deleted.
Using the delete button

Press the O button to delete the current picture.
1 Select the desired picture with the multi selector and press the
O button.
･ A confirmation dialog will be displayed.

･ To exit without deleting the picture, press K.
2 Press the O button again.
The picture will be deleted.
A Calendar playback
During calendar playback, you can delete all photographs taken on a
selected date by highlighting the date in the date list and pressing the O
button.
Deleting pictures
208
Deleting multiple pictures
Use [Delete] in the playback menu to delete multiple pictures at once.
Note that depending on the number of images, some time may be
required for deletion.
Option Description
Q [Selected pictures] Delete selected pictures.
[Pictures shot on Delete all pictures taken on selected dates

i
selected dates] (0210).
Delete all pictures in the folder currently

R [All pictures] selected for [Playback folder] in the playback
menu.
❚Deleting selected pictures

❚
1 Select pictures.
･ Highlight pictures using the multi selector and press the W (Q)
button to select; selected pictures are marked with O icons.
Selected pictures can be deselected by pressing the W (Q) button
again.
･ Repeat until all the desired pictures are selected.

･ To view the highlighted picture zoomed in, press and hold the X
button.
Deleting pictures
209
2 Delete the pictures.
･ Press J; a confirmation dialog will be displayed.

･ Highlight [Yes] and press J to delete the selected pictures.
❚Pictures shot on selected dates

❚
1 Select dates.
･ Highlight dates using the multi selector and press 2 to select;

selected dates are marked with M icons. Selected dates can be
deselected by pressing 2 again.
･ Repeat until you have selected all the desired dates.
Deleting pictures
210
2 Delete the pictures.
･ Press J; a confirmation dialog will be displayed.

･ Highlight [Yes] and press J to delete all the pictures taken on the
selected dates.
Deleting pictures
211
Menu guide
Defaults
The defaults for the playback, photo shooting, video recording, Custom
Settings, and setup menus are listed below.
Playback menu defaults

Playback menu option Default
[Delete] —
[Playback folder] All
[Playback display options]
[Focus point] U
[Exposure info] U
[Highlights] U
[RGB histogram] U
[Shooting data] U
[Overview] U
[None (picture only)] U
[Picture review] Off
[Rotate tall] On
[Slide show]
[Picture type] Photos and videos
[Frame interval] 2s
Defaults
212
Playback menu option Default
[Rating] —
Photo shooting menu defaults

Photo shooting menu option Default
[Reset photo shooting menu] —
[Storage folder]
[Rename] NZ_30
[Select folder by number] 100
[Select folder from list] —
[File naming] DSC
[Choose image area] DX (24×16)
[Image quality] JPEG normal
[Image size] Large
[RAW recording] 14-bit
[ISO sensitivity settings]
[ISO sensitivity] P, S, A, M: 100
[Auto ISO sensitivity control] On
[Maximum sensitivity] 51200
[Maximum sensitivity with c] Same as without flash
[Minimum shutter speed] Auto
[White balance] j: Keep overall atmosphere
Fine-tune A-B: 0, G-M: 0
Defaults
213
[Choose color temperature] 5000 K
[Preset manual] d-1
[Set Picture Control] Auto
[Manage Picture Control] —
[Color space] sRGB
[Active D-Lighting] Off
[Long exposure NR] Off
[High ISO NR] Normal
[Vignette control] Normal
[Diffraction compensation] On
[Auto distortion control] On
[Flicker reduction shooting] Off
[Metering] Matrix metering
[Flash control]
[Flash control mode] TTL
[Wireless flash options] Off
[Flash mode] Fill flash
[Flash compensation] 0.0
[Release mode] Single frame
[Focus mode] AF mode auto-switch
[AF-area mode] Auto-area AF (people)
[Vibration reduction] (Varies with lens)
Defaults
214
[Auto bracketing]
[Auto bracketing set] AE & flash bracketing
[Number of shots] 0
[Increment] 1.0
[Multiple exposure]
[Multiple exposure mode] Off
[Number of shots] 2
[Overlay mode] Average
[Save individual pictures (RAW)] On
[Overlay shooting] On
[Select first exposure (RAW)] —
[HDR (high dynamic range)]
[HDR mode] Off
[Exposure differential] Auto
[Smoothing] Normal
[Save individual pictures (RAW)] Off
[Interval timer shooting]
[Choose start day/time] Now
[Interval] 1 min.
[Intervals×shots/interval] 0001×1
[Exposure smoothing] On
[Silent photography] On
Defaults
215
[Interval priority] Off
[Focus before each shot] Off
[Options] Off
[Starting storage folder]
[New folder] U
[Reset file numbering] U
[Time-lapse video]
[Interval] 5s
[Shooting time] 25 min.
[Exposure smoothing] On
[Frame size/frame rate] 1920×1080; 60p
[Interval priority] Off
[Focus before each shot] Off
[Focus shift shooting]
[No. of shots] 100
[Focus step width] 5
[Interval until next shot] 0
[First-frame exposure lock] On
[Starting storage folder]
[New folder] U
Defaults
216
[Reset file numbering] U
[Silent photography] Off
Video recording menu defaults

Video recording menu option Default
[Reset video recording menu] —
[File naming] DSC
[Frame size/frame rate] 1920×1080; 60p
[Video quality] High quality
[Video file type] MOV
[Maximum sensitivity] 25600
[Auto ISO control (mode M)] On
[ISO sensitivity (mode M)] 100
[White balance] Same as photo settings
Fine-tune A-B: 0, G-M: 0
[Choose color temperature] 5000 K
[Preset manual] d-1
[Set Picture Control] Same as photo settings
[Manage Picture Control] —
[Active D-Lighting] Off
[High ISO NR] Normal
Defaults
217
Video recording menu option Default
[Vignette control] Normal
[Diffraction compensation] On
[Auto distortion control] On
[Flicker reduction] Auto
[Metering] Matrix metering
[Release mode (save frame)] Single frame
[Focus mode] Full-time AF
[AF-area mode] Auto-area AF (people)
[Vibration reduction] Same as photo settings
[Electronic VR] Off
[Microphone sensitivity] Auto
[Attenuator] Disable
[Frequency response] Wide range
[Wind noise reduction] Off
[Timecode]
[Record timecodes] Off
[Count-up method] Record run
[Timecode origin] —
[Drop frame] On
Defaults
218
Custom Settings menu defaults
Custom Settings menu option Default
[Reset custom settings] —
a1 [AF-C priority selection] Release
a2 [AF-S priority selection] Focus
a3 [Focus tracking with lock-on] 3
a4 [Focus points used] All points
a5 [Store points by orientation] No
a6 [AF activation] Shutter/AF-ON
[Limit AF-area mode selection]
[Pinpoint AF] M
[Single-point AF] L(cannot be deselected)
[Dynamic-area AF] M
[Wide-area AF (S)] M
a7 [Wide-area AF (L)] M
[Wide-area AF (L-people)] M
[Wide-area AF (L-animals)] M
[Auto-area AF] M
[Auto-area AF (people)] M
[Auto-area AF (animals)] M
a8 [Focus point wrap-around] No wrap
[Focus point options]

a9
[Manual focus mode] On
Defaults
219
a9 [Dynamic-area AF assist] On
a10 [Low-light AF] On
[Manual focus ring in AF

a11 Enable
mode]
b1 [Easy exposure compensation] Off
b2 [Center-weighted area] Φ 8 mm
[Fine-tune optimal exposure]
[Matrix metering] 0
[Center-weighted metering] 0
b3
[Spot metering] 0
[Highlight-weighted
0
metering]
c1 [Shutter-release button AE-L] Off
[Self-timer]
[Self-timer delay] 10 s
c2
[Number of shots] 1
[Interval between shots] 0.5 s
[Power off delay]
[Playback] 10 s
c3 [Menus] 1 min
[Picture review] 4s
[Standby timer] 30 s
d1 [CL mode shooting speed] 3 fps
Defaults
220
d2 [Maximum shots per burst] 100
d3 [Exposure delay mode] Off
d4 [Shutter type] Auto
d5 [File number sequence] On
d6 [Apply settings to live view] On
d7 [Framing grid display] Off
[Focus peaking]
d8 [Peaking level] Off
[Peaking highlight color] Red
d9 [View all in continuous mode] On
e1 [Flash sync speed] 1/200 s
e2 [Flash shutter speed] 1/60 s
e3 [Exposure comp. for flash] Entire frame
e4 [Auto c ISO sensitivity control] Subject and background
e5 [Auto bracketing (mode M)] Flash/speed
e6 [Bracketing order] MTR > under > over
Defaults
221
Set Picture Control,
White balance,
Image quality,
Image size,
Flash mode,
Metering,
f1 [Customize i menu]
Wi-Fi connection,
Active D-Lighting,
Release mode,
Vibration reduction,
AF-area mode,
Focus mode
[Custom controls (shooting)]
[Fn1 button] White balance
[Fn2 button] Focus mode/AF-area mode
[AE-L/AF-L button] AE/AF lock
f2 [OK button] Select center focus point
[Video record button] Live view info display off
[Lens Fn button] AE/AF lock
[Lens Fn2 button] AF-ON
[Lens control ring] (Varies with lens)
[Custom controls (playback)]
f3 [AE-L/AF-L button] Protect
[OK button] Zoom on/off
f4 [Customize command dials]
Defaults
222
Exposure compensation: U, Shutter
[Reverse rotation]
speed/aperture: U
Exposure setting: Off, Autofocus

f4 [Change main/sub]
setting: Off
[Menus and playback] Off
[Sub-dial frame advance] 10 frames
f5 [Release button to use dial] No
f6 [Reverse indicators]
Set Picture Control,

White balance,
Frame size and rate/Video quality,
Microphone sensitivity,
Wind noise reduction,
Metering,
g1 [Customize i menu]
Wi-Fi connection,
Active D-Lighting,
Electronic VR,
Vibration reduction,
AF-area mode,
Focus mode
[Custom controls]
[Fn1 button] White balance
[Fn2 button] Focus mode/AF-area mode

g2
[AE-L/AF-L button] AE/AF lock
[OK button] Select center focus point
[Shutter-release button] Take photos
Defaults
223
[Lens Fn button] AE/AF lock
g2 [Lens Fn2 button] AF-ON
[Lens control ring] (Varies with lens)
[AF speed] 0
g3
[When to apply] Always
g4 [AF tracking sensitivity] 4
[Highlight display]
[Display pattern] Off

g5
[Highlight display
248
threshold]
Setup menu defaults

Setup menu option Default
[Format memory card] —
[Save user settings] —
[Reset user settings] —
(Default varies with country of

[Language]
purchase)
[Time zone and date]

[Time zone]
purchase)
[Date and time] —
Defaults
224
[Date format]
purchase)
[Daylight saving time] Off
[Monitor brightness] 0
[Monitor color balance] A-B: 0, G-M: 0
[REC lamp brightness]
[Video recording] 2
[Time-lapse video recording] Off
[Information display] Dark on light
[AF fine-tuning options]
[AF fine-tune] Off
[Fine-tune and save lens] —
[Default] —
[List saved values] —
[Non-CPU lens data]
[Lens number] 1
[Focal length (mm)] —
[Maximum aperture] —
[Save focus position] Off
[Image Dust Off ref photo] —
[Pixel mapping] —
[Image comment]
Defaults
225
[Attach comment] U
[Copyright information]
[Attach copyright information] U
[Beep options]
[Beep on/off] Off
[Volume] 2
[Pitch] Low
[Touch controls]
[Enable/disable touch controls] Enable
[Full-frame playback flicks] LeftVRight
[Self-portrait mode] Enable
[HDMI]
[Output resolution] Auto
[Advanced]
[Output range] Auto
[External recording control] Off
[Airplane mode] Disable
[Connect to smart device]
[Pairing (Bluetooth)]
[Bluetooth connection] Disable
[Select for upload (Bluetooth)]
[Auto select for upload] Off
Defaults
226
[Wi-Fi connection] —
[Upload while off] On
[Location data (smart device)]
[Latitude] —
[Longitude] —
[Altitude] —
[UTC] —
[Connect to computer]
[Wi-Fi connection] Disable
[Network settings] —
[Options]
[Auto upload] Off
[Delete after upload] No
[Upload file as] RAW + JPEG
[Deselect all?] —
[MAC address] —
[Wireless remote (ML-L7) options]
[Wireless remote connection] Disable
[Save wireless remote controller] —
[Delete wireless remote controller] —
[Assign Fn1 button] Same as camera K button
[Assign Fn2 button] Same as camera G button
Defaults
227
[Conformity marking] —
[USB power delivery] Enable
[Energy saving (photo mode)] Enable
[Slot empty release lock] Enable release
[Save/load menu settings] —
[Reset all settings] —
[Firmware version] —
Defaults
228
D The playback menu: Managing
images
To display the playback menu, select the D (playback menu) tab in the
camera menus.
The playback menu contains the following items:

Item 0 Item 0
[Delete] 229 [Rotate tall] 231
[Playback folder] 230 [Slide show] 231
[Playback display options] 230 [Rating] 233
[Picture review] 231
D See also
“Playback menu defaults” (0212)
Delete
G button U D playback menu
Delete multiple images. For more information, see “Deleting multiple
pictures” (0209).
Option Description
Q [Selected pictures] Delete selected pictures.
D The playback menu: Managing images

229
Option Description
[Pictures shot on
i Delete all pictures taken on selected dates.
selected dates]
Delete all pictures in the folder currently

R [All pictures] selected for [Playback folder] in the playback
menu.
Playback folder
Choose a folder for playback.
Option Description
Pictures in all folders with the selected name will be visible
(Folder name) during playback. Folders can be renamed using the [Storage
folder] > [Rename] option in the photo shooting menu.
[All] Pictures in all folders will be visible during playback.
Only pictures in the current folder will be visible during

[Current]
playback.
Playback display options

Choose whether the focus points used when the photograph was taken
are displayed during full-frame playback. You can also choose the types
of photo information that can be viewed during full-frame playback.
･ Highlight an option and press 2 to select (M) or deselect (U).
･ To complete the operation, press J.

230
Picture review
Choose whether pictures are automatically displayed in the monitor
immediately after shooting.
Option Description
[On] Pictures are displayed in the monitor.
[Off] Pictures can only be viewed by pressing the K button.
Rotate tall
When [On] is selected, “tall” (portrait-orientation) pictures will be
automatically rotated for display during playback.
D Rotate tall
Images are not rotated automatically during picture review even when [On]
is selected for [Rotate tall].
Slide show
View a slide show; pictures are displayed in the order recorded. The
pictures in the folder currently selected for [Playback folder] (0230)
will be displayed one-by-one in the order recorded.
Option Description
[Start] Start the slide show.

231
Option Description
･ Choose the type of picture displayed.
･ Select [By rating] to view only pictures with selected
[Picture type]
ratings. Highlight ratings and press 2 to select (M) or
deselect (U).
[Frame
Choose how long each picture will be displayed.
interval]
Viewing slide shows

To start the slide show, highlight [Start] and press J. The following
operations can be performed while the slide show is in progress:
To Description
Skip back/skip Press 4 to return to the previous frame, 2 to skip to
ahead the next frame.
View additional Press 1 or 3 to choose the photo info displayed. To

photo info hide photo info, select [None (picture only)].
Press J to pause the slide show. To restart, highlight

Pause
[Restart] and press J.
Adjust volume Press X to increase volume, W (Q) to decrease.
Exit to the playback Press G to end the slide show and return to the
menu playback menu.
Exit to playback Press K to end the slide show and return to the
mode playback display.

232
To Description
Press the shutter-release button halfway to return to
Resume shooting
shooting mode.
A dialog is displayed when the show ends. To restart, highlight [Restart]

and press J. To end the show, highlight [Exit] and press J.
Rating
Rate pictures.
･ Highlight pictures using the multi selector 4 or 2.

･ Press 1 or 3 to choose a rating of from zero to five stars, or select d
to mark the picture as a candidate for later deletion.
button.
･ Press J to save changes.

233
C The photo shooting menu: Shooting
options
To view the photo shooting menu, select the C tab in the camera
menus.
The photo shooting menu contains the following items:

Item 0 Item 0
[Reset photo shooting menu] 235 [Active D-Lighting] 258
[Storage folder] 235 [Long exposure NR] 258
[File naming] 239 [High ISO NR] 259
[Choose image area] 240 [Vignette control] 260
[Image quality] 241 [Diffraction compensation] 260
[Image size] 241 [Auto distortion control] 261
[RAW recording] 242 [Flicker reduction shooting] 261
[ISO sensitivity settings] 242 [Metering] 262
[White balance] 244 [Flash control] 263
[Set Picture Control] 251 [Flash mode] 265
[Manage Picture Control] 253 [Flash compensation] 265
[Color space] 258 [Release mode] 265
C The photo shooting menu: Shooting options

234
Item 0 Item 0
[Focus mode] 265 [HDR (high dynamic range)] 285
[AF-area mode] 266 [Interval timer shooting] 292
[Vibration reduction] 266 [Time-lapse video] 305
[Auto bracketing] 266 [Focus shift shooting] 314
[Multiple exposure] 277 [Silent photography] 322
D See also
“Photo shooting menu defaults” (0213)
Reset photo shooting menu

G button U C photo shooting menu
Restore photo shooting menu options to their default values.
･ Photo shooting menu reset is not available while a multiple exposure
is in progress.
Storage folder
Choose the folder in which subsequent pictures will be stored.
1 Folder 3 Folder name

2 Folder number

235
Renaming folders
The default folder name, which appears after the folder number, is
“NZ_30”. To change the name assigned to new folders, select [Rename].
･ Existing folders cannot be renamed.
･ If desired, the default name can be restored for subsequent folders by
pressing and holding the O button while the keyboard is displayed.
D Text entry
A keyboard is displayed when text entry is required.
･ Tap letters on the screen to insert them at the current cursor position. You
can also enter characters by highlighting them with the multi selector and
pressing J.
1 Text display area 2 Keyboard area

･ To move the cursor to a new position, tap the display or rotate the main
command dial.
･ If a character is entered when the text display area is full, the rightmost
character will be deleted.
･ To delete the character under the cursor, press the O button.
･ To complete entry, press X.
･ To exit without completing text entry, press G.
Select folder by number

The folder in which subsequent pictures will be stored can be selected
by number. If a folder with the specified number does not already exist,
a new folder will be created.

236
1 Choose [Select folder by number].
･ Highlight [Select folder by number] and press 2 to display the

[Select folder by number] dialog.
2 Choose a folder number.

･ Press 4 or 2 to highlight digits.
･ To change the highlighted digit, press 1 or 3.
3 Save changes and exit.

･ If a folder with the selected number already exists, a W, X, or Y
icon will be displayed to the left of the folder number. Press J to
complete the operation and return to the main menu; if you chose
a folder marked W or X it will be selected as the folder for new
pictures.
･ If you chose a folder number that does not already exist, a new
folder will be created with that number when you press J.
･ In either case, subsequent pictures will be stored in the chosen
folder.
･ To exit without changing the storage folder, press the G button.
D Folder icons
Folders in the [Select folder by number] dialog are shown by W if empty, by
Y if full (containing either 5000 pictures or a picture numbered 9999), or by
X if partially full. A Y icon indicates that no further pictures can be stored in
the folder.

237
Select folder from list
To choose from a list of existing folders:
1 Choose [Select folder from list].
Highlight [Select folder from list] and press 2 to display the

[Select folder from list] dialog.
2 Highlight a folder.
Press 1 or 3 to highlight a folder.
3 Select the highlighted folder.

･ Press J to select the highlighted folder and return to the main
menu.
･ Subsequent photographs will be stored in the selected folder.

238
D Folder and file numbers
･ Once the folder number has reached 999, the camera will stop creating
new folders automatically and disable the shutter release if:
- the current folder contains 5000 pictures (in addition, video recording
will be disabled if the camera calculates that the number of files needed
to record a video of the maximum length would result in the folder
containing over 5000 files), or
- the current folder contains a picture numbered 9999 (in addition,
video recording will be disabled if the camera calculates that the
number of files needed to record a video of the maximum length would
result in a file numbered over 9999).
･ If there is space on the memory card, you will nevertheless be able to
continue shooting by:
- creating a folder with a number less than 999 and selecting it as the
storage folder, or
- changing the options selected for [Frame size/frame rate] and [Video
quality] before recording videos.
D Startup time
Additional time may be required for camera startup if the memory card
contains a very large number of files or folders.
File naming
Pictures are saved using file names consisting of “DSC_” followed by a
four-digit number and a three-letter extension. [File naming] is used to
select three letters to replace the “DSC” portion of the file name. For
information on text entry, see “Text entry” (0236).

239
D File names
･ File names take the form “DSC_nnnn.xxx”. nnnn is a number from 0001 to
9999. xxx is one of the following extensions, assigned according to the
options selected for image quality and file type:
- NEF: RAW photos
- JPG: JPEG (fine, normal, or basic) photos
- MOV: MOV videos
- MP4: MP4 videos
- NDF: Dust off reference data
･ Images created with [Adobe RGB] selected for [Color space] have file
names of the form “_DSCnnnn.xxx”.
･ In each pair of photographs recorded at image-quality settings of
RAW+JPEG, the RAW and JPEG images have the same file names but
different extensions.
Choose image area

The camera offers a choice of the following image areas:
Option Description
Pictures are recorded with an image area of 23.5×15.7
a [DX (24×16)] mm (DX format). To calculate the approximate focal
length of the lens in 35mm format, multiply by 1.5.
m [1:1 (16×16)] Pictures are recorded with an aspect ratio of 1:1.
Z [16:9 (24×14)] Pictures are recorded with an aspect ratio of 16:9.

240
Image quality
Choose a file format for photographs. For more information, see “Image
quality” in “The i menu” (0161).
Image size
Choose the size, in pixels, of pictures recorded with the camera. Note
that image size varies with the option selected for image area.
Size (cm/in.) when printed at 300

Image area Image size
dpi*
Large (5568 × 3712 Approx. 47.1 × 31.4 cm/18.6 × 12.4
pixels) in.
Medium (4176 × 2784 Approx. 35.4 × 23.6 cm/13.9 × 9.3

[DX (24×16)]
pixels) in.
Small (2784 × 1856

Approx. 23.6 × 15.7 cm/9.3 × 6.2 in.
pixels)
Large (3712 × 3712 Approx. 31.4 × 31.4 cm/12.4 × 12.4

pixels) in.
Medium (2784 × 2784

[1:1 (16×16)] Approx. 23.6 × 23.6 cm/9.3 × 9.3 in.
pixels)
Small (1856 × 1856

Approx. 15.7 × 15.7 cm/6.2 × 6.2 in.
pixels)
Large (5568 × 3128 Approx. 47.1 × 26.5 cm/18.6 × 10.4

[16:9 (24×14)]
pixels) in.

241
Size (cm/in.) when printed at 300
Image area Image size
dpi*
Medium (4176 × 2344 Approx. 35.4 × 19.8 cm/13.9 × 7.8
pixels) in.
[16:9 (24×14)]
Small (2784 × 1560
Approx. 23.6 × 13.2 cm/9.3 × 5.2 in.
pixels)
* Print size in inches equals image size in pixels divided by printer

resolution in dots per inch (dpi; 1 inch = 2.54 cm).
RAW recording
Choose a bit depth for RAW pictures.
Option Description
q [12-bit] RAW pictures are recorded at a bit depth of 12 bits.
RAW pictures are recorded at a bit depth of 14 bits. Files

recorded at a bit depth of 14 bits contain more color data
r [14-bit] than pictures recorded using [12-bit]. Files recorded at a bit
depth of 14 bits are also larger than pictures recorded using
[12-bit].
ISO sensitivity settings

Adjust ISO sensitivity settings for photographs.

242
Option Description
Choose from values of from ISO 100 to 51200. Extended
[ISO settings of about 1 EV or 2 EV above ISO 51200 are also
sensitivity] available. In b mode, the setting is fixed at ISO-A (AUTO),
and the camera sets the ISO sensitivity automatically.
[Auto ISO Highlight [On] and press J to enable auto ISO

sensitivity sensitivity control. If [Off] is selected, [ISO sensitivity]
control] will remain fixed at the value selected by the user.
[Maximum Choose the upper limit for auto ISO sensitivity control
sensitivity] to prevent it being raised too high.
[Maximum
Choose the upper ISO sensitivity limit for photos taken
sensitivity
using an optional flash unit.
with c]
Choose the shutter speed (1/4000 to 30 s) below which

auto ISO sensitivity control will kick in to prevent
underexposure in modes P and A. If [Auto] is selected,
the camera will choose the minimum shutter speed
based on lens focal length. For example, the camera
will automatically choose faster minimum shutter
speeds to prevent blur caused by camera shake when a
[Minimum long lens is attached.
shutter speed] ･ To view auto shutter-speed selection options, highlight
[Auto] and press 2. Auto shutter-speed selection can be
fine-tuned by choosing faster or slower minimums.
Faster settings can be used to reduce blur when
photographing fast-moving subjects.
･ Shutter speeds may drop below the selected minimum
if optimal exposure cannot be achieved at the ISO
sensitivity chosen for [Maximum sensitivity].

243
White balance
Adjust white balance to match the color of the light source. For more
information, see “White balance” in “Basic settings” (0109) and “White
balance” in “The i menu” (0153).
The white balance menu: Fine-tuning

1 Select [White balance] in the photo shooting menu, highlight
the desired option, and press 2 as often as necessary to display
fine-tuning options.
For information on fine-tuning L [Preset manual] white balance,

see “Fine-tuning preset manual white balance” (0250).

244
2 Fine-tune white balance.
･ The multi selector can be used to move the cursor up to six steps
from the center of the grid along either of the A (amber)–B (blue)
and G (green)–M (magenta) axes. The selected value is displayed to
the right of the grid.
･ The A (amber)–B (blue) axis corresponds to color temperature and
is ruled in increments of 0.5. A change of 1 is equivalent to
approximately 5 mired.
･ The G (green)–M (magenta) axis has effects similar to color
compensation filters and is ruled in increments of 0.25. A change
of 1 is equivalent to approximately 0.05 diffuse density units.
3 Save changes.
･ Press J to save changes and exit to the menus.
･ If white balance has been fine-tuned, an asterisk (“U”) will be
displayed in the icon.

245
D White balance fine-tuning
The colors on the fine-tuning axes are relative, not absolute. Selecting more
of a color on a given axis does not necessarily result in that color appearing in
pictures. For example, moving the cursor to B (blue) when a “warm” setting
such as J [Incandescent] is selected will make pictures slightly “colder” but
will not actually make them blue.
D “Mired”
Values in mired are calculated by multiplying the inverse of the color
temperature by 106. Any given change in color temperature produces a
greater difference in color at low color temperatures than it would at higher
color temperatures. For example, a change of 1000 K produces a much
greater change in color at 3000 K than at 6000 K. Mired is a measure of color
temperature that takes such variation into account, and as such is the unit
used in color-temperature compensation filters.
E.g.: Change in color temperature (in Kelvin): Value in mired
･ 4000 K – 3000 K = 1000 K: 83 mired
･ 7000 K – 6000 K = 1000 K: 24 mired
The white balance menu: Choosing a color

temperature
Choose a color temperature by entering values for the A (amber)–B
(blue) and G (green)–M (magenta) axes.
1 Select [White balance] in the photo shooting menu, then

highlight K [Choose color temperature] and press 2.

246
2 Choose a color temperature.
･ Press 4 or 2 to highlight digits on the A–B (amber–blue) axis. You
can also highlight the G–M (green–magenta) axis.
･ Press 1 or 3 to edit the selected item.
A–B (amber–blue) axis G–M (green–magenta)

axis
3 Save changes.
･ Press J to save changes and exit to the menus.
･ If a value other than 0 is selected for the green (G)–magenta (M)
axis, an asterisk (“U”) will appear in the icon.
D Color-temperature selection
･ Do not use color-temperature selection with fluorescent light sources;
instead, use the I [Fluorescent] option.
･ When using color-temperature selection with other light sources, take a
test shot to determine if the selected value is appropriate.

247
Preset manual: Copying white balance from a
photograph
The white balance values for existing photographs can be copied to
selected presets. For information on measuring new values for preset
manual white balance, see “Preset manual” (0156).
1 Select [White balance] in the photo shooting menu, then

highlight L [Preset manual] and press 2.
2 Select a destination.
･ Using the multi selector, highlight the destination preset (d-1 to

d-6).
･ Press X; a confirmation dialog will be displayed.

248
3 Choose [Select picture].
Highlight [Select picture] and press 2 to view the pictures on the

memory card.
4 Highlight the source image.
･ Use the multi selector to highlight the desired picture.

button.
5 Copy white balance.

･ Press J to copy the white balance value for the highlighted
photograph to the selected preset.
･ If the highlighted photograph has a comment, the comment will
be copied to the comment for the selected preset.

249
D Fine-tuning preset manual white balance
The selected preset can be fine-tuned by selecting [Fine-tune] in the preset
manual white balance menu (0244).
D “Edit comment”
To enter a descriptive comment of up to 36 characters for the current white-
balance preset, select [Edit comment] in the preset manual white balance
menu.
D “Protect”
To protect the current white-balance preset, select [Protect] in the preset
manual white balance menu. Highlight [On] and press J; the current white
balance preset is now protected. Protected presets cannot be modified.

250
Set Picture Control
Choose image processing (“Picture Control”) options for new photos
according to the scene or your creative intent. For more information, see
“Set Picture Control” in “The i menu” (0147).
Modifying Picture Controls from the menus

Existing preset or custom Picture Controls can be modified to suit the
scene or the user’s creative intent.
1 Select a Picture Control.
Highlight the desired Picture Control in the Picture Control list and
press 2.

251
2 Edit the selected Picture Control.
･ Press 1 or 3 to highlight settings (0151). Press 4 or 2 to choose

a value in increments of 1, or rotate the sub-command dial to
choose a value in increments of 0.25.
･ The options available vary with the Picture Control selected.
･ To quickly adjust levels for balanced [Sharpening], [Mid-range
sharpening], and [Clarity], highlight [Quick sharp] and press 4
or 2.
the O button.
3 Save changes and exit.

Press J to save changes.

252
D The i menu
･ To select Picture Controls in the i menu, highlight [Set Picture Control]
and press J.
･ Press 4 and 2 to choose a Picture Control and press 3 to display Picture

Control settings. The effect of any changes can be previewed in the
display.
D [Manage Picture Control]

Modifications to existing Picture Controls can be saved using the [Manage
Picture Control] item in the photo shooting menu or video recording menu,
creating custom Picture Controls that can then be copied to a memory card
and used in compatible software or shared among cameras of the same
model.
Manage Picture Control

Save modified Picture Controls as custom Picture Controls.
Option Description
Create a new custom Picture Control based on an existing
[Save/edit] preset or custom Picture Control, or edit existing custom
Picture Controls.
[Rename] Rename custom Picture Controls.
[Delete] Delete custom Picture Controls.

253
Option Description
[Load/save] Copy custom Picture Controls to and from the memory card.
Creating custom Picture Controls

1 Select [Save/edit].
Highlight [Save/edit] and press 2 to view [Choose Picture Control]

options.
2 Select a Picture Control.
･ Highlight an existing Picture Control and press 2 to display edit

options.
･ To save a copy of the highlighted Picture Control without further
modification, press J. [Save as] options will be displayed; proceed
to Step 4.

254
3 Edit the selected Picture Control.
･ The settings available and the techniques for editing them are the
same as for [Set Picture Control].
･ Press J to display [Save as] options when settings are complete.
the O button.
4 Select a destination.
Choose a destination for the custom Picture Control (C-1 through

C-9).

255
5 Name the Picture Control.
･ Pressing 2 when a destination is highlighted in the previous step

displays the [Rename] text-entry dialog.
･ By default, new Picture Controls are named by adding a two-digit
number to the name of the existing Picture Control. The two-digit
number is assigned automatically.
･ Custom Picture Control names can be up to nineteen characters
long. New characters are added at the cursor position.
･ To cycle through the upper- and lower-case and symbol
keyboards, tap the keyboard selection button.
･ For information on text entry, see “Text entry” (0236).
･ When entry is complete, press X to save the new Picture Control.
･ The new Picture Control will be added to the Picture Control list.

256
D The original Picture Control icon
The original preset Picture Control on which the custom Picture Control is
based is indicated by an icon in the edit display.
D Custom Picture Control options

The options available with custom Picture Controls are the same as those on
which the custom Picture Control was based.
D Load/save
The [Load/save] item in the [Manage Picture Control] menu can be used to
copy custom Picture Controls from the camera to a memory card. You can
also delete custom Picture Controls in a memory card, or copy them to the
camera.
･ [Copy to camera]: Copy (import) custom Picture Controls from the

memory card to the camera. The Picture Controls are copied to custom
Picture Controls C-1 through C-9 on the camera and can be named as
desired.
･ [Delete from card]: Delete selected custom Picture Controls from the
memory card.
･ [Copy to card]: Copy (export) a custom Picture Control from the camera
to a memory card. Highlight a destination (1 through 99) for the selected
Picture Control and press J to export it to the memory card.

257
Color space
The color space determines the gamut of colors available for color
reproduction. [sRGB] is recommended for general-purpose printing and
display. With a broader gamut of colors than [sRGB], [Adobe RGB] is a
better choice for professional publication and commercial printing.
D Color space
Third-party image viewing or editing software may substitute other color
spaces for the color space selected on the camera. The color space selected
on the camera can be used when pictures are opened in NX Studio.
D Adobe RGB
For accurate color reproduction, Adobe RGB images require applications,
displays, and printers that support color management.
Active D-Lighting
Preserve details in highlights and shadows, creating pictures with
natural contrast. For more information, see “Active D-Lighting” in “The i
menu” (0165).
Long exposure NR
Reduce “noise” (bright spots or fog) in photographs taken at slow
shutter speeds.

258
Option Description
Reduce noise in photographs taken at shutter speeds slower than 1
[On]
s.
[Off] Long-exposure noise reduction disabled.
Long-exposure noise reduction is performed after the photo is taken.

During processing, [Performing noise reduction] will appear in the
shooting display. Pictures cannot be taken until the message has cleared
from the display. The time required to process photos after shooting
roughly doubles.
D Long-exposure noise reduction

If the camera is turned off before processing is complete, the picture will be
saved but noise reduction will not be performed.
High ISO NR
Photographs taken at high ISO sensitivities can be processed to reduce
“noise” (randomly-spaced bright pixels).
Option Description
[High]
Reduce noise in photographs taken at all ISO sensitivities. The
[Normal] higher the sensitivity, the greater the effect. Choose the amount
of noise reduction performed from [High], [Normal], and [Low].
[Low]

259
Option Description
Noise reduction is performed only as required. The amount of
[Off] noise reduction performed is always lower than when [Low] is
selected.
Vignette control
Vignette control reduces “vignetting”—a drop in brightness at the
edges of a photograph—by an amount that varies from lens to lens. Its
effects are most noticeable at maximum aperture.
Option Description
e [High]
Choose the amount of vignette control performed from (in
g [Normal]
order from high to low) [High], [Normal], and [Low].
f [Low]
[Off] Vignette control disabled.
D Vignette control
Depending on the scene, shooting conditions, and type of lens, JPEG images
may exhibit “noise” (fog) or over-processing at the edge of the frame that
introduces variations in peripheral brightness. In addition, custom Picture
Controls and preset Picture Controls that have been modified from default
settings may not produce the desired effect. Take test shots and view the
results in the monitor.
Diffraction compensation
Select [On] to reduce diffraction at small apertures (high f/-numbers).

260
Auto distortion control
Select [On] as required to reduce barrel distortion when shooting with
wide-angle lenses and to reduce pin-cushion distortion when shooting
with long lenses. Note that [On] may be selected automatically with
some lenses, in which case this item will be grayed out and unavailable.
Flicker reduction shooting

When [On] is selected, reduce the effects of flicker from such light
sources as fluorescent or mercury-vapor lamps.
･ Flicker can cause uneven exposure or (in photographs taken in
continuous release modes) inconsistent exposure or coloration.
･ Note that the frame rate for burst shooting may drop or become
erratic when [On] is selected.

261
D Flicker reduction shooting in the photo shooting menu
･ Depending on the light source, flicker reduction may slightly delay shutter
response.
･ Flicker reduction can detect flicker at 100 and 120 Hz (associated
respectively with AC power supplies of 50 and 60 Hz). The desired results
may not be achieved if the frequency of the power supply changes during
burst photography.
･ Flicker may not be detected or the desired results may not be achieved
depending on the light source and shooting conditions, for example with
scenes that are brightly lit or feature dark backgrounds.
･ The desired results may also not be achieved with decorative lighting
displays and other non-standard lighting.
D [Flicker reduction shooting] in the photo shooting menu:

Restrictions
The [Flicker reduction shooting] item in the photo shooting menu does not
take effect under some conditions, including when:
･ [Continuous H (extended)] is selected for the release mode
･ [On] is selected for [Silent photography] in the photo shooting menu
･ [On] is selected for [Silent photography] in the respective sub-menu
during interval-timer photography, time-lapse video recording, or focus
shift
･ HDR is enabled
･ Exposure delay mode is on
Metering
Metering determines how the camera sets exposure. For more
information, see “Metering” in “The i menu” (0163).

262
Flash control
Adjust settings for wireless remote flash units or optional flash units
mounted on the camera accessory shoe.
･ For information on adjusting settings for optional flash units

mounted on the camera accessory shoe, see “On-camera flash
photography” (0493).
･ For information on adjusting settings for wireless remote flash units,
see “Remote flash photography” (0505).
Flash control mode

Choose a flash control mode and flash level and adjust other settings for
SB-500, SB-400, or SB-300 flash units mounted on the camera accessory
shoe.
･ Settings for flash units other than the SB-500, SB-400, and SB-300 can
only be adjusted using flash unit controls.
Option Description
Flash output is adjusted automatically in response to shooting
[TTL]
conditions.

263
Option Description
[Manual] Choose the flash level manually.
Wireless flash options

Adjust settings for simultaneous wireless control of multiple remote
flash units. This option is available only when an SB-500 flash unit is
mounted on the camera.
Option Description
The remote flash units are controlled using low-
Y [Optical AWL]
intensity flashes emitted by the master flash (0506).
[Off] Remote flash photography disabled.
Group flash options

Set flash options for each group when shooting with remote flash
photography using an optional flash unit (0505). This option is
available only when an SB-500 flash unit is mounted on the camera.

264
Flash mode
Choose a flash mode for optional flash units. For more information, see
“Flash modes” in “On-camera flash photography” (0498).
Flash compensation
Adjust flash output to control the brightness of the main subject relative
to the background. Flash output can be increased to make the main
subject appear brighter, reduced to prevent glare, or otherwise fine-
tuned to produce the desired result (0501).
Release mode
Choose the operation performed when the shutter is released. For more
information, see “The c/E (release mode/self-timer) button” (0136).
Focus mode

265
AF-area mode
Choose how the camera selects the focus point for autofocus. For more
information, see “AF-area mode” in the “Focus” section of “Basic
settings” (092).
Vibration reduction
Choose whether to enable vibration reduction. For more information,
see “Vibration reduction” in “The i menu” (0168).
Auto bracketing
Vary exposure, flash level, Active D-Lighting (ADL), or white balance
slightly with each shot, “bracketing” the current value. Bracketing can be
used in situations in which getting the right settings is difficult and there
is not time to check results and adjust settings with each shot, or to
experiment with different settings for the same subject.
Option Description
Choose the setting or settings bracketed when auto
bracketing is in effect.
･ [AE & flash bracketing]: Perform both exposure and
flash-level bracketing.
[Auto
･ [AE bracketing]: Bracket only exposure.
bracketing set]
･ [Flash bracketing]: Perform only flash-level bracketing.
･ [WB bracketing]: Perform white-balance bracketing.
･ [ADL bracketing]: Perform bracketing using Active D-
Lighting.

266
Option Description
[Number of
Choose the number of shots in the bracketing sequence.
shots]
Choose the amount the selected settings vary with each

[Increment] shot when an option other than [ADL bracketing] is
selected for [Auto bracketing set].
Choose how Active D-Lighting varies with each shot when

[Amount]
[ADL bracketing] is selected for [Auto bracketing set].
Exposure and flash bracketing
No exposure Exposure modified by: –1 Exposure modified by:

compensation EV +1 EV
1 Select [AE & flash bracketing], [AE bracketing], or [Flash

bracketing] for [Auto bracketing set].
[Number of shots] and [Increment] options will be displayed.

267
2 Choose the number of shots.
･ Highlight [Number of shots] and press 4 or 2 to choose the
number of shots in the bracketing sequence.
･ At settings other than [0F], a bracketing icon will appear in the

display.

268
3 Select an exposure increment.
･ Highlight [Increment] and press 4 or 2 to choose the bracketing
increment.
･ The size of the increment can be chosen from 0.3 (1/3 step), 0.7
(2/3 step), 1.0 (1 step), 2.0 (2 steps), or 3.0 (3 steps). Bracketing
programs with an increment of 2.0 or 3.0 EV offer a maximum of 5
shots. If a value of 7 or 9 was selected in Step 2, the number of
shots will automatically be set to 5.
･ The bracketing programs with an increment of 0.3 EV are listed
below.
[Number Exposure and flash No. of

Bracketing order (EVs)
of shots] bracketing indicator shots
0F 0 0
+3F 3 0/+0.3/+0.7
-3F 3 0/-0.7/-0.3
+2F 2 0/+0.3
-2F 2 0/-0.3
3F 3 0/-0.3/+0.3
5F 5 0/-0.7/-0.3/+0.3/+0.7
0/-1.0/-0.7/-0.3/+0.3/
7F 7
+0.7/+1.0

269
[Number Exposure and flash No. of
Bracketing order (EVs)
of shots] bracketing indicator shots
0/-1.3/-1.0/-0.7/-0.3/+0.3/
9F 9
+0.7/+1.0/+1.3
4 Take pictures.
･ Take the number of pictures in the bracketing program.
･ The modified values for shutter speed and aperture are shown in
the display.
･ While bracketing is in effect, the display shows a bracketing icon, a
bracketing progress indicator, and the number of shots remaining
in the bracketing sequence. After each shot, a segment will
disappear from the indicator and the number of shots remaining
will be reduced by one.
No. shots: 3 Display after first shot

Increment: 0.7
･ Exposure changes due to bracketing are added to those made
with exposure compensation.
❚Cancelling bracketing
❚
To cancel bracketing, select [0F] for [Number of shots].

270
D Bracketing options
When [AE & flash bracketing] is selected, the camera varies both exposure
and flash level. Select [AE bracketing] to vary only exposure, [Flash
bracketing] to vary only flash level. Note that flash bracketing is available in
i-TTL and, where supported, auto aperture (qA) flash control modes only
(0495, 0535).
D Exposure and flash bracketing

･ In continuous release modes, shooting will pause after the number of
shots specified in the bracketing program have been taken. Shooting will
resume the next time the shutter-release button is pressed.
･ If the camera is turned off before all shots in the sequence have been
taken, bracketing will resume from the first shot in the sequence when
the camera is turned on.
D Exposure bracketing
The settings (shutter speed and/or aperture) altered during exposure
bracketing vary with the shooting mode.
Mode Setting
P Shutter speed and aperture1
S Aperture1
A Shutter speed1
M Shutter speed2, 3
1 If [On] is selected for [ISO sensitivity settings] > [Auto ISO sensitivity
control] in the photo shooting menu, the camera will automatically vary
ISO sensitivity for optimum exposure when the limits of the camera
exposure system are exceeded.
2 If [On] is selected for [ISO sensitivity settings] > [Auto ISO sensitivity
control] in the photo shooting menu, the camera will first use auto ISO
sensitivity control to bring exposure as close as possible to the optimum
and then bracket this exposure by varying shutter speed.

271
3 Use Custom Setting e5 [Auto bracketing (mode M)] to choose whether
the camera varies shutter speed, aperture, or both shutter speed and
aperture.
White balance bracketing

1 Select [WB bracketing] for [Auto bracketing set].
[Number of shots] and [Increment] options will be displayed.


display.

272
3 Select a white balance increment.
･ Highlight [Increment] and press 4 or 2 to choose the bracketing
increment.
･ The size of the increment can be chosen from 1 (1 step), 2 (2 steps),
or 3 (3 steps).
･ Each step is equivalent to 5 mired. Higher “A” values correspond to
increased amounts of amber. Higher “B” values correspond to
increased amounts of blue.
･ The bracketing programs with an increment of 1 are listed below.
White
[Number White balance No. of Bracketing
balance
of shots] bracketing indicator shots order
increment
0F 0 1 0
B3F 3 1B 0/B1/B2
A3F 3 1A 0/A2/A1
B2F 2 1B 0/B1
A2F 2 1A 0/A1
3F 3 1A, 1B 0/A1/B1
5F 5 1A, 1B 0/A2/A1/B1/B2
0/A3/A2/A1/B1
7F 7 1A, 1B
/B2/B3

273
White
[Number White balance No. of Bracketing
balance
of shots] bracketing indicator shots order
increment
0/A4/A3/A2/A1
9F 9 1A, 1B
/B1/B2/B3/B4
4 Take pictures.
･ Each shot will be processed to create the number of copies
specified in the bracketing program, and each copy will have a
different white balance.
･ Modifications to white balance are added to the white balance
adjustment made with white balance fine-tuning.
･ If the number of shots in the bracketing program is greater than
the number of exposures remaining, the shutter release will be
disabled. Shooting can begin when a new memory card is inserted.
❚Cancelling bracketing
❚
D White balance bracketing restrictions

White balance bracketing is not available at image quality settings of RAW or
RAW + JPEG.
D White balance bracketing

･ White balance bracketing affects only color temperature (the amber–blue
axis in the white balance fine-tuning display). No adjustments are made
on the green–magenta axis.
･ If the camera is turned off while shooting, the camera will power off only
after all photographs have been taken.
･ In self-timer mode, the number of copies specified in Step 2 of “White
balance bracketing” (0272) will be created each time the shutter is
released, regardless of the option selected for Custom Setting c2 [Self-
timer] > [Number of shots].

274
ADL bracketing
1 Select [ADL bracketing] for [Auto bracketing set].
[Number of shots] and [Amount] options will be displayed.


display.
･ The number of shots determines the bracketing sequence:
No. of shots Bracketing sequence

2 [Off]→Value selected in Step 3
3 [Off]→[Low]→[Normal]
4 [Off]→[Low]→[Normal]→[High]
5 [Off]→[Low]→[Normal]→[High]→[Extra high]
･ If you chose more than two shots, proceed to Step 4.

275
3 If you selected 2 shots, choose the Active D-Lighting amount.
･ When the number of shots is 2, the Active D-Lighting setting for
the second shot can be selected by highlighting [Amount] and
pressing 4 or 2.
･ The following options are available.
[Amount] Bracketing sequence

OFF L [Off] → [Low]
OFF N [Off] → [Normal]
OFF H [Off] → [High]
OFF H+ [Off] → [Extra high]
OFF AUTO [Off] → [Auto]
4 Take pictures.
･ Take the number of pictures in the bracketing program.

･ While bracketing is in effect, the display shows an ADL bracketing
icon and the number of shots remaining in the bracketing
sequence. After each shot, the number of shots remaining will be
reduced by one.

276
❚Cancelling ADL bracketing
❚
D ADL bracketing
･ In continuous release modes, shooting will pause after the number of
shots specified in the bracketing program have been taken. Shooting will
resume the next time the shutter-release button is pressed.
･ If the camera is turned off before all shots in the sequence have been
taken, bracketing will resume from the first shot in the sequence when
the camera is turned on.
Multiple exposure
Record two to ten RAW exposures as a single photograph.
Option Description
･ [On (series)]: Take a series of multiple exposures. To end
multiple exposure photography, select [Multiple
[Multiple
exposure mode] again and choose [Off].
exposure
･ [On (single photo)]: End multiple exposure photography
mode]
after creating a single multiple exposure.
･ [Off]: End multiple exposure photography.
[Number of Choose the number of exposures that will be combined to

shots] form a single photograph.

277
Option Description
･ [Add]: The exposures are overlaid without modification;
gain is not adjusted.
･ [Average]: Gain is adjusted before the exposures are
overlaid. The gain for each exposure is equal to 1 divided
by the total number of exposures taken. For example, in
a photo made by combining two exposures, the gain for
each exposure will be set to 1/2, while in a photo
combining three exposures, gain will be set to 1/3.
･ [Lighten]: The camera compares the pixels in each
[Overlay picture and uses only the brightest.
mode]
･ [Darken]: The camera compares the pixels in each

picture and uses only the darkest.
[Save ･ [On]: Save both the multiple exposure and the shots that
individual make it up; the pictures are saved in RAW format.
pictures ･ [Off]: Discard the individual shots and save only the
(RAW)] multiple exposure.
･ [On]: Earlier exposures are superimposed on the view

through the lens. The earlier exposures aid composition
[Overlay
of the next shot.
shooting]
･ [Off]: Earlier exposures are not displayed while shooting
is in progress.

278
Option Description
[Select first
Choose the first exposure from the RAW images on the
exposure
memory card.
(RAW)]
Creating a multiple exposure

1 Highlight [Multiple exposure] in the photo shooting menu and
press 2.
2 Choose an option for [Multiple exposure mode].
･ Highlight [Multiple exposure mode] and press 2.

･ Highlight a multiple exposure mode using 1 or 3 and press J.
･ If [On (series)] or [On (single photo)] is selected, an icon will
appear in the display.

279
3 Choose a value for [Number of shots] (number of exposures).
･ Highlight [Number of shots] and press 2.

･ Choose the number of exposures using 1 or 3 and press J.
4 Choose an option for [Overlay mode].
･ Highlight [Overlay mode] and press 2.

･ Highlight an option using 1 or 3 and press J.
5 Choose a setting for [Save individual pictures (RAW)].
･ Highlight [Save individual pictures (RAW)] and press 2.

･ To save both the multiple exposure and the shots that make it up,
select [On]; the individual shots are saved in RAW format. To save
only the multiple exposure, select [Off].

280
6 Choose an option for [Overlay shooting].
･ Highlight [Overlay shooting] and press 2.

･ Select [On] to superimpose earlier exposures on the view through
the lens. You can use the earlier exposures as a guide when
composing subsequent shots.
7 Choose an option for [Select first exposure (RAW)].
･ To choose the first exposure from existing RAW pictures, highlight

[Select first exposure (RAW)] and press 2.
･ Use the multi selector to highlight the desired picture.
button.
･ After highlighting the desired picture, press J.

281
8 Start shooting.
･ Take the selected number of shots. If you used [Select first

exposure (RAW)] to select an existing RAW image as the first
exposure in Step 7, shooting will start from the second exposure.
･ Once you have taken the selected number of shots, the pictures
will be overlaid to create a multiple exposure.
･ If [On (series)] is selected for [Multiple exposure mode], you can
continue to take additional multiple exposures until [Off] is
selected.
･ If [On (single photo)] is selected, the camera will exit multiple
exposure mode once the number of shots selected in Step 3 has
been taken.
D Saved overlays
If you took pictures with the image quality set to RAW, JPEG images in the
[JPEG fine] image quality will be saved.
❚The i menu
❚
Pictures can be viewed by pressing the K button while a multiple
exposure is in progress. The most recent shot in the current multiple

282
exposure is indicated by a $ icon; pressing the i button when this icon
is present displays the multiple exposure i menu.
･ Highlight items and press J to select.

･ You can also have the option of using touch controls after pressing
the i button.
Option Description
View a preview created from the exposures recorded
[View progress]
to the current point.
[Retake last
Retake the most recent exposure.
exposure]
Create a multiple exposure from the exposures taken

[Save and exit]
to current point.
Exit without recording a multiple exposure.

･ If [On] is selected for [Save individual pictures
[Discard and exit]
(RAW)], the individual exposures will be saved
separately.

283
D Multiple exposure
･ If you use the menus or view pictures in the display while shooting a
multiple exposure, remember that shooting will end and the multiple
exposure will be recorded if no operations are performed for about 40
seconds (or in the case of menus, about 90 seconds). The time available to
record the next exposure can be extended by choosing longer times for
Custom Setting c3 [Power off delay] > [Playback] or [Menus].
･ Multiple exposures may be affected by “noise” in the form of randomly-
spaced bright pixels, fog, or lines.
･ In continuous shooting modes, the camera records all exposures in a
single burst. If [On (single photo)] is selected, multiple exposure shooting
will end after the first multiple exposure is recorded. If [On (series)] is
selected, an additional multiple exposure will be recorded each time the
･ In self-timer mode, the interval between each shot in the exposure is
selected using Custom Setting c2 [Self-timer] > [Interval between
shots]. Regardless of the value selected for the c2 [Number of shots]
option, shooting will however end after the number of shots selected for
the multiple exposure.
･ Multiple exposures may end if settings are changed while shooting is in
progress.
･ Shooting settings and photo info for multiple exposure photographs are
those for the first exposure.
･ Do not remove or replace the memory card while a multiple exposure is in
progress.
･ Memory cards cannot be formatted while a multiple exposure is in
progress. Some menu items will be grayed out and unavailable.
D Multiple exposure: Restrictions

Multiple exposure cannot be combined with some camera features,
including:
･ modes other than P, S, A, and M,
･ video recording,
･ bracketing,

284
･ HDR (high dynamic range),
･ interval-timer photography,
･ time-lapse video recording, and
･ focus shift.
❚Ending multiple exposures

❚
To end a multiple exposure before the specified number of exposures
have been taken, select [Off] for multiple exposure mode. A multiple
exposure will be created from the exposures that have been recorded to
that point (if [Average] is selected for [Overlay mode], gain will be
adjusted to reflect the number of exposures actually recorded).
The multiple exposure will also end if:

･ the standby timer expires after the first exposure has been taken, or
･ you press the K button followed by the i button and select either
[Save and exit] or [Discard and exit]
HDR (high dynamic range)

Used with high contrast subjects, High Dynamic Range (HDR) preserves
details in highlights and shadows by combining two shots taken at

285
different exposures. Use with high-contrast scenes and other subjects to
preserve a wide range of details, from highlights to shadows.
Option Description
･ [On (series)]: Take a series of HDR photographs. To end
HDR photography, select [HDR mode] again and
choose [Off].
[HDR mode]
･ [On (single photo)]: End HDR photography after
recording a single HDR photograph.
･ [Off]: End HDR photography.
Choose the difference in exposure between the two

[Exposure shots. The higher the value, the greater the dynamic
differential] range. If [Auto] is selected, the camera will automatically
adjust the exposure differential to suit the scene.
Choose how much the boundaries between the two

[Smoothing]
images are smoothed.
[Save individual Choose [On] to save each of the individual shots used to
pictures (RAW)] create the HDR image; the shots are saved in RAW format.
Taking HDR photographs

We recommend that you use the matrix metering option when shooting
with HDR.

286
1 Highlight [HDR (high dynamic range)] in the photo shooting
menu and press 2.

287
2 Select an [HDR mode].
･ Highlight [HDR mode] and press 2.

･ Highlight one of the following options using 1 or 3 and press J.
Option Description
Take a series of HDR photographs. HDR shooting
0 [On (series)] will continue until you select [Off] for [HDR
mode].
Normal shooting will resume after you have

[On (single photo)]
taken a single HDR photograph.
Proceed without taking additional HDR

[Off]
photographs.
･ If [On (series)] or [On (single photo)] is selected, an icon will

appear in the display.

288
3 Choose a value for [Exposure differential].
･ Highlight [Exposure differential] and press 2.

･ Choose higher values for high-contrast subjects.

･ Note, however, that choosing a higher value than required may
not produce the desired results. Match your choice to the level of
contrast in the scene.
･ If [Auto] is selected, the camera will automatically adjust the
exposure differential to suit the scene.

289
4 Adjust [Smoothing].
･ Highlight [Smoothing] and press 2.

･ Highlight an option using 1 or 3 and press J; the selected option
represents the amount the boundaries between the two images
are smoothed.
･ Higher values produce a smoother composite image.
5 Choose a setting for [Save individual pictures (RAW)].
･ Highlight [Save individual pictures (RAW)] and press 2.

･ Choose [On] to save each of the individual shots used to create the
HDR image; the shots are saved in RAW format.

290
6 Frame the photograph, focus, and shoot.
･ The camera takes two exposures when the shutter-release button
is pressed all the way down.
･ If [On (series)] is selected for [HDR mode], you can continue to
take HDR photographs until [Off] is selected.
･ If [On (single photo)] is selected, HDR will turn off automatically
after a single shot.
･ HDR photographs are recorded in JPEG format regardless of the
option selected for image quality.
D HDR photography
･ The edges of the image will be cropped out.
･ The desired results may not be achieved if the camera or subject moves
during shooting. Use of a tripod is recommended.
･ Depending on the scene, you may notice shadows around bright objects
or halos around dark objects. This can be mitigated using [Smoothing].
･ Uneven shading may be visible with some subjects.
･ With spot or center-weighted metering, an [Exposure differential] of
[Auto] is equivalent to [2 EV].
･ Optional flash units will not fire.
･ In continuous release modes, only one photograph will be taken each
time the shutter-release button is pressed all the way down.
･ Shutter speeds of “Bulb” and “Time” are not available.
D HDR restrictions
HDR cannot be combined with some camera features, including:
･ modes other than P, S, A, and M,
･ flicker reduction,
･ bracketing,
･ multiple exposures,
･ interval-timer photography,
･ time-lapse video recording, and
･ focus shift.

291
Interval timer shooting
Take photographs at the selected interval until the specified number of
shots has been recorded. When using the interval timer, select a release
mode other than E.
Option Description
Start interval timer shooting. Shooting will begin
either after 3 s ([Now] selected for [Choose start day/
[Start] time]) or at a selected date and time ([Choose day/
time]). Shooting will continue at the selected interval
until all shots have been taken.
Choose a start option. Select [Now] to start shooting

[Choose start day/
immediately, [Choose day/time] to start shooting at a
time]
chosen date and time.
Specify the interval between shots in hours, minutes,

[Interval]
and seconds.
[Intervals×shots/ Choose the number of intervals and the number of

interval] shots per interval.
Selecting [On] allows the camera to adjust exposure

to match the previous shot.
･ Large changes in subject brightness during
shooting may result in apparent variations in
[Exposure exposure. This can be addressed by shortening the
smoothing] interval between shots.
･ Exposure smoothing will not take effect in mode M
if [Off] is selected for [ISO sensitivity settings] >
[Auto ISO sensitivity control] in the photo
shooting menu.

292
Option Description
Select [On] to silence the shutter and eliminate the
vibrations it produces during shooting.
･ Selecting [On] does not completely silence the
[Silent
camera. Camera sounds may still be audible, for
photography]
example during autofocus or aperture adjustment,
in the latter case most noticeably at apertures
smaller (i.e., at f-numbers higher) than f/5.6.
･ [On]: Enable interval priority to ensure that frames

shot in modes P and A are taken at the chosen
interval.
- Select [Release] for Custom Setting a2 [AF-S
priority selection] when AF-S is selected for
focus mode and for Custom Setting a1 [AF-C
[Interval priority] priority selection] when AF-C is selected.
- If [ISO sensitivity settings] > [Auto ISO
sensitivity control] in the photo shooting menu
is set to [On], set [Minimum shutter speed] so
that it is shorter than the shooting interval.
･ [Off]: Disable interval priority to ensure that photos
are correctly exposed.
[Focus before each If [On] is selected, the camera will focus between
shot] shots.

293
Option Description
Combine interval-timer photography with other
options.
･ [AE bracketing]: Perform exposure bracketing
during interval-timer photography.
･ [Time-lapse video]: Use the photos taken during
interval-timer photography to create a time-lapse
video with an aspect ratio of 16:9.
- The camera saves both the photos and the time-
lapse video.
[Options]
- Selecting [1:1 (16×16)] for [Choose image area]
in the photo shooting menu disables the shutter
release.
- Videos created using [Time-lapse video] are
recorded in the [sRGB] color space, regardless of
the option selected for [Color space] in the photo
shooting menu.
･ [Off]: Do not perform additional operations during
interval-timer photography.
Highlight an option and press 2 to select (M) or

deselect (U).
[Starting storage ･ [New folder]: A new folder is created for each new
folder] sequence.
･ [Reset file numbering]: File numbering is reset to
0001 whenever a new folder is created.

294
Interval-timer photography
D Before shooting
･ Take a test shot at current settings.
･ Before proceeding, select [Time zone and date] in the setup menu and
make sure that the camera clock is set to the correct time and date.
･ To ensure that shooting is not interrupted, use a fully-charged battery or
an optional charging AC adapter.
1 Highlight [Interval timer shooting] in the photo shooting menu.
Press 2 to select the highlighted item and view interval timer

shooting options.

295
2 Adjust interval timer settings.
･ Choose the start day and time.
Highlight [Choose start Highlight an option and

day/time] and press 2. press J.
- To start shooting immediately, select [Now].

- To start shooting at a chosen date and time, select [Choose day/
time]. Choose the date and time and press J.
･ Choose the interval between shots.
Highlight [Interval] and Choose an interval (in

press 2. hours, minutes, and
seconds) and press J.

296
･ Choose the number of shots per interval.
Highlight Choose the number of

[Intervals×shots/ intervals and the number
interval] and press 2. of shots per interval and
press J.
- In single frame release mode, if the number of shots per interval

is set to two or more, the photographs for each interval will be
taken at the rate for continuous high-speed release mode.
- When [Off] is selected for [Silent photography], the maximum
number of intervals will vary with the number of shots per
interval.
･ Enable or disable exposure smoothing.
Highlight [Exposure Highlight an option and

smoothing] and press 2. press J.
- Selecting [On] allows the camera to adjust exposure to match

the previous shot.

297
･ Enable or disable silent photography.
Highlight [Silent Highlight an option and

photography] and press press J.
2.
･ Choose an interval priority option.
Highlight [Interval Highlight an option and

priority] and press 2. press J.
･ Choose whether the camera focuses between shots.
Highlight [Focus before Highlight an option and

each shot] and press 2. press J.

298
･ Choose additional options.
Highlight [Options] and Highlight [AE bracketing]

press 2. or [Time-lapse video]
and press J.
- If you selected [AE bracketing], choose values for [Number of

shots] and [Increment]; if you selected [Time-lapse video],
choose a setting for [Frame size/frame rate].
･ Choose starting folder options.
Highlight [Starting Select the desired options

storage folder] and press and press J to proceed.
2.

299
3 Highlight [Start] and press J.
･ If [Now] was selected for [Choose start day/time] in Step 2,

shooting will start after three seconds.
･ Otherwise shooting will start at the time selected for [Choose
start day/time] > [Choose day/time].
･ The display turns off during shooting.
･ Shooting will continue at the selected interval until all shots have
been taken.
D During shooting
･ During interval timer photography, the memory card access lamp will
flash.
･ If the display is turned on by pressing the shutter-release button halfway,

the message [Interval timer shooting] will be displayed and the Q icon
will flash.

300
❚Pausing interval-timer photography
❚
Interval-timer photography can be paused between intervals by
pressing J or by selecting [Interval timer shooting] in the photo
shooting menu, highlighting [Pause], and pressing J. Note that the
menus may not be displayed when the G button is pressed if the time
selected for [Interval] is very short.
･ If [Time-lapse video] is selected for [Options], pressing J between
intervals will end interval-timer photography.
❚Resuming interval timer shooting

❚
Interval timer shooting can be resumed as described below.
･ To resume shooting immediately:
Highlight [Restart] and

press J.
･ To resume shooting at a specified time:
Select [Restart Choose a starting Highlight [Restart]

option], highlight date and time and and press J.
[Choose day/time] press J.
and press 2.

301
❚Ending interval timer shooting
❚
To end interval-timer photography before all the photos are taken,
select [Interval timer shooting] in the photo shooting menu, highlight
[Off], and press J. Note that the menus may not be displayed when the
G button is pressed if the time selected for [Interval] is very short. In
this case you will need to press J to pause interval-timer photography
and then select [Interval timer shooting] in the photo shooting menu,
highlight [Off], and press J.

302
D Interval-timer photography
･ Choose an interval longer than the time needed to take the selected
number of shots at the predicted shutter speed. Note that during actual
interval-timer photography, the camera must not only take shots at the
selected interval but must also have sufficient time to complete the
exposures and perform such tasks as processing the photographs. If the
interval is too short to take the selected number of photos, the camera
may skip to the next interval without shooting.
･ If the interval is too short, the total number of shots taken may be less
than that selected for [Intervals×shots/interval].
･ If you are using a flash, choose an interval longer than the time needed for
the flash to charge. If the interval is too short, the flash may fire at less
than the power needed for full exposure.
･ If shooting cannot proceed at current settings—for example, if shutter
speed is set to “Bulb” or “Time”, the [Interval] is [00:00'00"], or the start
time is in less than a minute—a warning will be displayed in the monitor.
･ Interval-timer photography will not start if [On] is selected for both
[Silent photography] and [Interval priority] and [00:00'0.5"] is selected
for [Interval].
･ If [On] is selected for [Silent photography] or [Time-lapse video] is
selected for [Options], the standby timer will not expire during interval-
timer photography, regardless of the option selected for Custom Setting
c3 [Power off delay] > [Standby timer].
･ If the memory card is full, the interval timer will remain active but no
pictures will be taken. Insert another memory card and resume shooting
(0301).
･ Interval timer shooting will pause if:
- The camera is turned off and then on again (when the camera is off,
batteries and memory cards can be replaced without ending interval-
timer photography)
- E is selected for release mode
･ Changing camera settings while the interval timer is active may cause
shooting to end.

303
D Release mode
Regardless of the release mode selected, the camera will take the specified
number of shots at each interval.
D Adjusting settings between shots

Pictures can be viewed and shooting and menu settings adjusted between
shots. Note, however, that the monitor will turn off and shooting will resume
a few seconds before the next shot is taken.
D Interval-timer photography: Restrictions

Interval-timer photography cannot be combined with some camera features,
including:
･ long time-exposures (“Bulb” or “Time”),
･ the self-timer,
･ bracketing,
･ multiple exposures, and
･ focus shift.
D When [On] is selected for [Silent photography]

Selecting [On] for [Silent photography] disables some camera features,
including:
･ ISO sensitivities of Hi 1 and Hi 2,
･ flash photography,
･ long-exposure noise reduction, and
･ flicker reduction.
D Interval timer settings

Turning the camera off or selecting a new release mode does not affect
interval-timer photography settings.

304
Time-lapse video
The camera automatically takes photos at selected intervals to create a
time-lapse video.
Option Description
Start time-lapse recording. Shooting starts after about 3
[Start] s and continues at the interval selected for [Interval] for
the time selected for [Shooting time].
Choose the interval between shots, in minutes and

[Interval]
seconds.
Choose how long the camera will continue to take

[Shooting time]
pictures, in hours and minutes.
Selecting [On] smooths abrupt changes in exposure.

･ Large changes in subject brightness during shooting
may result in apparent variations in exposure. This can
[Exposure be addressed by shortening the interval between
smoothing] shots.
･ Exposure smoothing will not take effect in mode M if
[Off] is selected for [ISO sensitivity settings] > [Auto
ISO sensitivity control] in the photo shooting menu.
Select [On] to silence the shutter and eliminate the

vibrations it produces during shooting.
[Silent
photography]
example during autofocus or aperture adjustment, in
the latter case most noticeably at apertures smaller
(i.e., at f-numbers higher) than f/5.6.
[Frame size/
Choose the frame size and rate for the final video.
frame rate]

305
Option Description
･ [On]: Enable interval priority to ensure that frames
shot in modes P and A are taken at the chosen
interval.
- Select [Release] for Custom Setting a2 [AF-S
priority selection] when AF-S is selected for focus
mode and for Custom Setting a1 [AF-C priority
[Interval selection] when AF-C is selected.
priority] - If [On] is selected for [ISO sensitivity settings] >
[Auto ISO sensitivity control] and the time chosen
for [Minimum shutter speed] is longer than the
interval, the time selected for the interval will take
priority over the selected shutter speed.
･ [Off]: Disable interval priority to ensure that photos
are correctly exposed.
[Focus before
If [On] is selected, the camera will focus between shots.
each shot]
Recording time-lapse videos

D Before shooting
･ Time-lapse videos are shot using the video crop.
･ Take test shots and check the results in the monitor.
･ Before proceeding, select [Time zone and date] in the setup menu and
make sure that the camera clock is set to the correct time and date.

306
1 Highlight [Time-lapse video] in the photo shooting menu.
Press 2 to select the highlighted item and view the [Time-lapse

video] menu.

307
2 Adjust time-lapse video settings.
･ Choose the interval between shots.
Highlight [Interval] and Choose an interval (in

press 2. minutes and seconds) and
press J.
- Choose an interval longer than the slowest anticipated shutter

speed.
･ Choose the total shooting time.
Highlight [Shooting Choose a shooting time

time] and press 2. (in hours and minutes)
and press J.
- The maximum shooting time is 7 hours and 59 minutes.

308
･ Enable or disable exposure smoothing.
Highlight [Exposure Highlight an option and

smoothing] and press 2. press J.
- Selecting [On] smooths abrupt changes in exposure.


2.
･ Choose the frame size and rate.
Highlight [Frame size/ Highlight an option and

frame rate] and press 2. press J.

309
･ Choose an interval priority option.
Highlight [Interval Highlight an option and

priority] and press 2. press J.
･ Choose whether the camera focuses between shots.
Highlight [Focus before Highlight an option and

each shot] and press 2. press J.
- If [On] is selected for [Focus before each shot], the camera will
focus before each shot according to the option currently selected
for focus mode.

310
･ Shooting starts after about 3 s.

･ The camera takes pictures at interval selected for [Interval] for the
time selected for [Shooting time] in Step 2.
❚Ending shooting
❚
To end shooting before all the photos are taken, press J or select [Time-
lapse video] in the photo shooting menu, highlight [Off], and press J.
Note that the menus may not be displayed when the G button is
pressed if the time selected for [Interval] is very short.
･ A video will be created from the frames shot to the point where
shooting ended and normal photography will resume.

311
D Calculating the length of the final video
･ The total number of frames in the final video can be calculated by
dividing the shooting time selected in Step 2 by the interval, rounding up,
and adding 1.
･ The length of the final video can then be calculated by dividing the
number of shots by the frame rate selected for [Frame size/frame rate]
(for example, a 48-frame video recorded with [1920×1080; 24p] selected
for [Frame size/frame rate] will be about two seconds long).
･ The maximum length for time-lapse videos is 20 minutes.
1 Frame size/frame rate 3 Memory card indicator

2 Length recorded/maximum
length
D Picture review
The K button cannot be used to view pictures while shooting is in progress.
The current frame will however be displayed for a few seconds after each
shot if [On] is selected for [Picture review] in the playback menu. Note that
other playback operations cannot be performed while the frame is displayed.
The current frame may not be displayed if the interval is very short.
D Time-lapse videos
･ Sound is not recorded with time-lapse videos.
･ The shutter speed and the time needed to record the image to the
memory card may vary from shot to shot. As a result, the interval between
a shot being recorded and the start of the next shot may vary.
･ Shooting will not begin if a time-lapse video cannot be recorded at
current settings, for example if:

312
- The value selected for [Interval] is longer than that selected for
[Shooting time]
- [00:00'00"] is selected for [Interval] or [Shooting time]
- [On] is selected for both [Silent photography] and [Interval priority]
and [00:00'0.5"] is selected for [Interval]
- The memory card is full
･ If time-lapse video recording cannot start at current settings, for example
because shutter speed is set to “Bulb” or “Time”, a warning will be
displayed.
･ The K button cannot be used to view pictures while time-lapse recording
is in progress.
･ For consistent coloration, choose a white balance setting other than 4
[Auto] or D [Natural light auto] when recording time-lapse videos.
･ Regardless of the option selected for Custom Setting c3 [Power off delay]
> [Standby timer], the standby timer will not expire while recording is in
progress.
･ Shooting may end if camera controls are used, settings are changed, or an
HDMI cable is connected. A video will be created from the frames shot to
the point where shooting ended.
･ The following end shooting without a beep sounding or a video being
recorded:
- Removing the battery
- Ejecting the memory card
D During shooting
The memory card access lamp lights while shooting is in progress.
D Settings between recordings

Shooting and menu settings can be adjusted between time-lapse video
recordings. Note, however, that the monitor will turn off and shooting will
resume in about 2 seconds before the next shot is taken.
D Time-lapse videos: Restrictions

Time-lapse video recording cannot be combined with some camera features,
including:

313
･ the self-timer,
･ bracketing,
･ interval-timer photography, and
･ focus shift.

including:
･ exposure delay mode,
Focus shift shooting

Focus shift automatically varies focus over a series of shots. Use it to take
photos that will later be combined using focus stacking to create a
single image with increased depth of field. Before using focus shift,
choose a focus mode of AF-A, AF-S, or AF-C and a release mode other
than E.
Option Description
Start shooting. The camera will take the selected
[Start] number of shots, changing the focus distance by the
selected amount with each shot.
[No. of shots] Choose the number of shots (maximum 300).

314
Option Description
Focus shift varies the focus distance over a series of
[Focus step
photographs. Choose the amount the focus distance
width]
changes with each shot.
Choose the interval between shots, in seconds.

･ Select [00] to take photos at up to about 3 fps.
[Interval until
･ To ensure correct exposure when using a flash,
next shot]
choose an interval long enough for the flash to
charge.
･ [On]: The camera locks exposure for all shots at the

[First-frame
setting for the first frame.
exposure lock]
･ [Off]: The camera adjusts exposure before each shot.
Select [On] to eliminate shutter sounds during

shooting.
[Silent
photography]
example during autofocus or aperture adjustment, in
the latter case most noticeably at apertures smaller
(i.e., at f-numbers higher) than f/5.6.
Highlight an option and press 2 to select (M) or

deselect (U).
[Starting storage ･ [New folder]: A new folder is created for each new
folder] sequence.
･ [Reset file numbering]: File numbering is reset to
0001 whenever a new folder is created.

315
Focus shift photography
D Before shooting
･ Take a test shot at current settings.
1 Focus.
･ During focus shift, the camera takes a series of shots starting from
a selected focus position and continuing toward infinity. Given
that shooting ends when infinity is reached, the starting focus
position should be slightly in front of (i.e., closer to the camera
than) the closest point on the subject.
･ Do not move the camera after focusing.
2 Highlight [Focus shift shooting] in the photo shooting menu.
Press 2 to select the highlighted item and display focus shift

settings.

316
3 Adjust focus shift settings.
･ Choose the number of shots.
Highlight [No. of shots] Choose the number of

and press 2. shots and press J.
- The maximum number of shots is 300.

- We recommend taking more shots than you think you’ll need.
You can winnow them down during focus stacking.
- More than 100 shots may be required for photographs of insects
or other small objects. On the other hand, only a few may be
needed to photograph a landscape from front to back with a
wide-angle lens.
･ Choose the amount the focus distance changes with each shot.
Highlight [Focus step Choose a focus step width

width] and press 2. and press J.
- Press 4 to reduce the focus step width, 2 to increase.

- Note that high settings increase the risk that some areas will be
out of focus when the shots are stacked. A value of 5 or less is
recommended.
- Try experimenting with different settings before shooting.

317
･ Choose the interval until next shot.
Highlight [Interval until Choose the interval

next shot] and press 2. between shots and press
J.
- Choose the interval between shots, in seconds.

- Select [00] to take photos at up to about 3 fps.
- To ensure correct exposure when using a flash, choose an
interval long enough for the flash to charge. A setting of [00] is
recommended when shooting without a flash.
･ Enable or disable first-frame exposure lock.
Highlight [First-frame Highlight an option and

exposure lock] and press press J.
2.
- [Off] is recommended if lighting and other conditions will not

change during shooting, [On] when photographing landscapes
and the like under variable lighting.
- Selecting [On] locks exposure at the value for the first shot,
ensuring that all photos have the same exposure. Large changes
in subject brightness during shooting may however result in

318
apparent variations in exposure. This can be addressed by
selecting [Off].

2.
･ Choose starting folder options.
Highlight [Starting Select the desired options

storage folder] and press and press J to proceed.
2.
- Highlight an option and press 2 to select; selected items are

marked with a check (M). To deselect (remove the check from: U)
a selected option, highlight it and press 2 again.
- Place a check (M) next to [New folder] to create a new folder for
each new sequence.
- Place a check (M) next to [Reset file numbering] to reset file
numbering to 0001 whenever a new folder is created.

319
･ Shooting starts after about 3 s.

･ The camera takes photographs at the selected interval, starting at
the focus distance selected at the start of shooting and
progressing out toward infinity by the selected focus step distance
with each shot.
･ Shooting ends when the selected number of shots has been taken
or focus reaches infinity.
❚Ending focus shift photography

❚
To end shooting before all shots have been taken, either:
･ select [Focus shift shooting] in the photo shooting menu, highlight
[Off], and press J, or
･ press the shutter-release button halfway or press the J button
between shots.

320
D Aperture
Given that pictures shot at very small apertures (high f-numbers) may lack
definition, we recommend that you choose apertures wider (f-numbers
lower) than f/8–f/11.
D During shooting
The memory card access lamp flashes while shooting is in progress.
D Focus shift photography

･ The shutter speed and the time needed to record the image may vary
from shot to shot. As a result, the interval between a shot being recorded
and the start of the next shot may vary.
･ Shooting ends when focus reaches infinity, and consequently depending
on the focus position at the start of shooting, shooting may end before
the selected number of shots has been taken.
･ Regardless of the option selected for Custom Setting c3 [Power off delay]
> [Standby timer], the standby timer will not expire while shooting is in
progress.
･ If you are using a flash, choose an interval longer than the time needed for
the flash to charge. If the interval is too short, the flash may fire at less
than the power needed for full exposure.
･ If shooting cannot proceed at current settings, for example because
shutter speed is set to “Bulb” or “Time”, a warning will be displayed.
･ Changing camera settings while focus shift photography is in progress
may cause shooting to end.
D Focus shift photography: Restrictions

Focus-shift photography cannot be combined with some camera features,
including:
･ the self-timer,
･ bracketing,

321
･ interval-timer photography, and
･ time-lapse video recording.

including:
･ exposure delay mode,
A Close-ups
Because focus depth is reduced at short focus distances, we recommend
choosing smaller focus steps and increasing the number of shots when
photographing subjects close to the camera.
Silent photography
Eliminate shutter sounds during shooting (0114).

322
Option Description
Eliminate vibrations produced by the shutter. Use for landscapes,
still lifes, and other static subjects. Use of a tripod is recommended.
･ Selecting [On] for [Silent photography] does not completely
silence the camera. Camera sounds may still be audible, for
example during autofocus or aperture adjustment, in the latter
case most noticeably at apertures smaller (i.e., at f-numbers
higher) than f/5.6.
･ Flash photography is disabled.
･ Long-exposure noise reduction is disabled.
[On] ･ There is no limit to the number of photos that can be taken in a
single burst, regardless of the option chosen for Custom Setting
d2 [Maximum shots per burst].
･ The electronic shutter is used, regardless of the option selected
for Custom Setting d4 [Shutter type].
･ Regardless of the settings selected for [Beep options] in the
setup menu, beeps will not sound when the camera focuses or
while the self-timer is in operation.
･ Enabling silent photography changes the frame advance rates for
continuous release modes (0138).
[Off] Disable silent photography.

323
1 The video recording menu: Video
recording options
To view the video recording menu, select the 1 tab in the camera
menus.
The video recording menu contains the following items:

Item 0 Item 0
[Reset video recording menu] 325 [Diffraction compensation] 329
[File naming] 325 [Auto distortion control] 329
[Frame size/frame rate] 325 [Flicker reduction] 329
[Video quality] 325 [Metering] 330
[Video file type] 326 [Release mode (save frame)] 330
[ISO sensitivity settings] 326 [Focus mode] 330
[White balance] 327 [AF-area mode] 331
[Set Picture Control] 328 [Vibration reduction] 331
[Manage Picture Control] 328 [Electronic VR] 331
[Active D-Lighting] 328 [Microphone sensitivity] 331
[High ISO NR] 329 [Attenuator] 332
[Vignette control] 329 [Frequency response] 332
1 The video recording menu: Video recording options

324
Item 0 Item 0
[Wind noise reduction] 333 [Timecode] 333
D See also
“Video recording menu defaults” (0217)
Reset video recording menu

G button U 1 video recording menu
Highlight [Yes] and press J to restore video recording menu options to
their default values (0217).
File naming
Choose the three-letter prefix used in naming the image files in which
videos are stored; the default prefix is “DSC” (0239).
Frame size/frame rate

Choose the video frame size (in pixels) and frame rate. For more
information, see “Frame size and rate/Video quality” in “The i menu”
(0172).
Video quality
Choose from [High quality] and [Normal]. For more information, see
“Frame size and rate/Video quality” in “The i menu” (0172).

325
Video file type
Record videos in MOV or MP4 format.
･ The audio recording format varies with video file format. Linear PCM
is used for MOV files and AAC for MP4 files.
ISO sensitivity settings

Adjust the ISO sensitivity settings for video mode.
Option Description
Choose the upper limit for auto ISO sensitivity control
to prevent it being raised too high.
[Maximum
･ The selected value serves as the upper limit for ISO
sensitivity]
sensitivity in modes P, S, and A and when [On] is
selected for [Auto ISO control (mode M)] in mode M.
If you select [On] and press the J button, the camera will
automatically adjust the ISO sensitivity for video mode in
[Auto ISO
mode M. If [Off] is selected, [ISO sensitivity (mode M)]
control (mode
will remain fixed at the value selected by the user.
M)]
･ Regardless of the option selected, auto ISO sensitivity
control is used in modes other than M.

326
Option Description
[ISO sensitivity Choose the ISO sensitivity for mode M from values
(mode M)] between ISO 100 and 25600.
D Auto ISO sensitivity control

･ At high ISO sensitivities, “noise” (randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, or
lines) may increase.
･ At high ISO sensitivities, the camera may have difficulty focusing.
･ The foregoing can be prevented by choosing a lower value for [ISO
sensitivity settings] > [Maximum sensitivity].
White balance
Choose the white balance for videos. Select [Same as photo settings]
to use the option currently selected for photos (0244).

327
Set Picture Control
Choose a Picture Control for videos. Select [Same as photo settings] to
use the option currently selected for photos (0251).
Manage Picture Control

Save modified Picture Controls as custom Picture Controls (0253).
Active D-Lighting
Preserve details in highlights and shadows, creating videos with natural
contrast. Select [Same as photo settings] to use the option currently
selected for photos (0165, 0178).

328
High ISO NR
Reduce “noise” (randomly-spaced bright pixels) in videos recorded at
high ISO sensitivities (0259).
Vignette control
Reduce vignetting in videos. Select [Same as photo settings] to use the
option currently selected for photos (0260).
Diffraction compensation
Reduce diffraction in videos (0260).
Auto distortion control

Reduce barrel and pin-cushion distortion in videos (0261).
Flicker reduction
Reduce flicker and banding when shooting under fluorescent or
mercury-vapor lighting during video recording. Choose [Auto] to allow
the camera to automatically choose the correct frequency. If [Auto] fails
to produce the desired results, select [50 Hz] or [60 Hz] according to the
frequency of the local power supply. Choose [50 Hz] for areas with a 50
Hz power supply, [60 Hz] for areas with a 60 Hz power supply.

329
D Flicker reduction in the video recording menu
･ If [Auto] fails to produce the desired results and you are unsure as to the
frequency of the local power supply, test both the 50 and 60 Hz options
and choose the one that produces the best results.
･ Flicker reduction may not produce the desired results if the subject is very
bright. If this is the case, try choosing a smaller aperture (higher f-
number).
･ Flicker reduction may not produce the desired results in modes other
than M. If this is the case, select mode M and choose a shutter speed
adapted to the frequency of the local power supply:
- 50Hz: 1/100 s, 1/50 s, 1/25 s
- 60Hz: 1/125 s, 1/60 s, 1/30 s
Metering
Choose how the camera meters exposure in video mode. [Spot
metering] is not available in the video recording menu (0163).
Release mode (save frame)

In video mode, you can choose the operation performed (0139) when
the shutter-release button is pressed (083).
Focus mode
Choose a focus mode for video recording (090).

330
AF-area mode
Choose how the camera focuses in video mode (092).
Vibration reduction
Adjust vibration reduction settings for video mode. Select [Same as
photo settings] to use the option currently selected for photos (0168).
Electronic VR
Choose whether to enable electronic vibration reduction in video mode
(0178).
Microphone sensitivity
Turn built-in or external microphones on or off or adjust microphone
sensitivity. For more information, see “Microphone sensitivity” in “The i
menu” (0175).
Option Description
[Auto] Adjust microphone sensitivity automatically.
Adjust microphone sensitivity manually. Choose from

values of from [1] to [20]. The higher the value, the
[Manual]
higher the sensitivity; the lower the value, the lower the
sensitivity.

331
Option Description
[Microphone off] Turn sound recording off.
Attenuator
Select [Enable] to reduce microphone gain and prevent audio distortion
when recording videos in loud environments.
Frequency response
Choose the range of frequencies to which built-in and external
microphones respond.
Option Description
Record a wide range of frequencies. Choose for
everything from music to the bustling hum of a city
[Wide street.
S
range] If you are concerned about environmental sounds such
as the sound of air conditioning equipment, select [Vocal
range].
Choose for human voices.

[Vocal
T If the low or high frequency ranges are faint, select [Wide
range]
range].

332
Wind noise reduction
Choose whether to use wind noise reduction when recording videos. For
more information about wind noise reduction, see “Wind noise
reduction” in “The i menu” (0177).
Timecode
Choose whether to record time codes giving the hour, minute, second,
and frame number for each frame when recording videos. Time codes
are available only with videos recorded in MOV format.
Option Description
･ [On]: Record time codes. The time code appears in the
shooting display.
･ [On (with HDMI output)]: Time codes will be included
[Record with footage saved to external recorders connected to
timecodes] the camera via an HDMI cable. The camera supports
Atomos SHOGUN, NINJA, and SUMO-series Monitor
recorders.
･ [Off]: Time codes are not recorded.
･ [Record run]: Time codes are incremented only while

recording is in progress.
[Count-up
･ [Free run]: Time codes are incremented continuously.
method]
Time codes continue to be incremented while the camera
is off.

333
Option Description
･ [Reset]: Reset the time code to 00:00:00.00.
･ [Enter manually]: Enter the hour, minute, second, and
frame number manually.
[Timecode
･ [Current time]: Set the time code to the current time as
origin]
reported by the camera clock. Before proceeding, select
[Time zone and date] in the setup menu and make sure
that the camera clock is set to the correct time and date.
Select [On] to compensate for discrepancies between the

[Drop frame] frame count and the actual recording time at frame rates of
30 and 60 fps.
D HDMI devices
Selecting [On (with HDMI output)] for [Record timecodes] may disrupt
footage output to HDMI devices.

334
A Custom Settings: Fine-tuning camera
settings
To view Custom Settings, select the A tab in the camera menus.
Custom Settings are used to customize camera settings to suit individual

preferences. The Custom Settings menu is divided into two levels.
A Custom Settings: Fine-tuning camera settings

335
The following Custom Settings are available: 1
Item 0 Item 0
[Reset custom settings] 337 [Fine-tune optimal
b3 346
exposure]
a [Autofocus]
c [Timers/AE lock]
a1 [AF-C priority selection] 338
[Shutter-release button
a2 [AF-S priority selection] c1 347
338 AE-L]
[Focus tracking with c2 [Self-timer] 348
a3 339
lock-on]
c3 [Power off delay] 348
a4 [Focus points used] 339
d [Shooting/display]
[Store points by
a5 340 [CL mode shooting
orientation] d1 349
speed]
a6 [AF activation] 342
[Maximum shots per
d2 349
[Limit AF-area mode burst]
a7 343
selection]
d3 [Exposure delay mode] 349
[Focus point wrap-
a8 343 d4 [Shutter type]
around] 350
a9 [Focus point options] 344 d5 [File number sequence] 350
a10 [Low-light AF] 344 [Apply settings to live

d6 352
view]
[Manual focus ring in AF
a11 345 d7 [Framing grid display]
mode] 2 353
b [Metering/exposure] d8 [Focus peaking] 353
[Easy exposure [View all in continuous

b1 345 d9 354
compensation] mode]
b2 [Center-weighted area] 346 e [Bracketing/flash]
e1 [Flash sync speed] 354

336
Item 0 Item 0
e2 [Flash shutter speed] 355 [Customize command
f4 370
dials]
[Exposure comp. for
e3 355
flash] [Release button to use
f5 373
dial]
[Auto c ISO sensitivity
e4 356
control] f6 [Reverse indicators] 374
[Auto bracketing (mode g [Video]

e5 356
M)]
g1 [Customize i menu] 374
e6 [Bracketing order] 357
g2 [Custom controls] 375
f [Controls]
g3 [AF speed] 383
f1 [Customize i menu] 358
g4 [AF tracking sensitivity] 384
[Custom controls
f2 359 g5 [Highlight display]
(shooting)] 384
[Custom controls
f3 369
(playback)]
1 Items modified from default values are indicated by asterisks (“U”).

2 Available only with compatible lenses that have a focus ring.
D See also
“Custom Settings menu defaults” (0219)
Reset custom settings

G button U A Custom Settings menu
Restore Custom Settings to their default values.

337
a: Autofocus
a1: AF-C priority selection

Choose whether photos can be taken before the camera focuses when
AF-C is selected.
Option Description
Photos can be taken whenever the shutter-release button is
G [Release]
pressed (release priority).
Photos can be taken only when the camera is in focus (focus

F [Focus]
priority).
a2: AF-S priority selection

Choose whether photos can be taken before the camera focuses when
AF-S is selected.
Option Description
Photos can be taken whenever the shutter-release button is
G [Release]
pressed (release priority).
Photos can be taken only when the camera is in focus (focus

F [Focus]
priority).

338
a3: Focus tracking with lock-on
Choose how quickly focus responds if something passes between the
subject and the camera when AF-C is selected for focus mode or when
AF-A is selected and you are shooting in AF-C.
･ Choose [5 (Delayed)] to help maintain focus on your original subject.

･ Choose [1 (Quick)] to make it easier to shift focus to objects crossing
your field of view.
･ If [Auto-area AF], [Auto-area AF (people)], or [Auto-area AF
(animals)] is selected for AF-area mode, blocked shot AF response
will function in mode [3] when [2] or [1 (Quick)] is selected.
a4: Focus points used

Choose the number of focus points available for manual focus-point
selection when an option other than [Auto-area AF], [Auto-area AF
(people)], or [Auto-area AF (animals)] is selected for AF-area mode.
Option Description
Every focus point available in the current AF-area mode
6 [All points] can be selected. The number of points available varies
with the AF-area mode.

339
Option Description
The number of available focus points is reduced to one
quarter of the number available when [All points] is
[Alternating selected. Use for quick focus-point selection. The
7
points] number of focus points available in [Pinpoint AF],
[Wide-area AF (L)], [Wide-area AF (L-people)], or
[Wide-area AF (L-animals)] mode does not change.
a5: Store points by orientation

Choose whether separate focus points can be selected for “wide”
(landscape) orientation, for “tall” (portrait) orientation with the camera
rotated 90° clockwise, and for “tall” orientation with the camera rotated
90° counterclockwise.

340
･ Select [No] to use the same focus point regardless of camera
orientation.
Camera rotated 90° Landscape (wide) Camera rotated 90°

counter-clockwise orientation clockwise

341
･ Select [Yes] to enable separate focus-point selection.
Camera rotated 90° Landscape (wide) Camera rotated 90°

counter-clockwise orientation clockwise
a6: AF activation
Choose whether the shutter-release button can be used to focus. If [AF-
ON only] is selected, the camera will not focus when the shutter-release
button is pressed halfway. Focus can only be adjusted using other
controls to which AF-ON has been assigned using Custom Setting f2
[Custom controls (shooting)].
Out-of-focus release
To choose whether the shutter can be released even in circumstances in
which it would normally be disabled, select Custom Setting a6 [AF
activation], highlight [AF-ON only], and press 2. Selecting [Enable]
allows the shutter to be released at any time.

342
Option Description
[Enable] Shutter-release enabled.
[Disable] Shutter-release disabled.
a7: Limit AF-area mode selection

Choose the AF-area modes that can be selected using the i menu or
custom controls.
･ Highlight an option and press 2 to select (M) or deselect (U). Modes
marked with a check (M) are available for selection via the sub-
command dial.
･ To complete the operation, press J.
a8: Focus point wrap-around

Choose whether focus-point selection “wraps around” from one edge of
the display to another. If [Wrap] is selected, focus-point selection will
“wrap around” from top to bottom, bottom to top, right to left, and left
to right, so that, for example, pressing multi selector 2 when a focus
point at the right edge of the shooting display is highlighted selects the
corresponding focus point at the left edge of the display.

343
a9: Focus point options
Choose from the focus point display options below.
Manual focus mode

Option Description
[On] The focus point is displayed at all times in manual focus mode.
[Off] The focus point is displayed only during focus point selection.
Dynamic-area AF assist
Choose whether both the selected focus point and the surrounding
focus points are displayed in dynamic-area AF mode.
Option Description
[On] Display both the selected focus point and surrounding focus points.
[Off] Display only the selected focus point.
a10: Low-light AF
Choose [On] for more accurate focus under low-light conditions when
AF-S is selected for focus mode or when AF-A is selected and you are
shooting in AF-S.
･ This option only takes effect in photo mode.
･ In b mode, [Low-light AF] is fixed at [On].
･ Low-light AF is disabled during interval-timer photography and time-
lapse video recording.
･ The camera may require more time to focus when [On] is selected.

344
･ While low-light AF is in effect, “Low-light” will appear in the display.
The display refresh rate may drop.
a11: Manual focus ring in AF mode

Choose whether the lens focus ring can be used for manual focus in
autofocus mode. Available only with compatible lenses that have a focus
ring.
Option Description
Autofocus can be over-ridden by rotating the lens focus ring
(autofocus with manual override). The focus ring can be used for
[Enable] manual focus while the shutter-release button is pressed halfway.
To refocus using autofocus, lift your finger from the shutter-
release button and then press it halfway again.
The lens focus ring cannot be used for manual focus while
[Disable]
autofocus mode is selected.
b: Metering/exposure
b1: Easy exposure compensation

Choose whether the E button is needed for exposure compensation.

345
Option Description
Exposure compensation can be adjusted using only a command
[On (Auto
dial. The setting selected with the command dial is reset when
reset)]
the camera turns off or the standby timer expires.
Exposure compensation can be adjusted using only a command

dial. Exposure compensation is not reset when the camera turns
[On]
off or the standby timer expires (in b mode, exposure
compensation is reset when the camera is turned off).
Exposure compensation is set by pressing the E button and

[Off]
rotating the main command dial.
･ Enabled in modes P, S, A, and b. Easy exposure compensation is not

available in other modes.
･ The command dial used varies with the shooting mode.
b2: Center-weighted area

When [Center-weighted metering] is selected, the camera assigns the
greatest weight to an area in the center of the shooting display when
setting exposure. Custom Setting b2 [Center-weighted area] is used to
choose the size of the area given the greatest weight when [Center-
weighted metering] is selected.
b3: Fine-tune optimal exposure

Use this option to fine-tune the exposure value selected by the camera;
exposure can be fine-tuned separately for each metering method.

346
Exposure can be adjusted up for brighter exposures or down for darker
exposures in the range +1 to −1 EV in steps of 1/6 EV. The default is 0.
D Fine-tuning exposure
Regardless of the option selected for Custom Setting b3 [Fine-tune optimal
exposure], the exposure compensation icon (E) will not be displayed. The
only way to determine how much exposure has been altered is to view the
amount in the fine-tuning menu for Custom Setting b3.
c: Timers/AE lock
c1: Shutter-release button AE-L

Choose whether exposure locks when the shutter-release button is
pressed.
Option Description
Pressing the shutter-release button halfway locks
O [On (half press)]
exposure.
[On (burst Exposure only locks while the shutter-release

P
mode)] button is pressed all the way down.
Pressing the shutter-release button does not lock

[Off]
exposure.

347
c2: Self-timer
Choose the length of the shutter release delay, the number of shots
taken, and the interval between shots in self-timer mode.
Option Description
[Self-timer delay] Choose the length of the shutter-release delay.
Press 1 and 3 to choose the number of shots taken

[Number of
each time the shutter-release button is pressed; choose
shots]
from values of from 1 to 9.
[Interval Choose the interval between shots when [Number of

between shots] shots] is more than 1.
c3: Power off delay

Choose how long the monitor remains on when no operations are
performed.
･ Different settings can be chosen for [Playback], [Menus], [Picture
review], and [Standby timer].
･ [Standby timer] determines how long the monitor remains on after
the shutter-release button is pressed halfway. The monitor dims a few
seconds before the standby timer expires. If [10 s] is selected, the
timer will be extended to 20 seconds while the i menu is displayed.
･ With the exception of [Picture review], each of the power-off delays
is extended by one minute in self-timer mode.
･ Longer power-off delays reduce battery endurance.

348
d: Shooting/display
d1: CL mode shooting speed

Choose the frame advance rate for low-speed continuous release mode;
options range from [4 fps] to [1 fps].
d2: Maximum shots per burst

The maximum number of shots that can be taken in a single burst in
continuous release modes can be set to any value between 1 and 100.
･ Note that regardless of the option selected, there is no limit to the
number of photos that can be taken in a single burst when a shutter
speed of 1 s or slower is selected in mode S or M, and during silent
photography.
D The memory buffer

Custom Setting d2 [Maximum shots per burst] is used to select the number
of shots that can be taken in a single burst. The number of shots that can be
taken before the memory buffer fills and shooting slows varies with image
quality and other settings. When the buffer is full, the camera will display
“r00” and the frame advance rate will drop.
d3: Exposure delay mode

In situations where the slightest camera movement can blur pictures,
shutter release can be delayed by from about 0.2 to 3 seconds after the

349
d4: Shutter type
Choose the type of shutter used for photographs.
Option Description
The camera chooses the shutter type automatically
according to shutter speed. The electronic front-
O [Auto]
curtain shutter is used to reduce blur caused by
camera shake at slow shutter speeds.
[Mechanical The camera uses the mechanical shutter for all

P
shutter] photos.
[Electronic front- The camera uses the electronic front-curtain shutter

x
curtain shutter] for all photos.
D “Mechanical shutter”
[Mechanical shutter] is not available with some lenses.
D The electronic front-curtain shutter

The fastest shutter speed available when [Electronic front-curtain shutter]
is selected is 1/2000 s.
d5: File number sequence

Choose a file numbering option.
Option Description
When a new folder is created or a new memory card is inserted in
the camera, file numbering will continue from the last number
[On]
used. This simplifies file management by minimizing the
occurrence of duplicate file names when multiple cards are used.

350
Option Description
When a new folder is created or a new memory card is inserted, file
numbering restarts from 0001. If the current folder already contains
images, file numbering will instead continue from the highest file
[Off] number in the current folder.
If you select [Off] after selecting [On], the camera will store the
current file number. File numbering will resume from the
previously-stored value the next time [On] is selected.
Reset the file numbering for [On]. If the current folder is empty, file
numbering will restart from 0001 with the next picture taken. If the
[Reset] current folder contains images, the next picture taken will be
assigned a file number by adding one to the highest file number in
the current folder.

351
D File number sequence
･ If a picture is taken when the current folder contains a picture numbered
9999, a new folder will be created and file numbering will restart from
0001.
･ When the current folder number reaches 999, the camera will no longer
be able to create new folders and the shutter release will be disabled if:
- the current folder contains 5000 pictures (in addition, video recording
will be disabled if the camera calculates that the number of files needed
to record a video of the maximum length would result in the folder
containing over 5000 files), or
- the current folder contains a picture numbered 9999 (in addition,
video recording will be disabled if the camera calculates that the
number of files needed to record a video of the maximum length would
result in a file numbered over 9999).
To resume shooting, choose [Reset] for Custom Setting d5 [File number
sequence] and then either format the memory card or insert a new
memory card.
D Folder numbering
･ If a picture is taken when the current folder contains 5000 pictures or a
picture numbered 9999, a new folder will be created and selected as the
current folder.
･ The new folder is assigned a number one higher than current folder
number. If a folder with that number already exists, the new folder will be
assigned the lowest available folder number.
d6: Apply settings to live view

Choose whether the camera adjusts the preview in the monitor to
reflect how shooting settings will affect the hue and brightness of the
final picture. Regardless of the option selected, the effects of camera
settings are always visible in video mode.

352
Option Description
The effects of changes to settings such as white balance, Picture
[On] Controls, and exposure compensation are visible in the shooting
display.
･ The effects of changes to settings such as white balance, Picture

Controls, and exposure compensation are not visible in the
[Off] shooting display. The hue and brightness of the display can be
adjusted for ease of viewing during extended photo shoots.
･ A g icon appears in the shooting display.
d7: Framing grid display

Display 3×3 (9 divisions) or 4×4 (16 divisions) grid lines, which are useful
for checking composition on the display.
d8: Focus peaking

When focus peaking is enabled in manual focus mode, objects that are
in focus are indicated by colored outlines in the display. You can choose
the color.
Peaking level
Choose from [3 (high sensitivity)], [2 (standard)], [1 (low sensitivity)],
and [Off]. The higher the value, the greater the depth that will be shown
as being in focus.
Peaking highlight color

Choose the highlight color.

353
d9: View all in continuous mode
If [Off] is selected, the display will go blank during burst photography.
e: Bracketing/flash
e1: Flash sync speed

Choose the flash sync speed.
Option Description
Auto FP high-speed sync is enabled with compatible flash
units and the maximum sync speed for other flash units is set
to 1/200 s.
･ When the camera shows a shutter speed of 1/200 s in mode
P or A, auto FP high-speed sync will be activated if the
[1/200 s
actual shutter speed is faster than 1/200 s. If the flash
(Auto FP)]
supports auto FP high-speed sync, the camera can select
shutter speeds as fast as 1/4000 s.
･ In mode S or M, the user can select shutter speeds as fast as
1/4000 s when using flash units that support auto FP high-
speed sync.
[1/200 s]
[1/160 s]
[1/125 s] Flash sync speed set to selected value, which can be from
[1/100 s] 1/200 to 1/60 s.
[1/80 s]
[1/60 s]

354
D Auto FP high-speed sync
･ Auto FP high-speed sync allows the flash to be used at the highest shutter
speed supported by the camera. When [1/200 s (Auto FP)] is selected, the
camera automatically enables auto FP high-speed sync at shutter speeds
faster than the flash sync speed. This makes it possible to choose the
maximum aperture for reduced depth of field even when the subject is
backlit in bright sunlight.
e2: Flash shutter speed

Choose the slowest shutter speed available with a flash in mode P or A.
Regardless of the setting chosen for Custom Setting e2 [Flash shutter
speed], shutter speeds can be as slow as 30 s in modes S and M or at
flash settings of slow sync, slow rear-curtain sync, or red-eye reduction
with slow sync.
e3: Exposure comp. for flash

Choose how the camera adjusts flash level when exposure
compensation is used.
Option Description
The camera adjusts both the flash level and
YE [Entire frame] exposure. This changes the exposure for the
entire frame.
Exposure compensation is adjusted for the

E [Background only]
background only.

355
e4: Auto c ISO sensitivity control
Choose what the camera targets for exposure adjustment when auto
ISO sensitivity control is enabled during flash photography.
Option Description
The camera takes both the main subject and
[Subject and
e background lighting into account when adjusting
background]
ISO sensitivity.
ISO sensitivity is adjusted only to ensure that the

f [Subject only]
main subject is correctly exposed.
e5: Auto bracketing (mode M)

The settings affected when bracketing is enabled in mode M are
determined by the options selected for [Auto bracketing] > [Auto
bracketing set] in the photo shooting menu and the option chosen for
Custom Setting e5 [Auto bracketing (mode M)].
Photo shooting menu [Auto bracketing

Custom Setting e5 [Auto
set]
bracketing (mode M)]
AE & flash bracketing* AE bracketing*
Shutter speed and
F [Flash/speed] Shutter speed
flash level
Shutter speed,
[Flash/speed/ Shutter speed
G aperture, and flash
aperture] and aperture
level
Aperture and flash

H [Flash/aperture] Aperture
level

356
Photo shooting menu [Auto bracketing
Custom Setting e5 [Auto
set]
bracketing (mode M)]
AE & flash bracketing* AE bracketing*
I [Flash only] Flash level —
* If a flash is not used when [On] is selected for [Auto ISO sensitivity
control] and [Flash/speed], [Flash/speed/aperture], or [Flash/
aperture] is selected for e5 [Auto bracketing (mode M)], ISO sensitivity
will be fixed at the value for the first shot in each bracketing sequence.
D Flash bracketing
Flash bracketing is performed only with i-TTL or qA (auto aperture) flash
control.
e6: Bracketing order

Choose the order in which the shots in the bracketing program are
taken.
Option Description
The unmodified shot is taken first, followed by
[MTR > under >
H the shot with the lowest value, followed by the
over]
shot with the highest value.
[Under > MTR > Shooting proceeds in order from the lowest to
I
over] the highest value.
･ Custom Setting e6 [Bracketing order] has no effect on the order of

the shots taken when [ADL bracketing] is selected for [Auto
bracketing] > [Auto bracketing set] in the photo shooting menu.

357
f: Controls
f1: Customize i menu

Choose the items listed in the i menu displayed when the i button is
pressed in photo mode.
･ Highlight a position in the i menu, press J, and select the desired
item.
･ The following items can be assigned to the i menu.
Item 0 Item 0
J [Choose image area] 240 c [Flash mode] 498
8 [Image quality] 161 Y [Flash compensation] 501
o [Image size] 162 s [Focus mode] 90
[Exposure t [AF-area mode] 92

E 134
compensation]
u [Vibration reduction] 168
[ISO sensitivity
9 131 t [Auto bracketing] 266
settings]
m [White balance] 109 $ [Multiple exposure] 277
h [Set Picture Control] 147 [HDR (high dynamic

2 285
range)]
p [Color space] 258
[Interval timer
7 292
y [Active D-Lighting] 165 shooting]
q [Long exposure NR] 258 8 [Time-lapse video] 305
r [High ISO NR] 259 9 [Focus shift shooting] 314
w [Metering] 163 L [Silent photography] 114

358
Item 0 Item 0
v [Release mode] 136 W [Focus peaking] 353
[Custom controls 3 [Monitor brightness] 389

w 359
(shooting)]
Z [Bluetooth connection] 359
z [Exposure delay mode] 349
U [Wi-Fi connection] 165
O [Shutter type] 350
[Wireless remote
[Apply settings to live L 408
connection]
y 352
view]
Bluetooth connection
Enable or disable Bluetooth.
f2: Custom controls (shooting)

Choose the operations performed in photo mode using the camera
controls or lens control ring.
･ Choose the roles played by the controls below. Highlight the desired
control and press J.
Option
w [Fn1 button]
y [Fn2 button]

359
Option
j [AE-L/AF-L button]
k [OK button]
z [Video record button]
S [Lens Fn button]
3 [Lens Fn2 button]
l [Lens control ring]
･ The roles that can be assigned to these controls are as follows:
Option w y j k1 z S 3 l
K [Select center focus point] — — 4 4 — — — —
4 [Save focus position] — — — — — 4 — —
3 [Recall focus position] — — — — — — 4 —
A [AF-ON] 4 4 4 — — 4 4 —
F [AF lock only] 4 4 4 — — 4 4 —
E [AE lock (Hold)] 4 4 4 — 4 4 4 —
D [AE lock (Reset on release)] 4 4 4 — 4 4 4 —
C [AE lock only] 4 4 4 — — 4 4 —
B [AE/AF lock] 4 4 4 — — 4 4 —
r [FV lock] 4 4 — — — 4 4 —
h [cDisable/enable] 4 4 — — — 4 4 —
q [Preview] 4 4 — — 4 4 4 —
L [Matrix metering] 4 4 — — — 4 4 —
M [Center-weighted metering] 4 4 — — — 4 4 —

360
N [Spot metering] 4 4 — — — 4 4 —
t [Highlight-weighted metering] 4 4 — — — 4 4 —
1 [Bracketing burst] 4 4 — — — 4 4 —
4 [+ RAW] 4 4 — — 4 4 4 —
n [Subject tracking] 4 4 — — — 4 4 —
L [Silent photography] 4 4 — — — 4 4 —
b [Live view info display off] 4 4 4 — 4 4 4 —
b [Framing grid display] 4 4 — — 4 4 4 —
p [Zoom on/off] 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 —
O [MY MENU] 4 4 — — 4 4 4 —
3 [Access top item in MY MENU] 4 4 — — 4 4 4 —
K [Playback] 4 4 — — — 4 4 —
J [Choose image area] 4 4 — — 4 — — —
8 [Image quality/size] 4 4 — — 4 — — —
m [White balance] 4 4 — — 4 — — —
h [Set Picture Control] 4 4 — — 4 — — —
y [Active D-Lighting] 4 4 — — 4 — — —
w [Metering] 4 4 — — 4 — — —
I/Y [Flash mode/compensation] 4 4 — — 4 — — —
v [Release mode] 4 4 — — — — — —
z [Focus mode/AF-area mode] 4 4 — — 4 — — —
t [Auto bracketing] 4 4 — — 4 — — —

361
$ [Multiple exposure] 4 4 — — 4 — — —
2 [HDR (high dynamic range)] 4 4 — — 4 — — —
z [Exposure delay mode] 4 4 — — 4 — — —
W [Focus peaking] 4 4 — — — — — —
w [Choose non-CPU lens number] 4 4 — — 4 — — —
X [Focus (M/A)] — — — — — — — 42, 3
q [Aperture] — — — — — — — 43
E [Exposure compensation] — — — — — — — 43
9 [ISO sensitivity] — — — — — — — 43
[None] 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 43
1 Regardless of the option selected, when [Auto-area AF], [Auto-area

AF (people)], or [Auto-area AF (animals)] is chosen for AF-area
mode, the button functions only to initiate subject-tracking AF
(0100).
2 Available with compatible lenses only.
3 Regardless of the option selected, in manual focus mode the control
ring can only be used to adjust focus.
･ The following options are available:
Role Description
[Select center Pressing the control selects the center focus
K
focus point] point.
Pressing and holding the lens Fn button

registers the focus position.
[Save focus
4 For more information, see “Save focus
position]
position/Recall focus position” in the “Focus”

362
Role Description
Pressing the lens Fn2 button recalls the focus
position registered in [Save focus position].
[Recall focus
position]
A [AF-ON] Pressing the control initiates autofocus.
F [AF lock only] Focus locks while the control is pressed.
Exposure locks when the control is pressed.

Exposure lock does not end when the shutter
E [AE lock (Hold)] is released. Exposure remains locked until the
control is pressed a second time or the
standby timer expires.

[AE lock (Reset on Exposure remains locked until the control is
D
release)] pressed a second time, the shutter is
released, or the standby timer expires.
C [AE lock only] Exposure locks while the control is pressed.
Focus and exposure lock while the control is

B [AE/AF lock]
pressed.
Press the control to lock flash value for

r [FV lock] optional flash units; press again to cancel FV
lock.
If the flash is currently enabled, it will be

disabled while the control is pressed. If the
h [cDisable/enable]
flash is currently off, front-curtain sync will be
selected while the control is pressed.
Keep the control pressed to preview photo

q [Preview]
color, exposure, and depth of field.

363
Role Description
[Matrix metering] is activated while the
L [Matrix metering]
control is pressed.
[Center-weighted [Center-weighted metering] is activated

M
metering] while the control is pressed.
[Spot metering] is activated while the

N [Spot metering]
control is pressed.
[Highlight-
[Highlight-weighted metering] is activated
t weighted
while the control is pressed.
metering]
- If the control is pressed when an option

other than [WB bracketing] is selected for
[Auto bracketing] > [Auto bracketing set]
in the photo shooting menu in continuous
release mode, the camera will take all the
shots in the current bracketing program
and repeat the bracketing burst while the
1 [Bracketing burst] shutter-release button is pressed. In single-
frame release mode, shooting will end after
the first bracketing burst.
- If [WB bracketing] is selected for [Auto
bracketing set], the camera will take
pictures while the shutter-release button is
pressed and apply white balance
bracketing to each shot.

364
Role Description
- If a JPEG option is currently selected for
image quality, “RAW” will be displayed and
a RAW copy will be recorded with the next
picture taken after the control is pressed.
The original image quality setting will be
4 [+ RAW] restored when you remove your finger
from the shutter-release button or press
the control again, canceling [+ RAW].
- RAW copies are recorded at the settings
currently selected for [RAW recording] in
the photo shooting menu.
Pressing the control when [Auto-area AF],

(animals)] is selected for AF-area mode
enables subject tracking; the focus point will
n [Subject tracking]
change to a targeting reticle and the monitor
to a subject-tracking display.
- To end subject-tracking AF, press the
control again or press the W (Q) button.
Press the control to perform silent

[Silent
L photography. Press again to cancel silent
photography]
photography.
Press the control to hide the icons and

[Live view info shooting information on the display. Icons
b
display off] and shooting information can be displayed
by pressing the button again.
Each time you press the button, the

[Framing grid composition framing grid on the display
b
display] changes between [Off], [On (3×3)], and [On
(4×4)].

365
Role Description
Press the control to zoom the display in on
the area around the current focus point (the
p [Zoom on/off]
zoom ratio is selected in advance). Press
again to cancel zoom.
O [MY MENU] Press the control to display “MY MENU”.
Press the control to jump to the top item in

[Access top item “MY MENU”. Place frequently-used menu
3
in MY MENU] items at the top of “MY MENU” for quick
access.
K [Playback] Press the control to start playback.
[Choose image Press the control and rotate a command dial

J
area] to choose the image area.
Press the control and rotate the main

[Image quality/ command dial to choose an image quality
8
size] option and the sub-command dial to select
image size.
To choose a white balance option, hold the

button and rotate the main command dial.
m [White balance]
Some options offer sub-options that can be
selected by rotating the sub-command dial.
[Set Picture Press the control and rotate a command dial

h
Control] to choose a Picture Control.
[Active D- Press the control and rotate a command dial

y
Lighting] to adjust Active D-Lighting.
Press the control and rotate a command dial

w [Metering]
to choose a metering option.

366
Role Description
[Flash mode/
I/Y command dial to choose a flash mode and
compensation]
the sub-command dial to adjust flash output.

command dial to choose a release mode.
When the release mode is [Continuous L],
you can change the frame advance rate
v [Release mode] setting by rotating the sub-command dial,
and when the release mode is [Self-timer],
you can change the setting of the time until
the shutter is released by rotating the sub-
command dial.
Hold the control and rotate the main

[Focus mode/AF- command dial to choose the focus mode, the
z
area mode] sub-command dial to choose the AF-area
mode.

command dial to choose the number of
t [Auto bracketing] shots and the sub-command dial to select
the bracketing increment or Active D-
Lighting amount.

[Multiple command dial to choose the mode and the
$
exposure] sub-command dial to choose the number of
shots.

[HDR (high command dial to choose the mode and the
2
dynamic range)] sub-command dial to choose the exposure
differential.

367
Role Description
[Exposure delay Press the control and rotate a command dial
z
mode] to choose the shutter-release delay.

command dial to choose a peaking level and
W [Focus peaking]
the sub-command dial to select the peaking
color.

[Choose non-CPU to choose a lens number saved using the
w
lens number] [Non-CPU lens data] item in the setup
menu.
Autofocus can be over-ridden by rotating the

lens control ring (autofocus with manual
override). The control ring can be used for
manual focus while the shutter-release
X [Focus (M/A)]
button is pressed halfway. To refocus using
autofocus, lift your finger from the shutter-
release button and then press it halfway
again.
Rotate the lens control ring to adjust

q [Aperture]
aperture.
[Exposure Rotate the lens control ring to adjust

E
compensation] exposure compensation.
Rotate the lens control ring to adjust ISO

9 [ISO sensitivity]
sensitivity.
[None] The control has no effect.

368
f3: Custom controls (playback)
Choose the role assigned to the camera buttons during playback.
Option Role Description

Press the control to protect the
g [Protect]
current picture.
When you press the control, you can

press 4 or 2 or rotate the main
c [Rating]
command dial to change the rating
setting for the displayed image.
Press the control to zoom the display

[AE-L/AF-L in on the area around the current
j focus point (the zoom ratio is
button]
selected in advance). Press again to
cancel zoom.
p [Zoom on/off]
･ To choose the zoom ratio,
highlight [Zoom on/off] and press
2.
･ Zoom is available in both full-
frame and thumbnail playback.
Press the control to toggle between

[Thumbnail full-frame playback, 4-, 9-, and 72-
n
on/off] frame thumbnail playback, and
calendar playback.
[OK
k
button]* A histogram is displayed while the
[View control is pressed. The histogram
o
histograms] display is available in both full-frame
and thumbnail playback.

369
Option Role Description
Press the control to zoom the display
in on the area around the current
focus point (the zoom ratio is
selected in advance). Press again to
cancel zoom.
p [Zoom on/off]
･ To choose the zoom ratio,
[OK highlight [Zoom on/off] and press
k
button]* 2.
･ Zoom is available in both full-
frame and thumbnail playback.
Press the control to display the

[Choose [Choose folder] dialog, where you
u
folder] can then choose a folder for
playback.
* Regardless of the option selected, pressing J when a video is displayed

full frame starts video playback.
f4: Customize command dials

Customize the operation of the main and sub-command dials.
Reverse rotation
Reverse the direction of rotation of the command dials for selected
operations.
･ Highlight [Exposure compensation] or [Shutter speed/aperture]
and press 2 to select (M) or deselect (U).
･ Press J to save changes and exit.

370
Change main/sub
Reverse the roles of the main- and sub-command dials.
Option Description
If [On] is selected, the main command dial will control
[Exposure aperture and the sub-command dial shutter speed. If [On
setting] (Mode A)] is selected, the main command dial will be used
to set aperture in mode A only.
If [On] is selected and [Focus mode/AF-area mode] has

been assigned to a control using Custom Setting f2 [Custom
[Autofocus controls (shooting)], you can choose the AF-area mode by
setting] holding the control and rotating the main command dial
and focus mode by holding the control and rotating the
sub-command dial.
Menus and playback

Choose the roles played by the multi selector and command dials
during playback and menu navigation.

371
Option Description
Playback:
･ The main command dial can be used to choose the
picture displayed during full-frame playback. The
sub-command dial can be used to skip forward or
back according to the option selected for [Sub-dial
frame advance].
･ During thumbnail playback, the main command dial
[On]
can be used to highlight thumbnails and the sub-
command dial to page up or down.
Menus*:
Use the main command dial to highlight menu items.
Rotating the sub-command dial right displays the sub-
menu for the highlighted option. Rotating it left
displays the previous menu.
[On (picture
As for [On] except that the command dials cannot be
2 review
used for playback during picture review.
excluded)]
Use the multi selector to choose the picture displayed

[Off] during full-frame playback or to highlight pictures or
menu items.
* The sub-command dial cannot be used to select highlighted items. To

select highlighted items, press J or 2.
Sub-dial frame advance

Choose the operation performed when rotating the sub-command dial
during full-frame playback. This option only takes effect when [On] or
[On (picture review excluded)] is selected for [Menus and playback].
Option Description
[10 frames] Skip forward or back 10 frames at a time.

372
Option Description
[50 frames] Skip forward or back 50 frames at a time.
Skip to the next or previous pictures with the selected

c [Rating] rating. To choose the rating, highlight [Rating] and
press 2.
P [Protect] Skip to the next or previous protected picture.
C [Photos only] Skip to the next or previous photo.
1 [Videos only] Skip to the next or previous video.
u [Folder] Rotate the sub-command dial to select a folder.
f5: Release button to use dial

Selecting [Yes] allows adjustments that are normally made by holding a
button and rotating a command dial to be made by rotating the
command dial after the button is released. This ends when the button is
pressed again, the shutter-release button is pressed halfway, or the
standby timer expires.
･ [Release button to use dial] applies to the E, S, and c (E)
buttons.
･ [Release button to use dial] also applies to controls to which the
following roles have been assigned using Custom Setting f2 [Custom
controls (shooting)] or g2 [Custom controls]: [Choose image area],
[Image quality/size], [White balance], [Set Picture Control], [Active
D-Lighting], [Metering], [Flash mode/compensation], [Release
mode], [Release mode (save frame)], [Focus mode/AF-area mode],
[Auto bracketing], [Multiple exposure], [HDR (high dynamic
range)], [Exposure delay mode], [Focus peaking], [Choose non-
CPU lens number], and [Microphone sensitivity].

373
f6: Reverse indicators
Switch the positive and negative value directions of some indicators
displayed horizontally in screens such as the information display.
Option Description
The indicator is displayed with positive values
V
on the left and negative values on the right.
The indicator is displayed with negative

W values on the left and positive values on the
right.
g: Video
g1: Customize i menu

Choose the items listed in the i menu displayed when the i button is
pressed in video mode.
･ Highlight a position in the i menu, press J, and select the desired
item.
･ The following items can be assigned to the i menu.
Item 0 Item 0
[Frame size and m [White balance] 172
G 172
rate/Video quality]
h [Set Picture Control] 172
[Exposure
E 134 [Active D-Lighting] 178
compensation] y
[ISO sensitivity w [Metering] 177

9 131
settings]
s [Focus mode] 179

374
Item 0 Item 0
t [AF-area mode] 179 W [Focus peaking] 353
[Vibration 9 [Highlight display] 384

u 179
reduction]
[Monitor
3 389
4 [Electronic VR] 178 brightness]
[Microphone [Bluetooth
H 175 Z 375
sensitivity] connection]
5 [Attenuator] 332 165,

U [Wi-Fi connection]
178
[Frequency
6 332
response] [Wireless remote
L 408
connection]
[Wind noise
7 177
reduction]
[Release mode (save

c 139
frame)]
Bluetooth connection
Enable or disable Bluetooth.
g2: Custom controls

Choose the operations performed in video mode using the camera
controls or lens control ring.

375
･ Choose the roles played by the controls below. Highlight the desired
control and press J.
Option
w [Fn1 button]
y [Fn2 button]
j [AE-L/AF-L button]
k [OK button]
G [Shutter-release button]
S [Lens Fn button]
3 [Lens Fn2 button]
l [Lens control ring]
･ The roles that can be assigned to these controls are as follows:
Option w y j k1 G S 3 l
K [Select center focus point] — — 4 4 — — — —
4 [Save focus position] — — — — — 4 — —
3 [Recall focus position] — — — — — — 4 —
A [AF-ON] — — 4 — — 4 4 —
F [AF lock only] — — 4 — — 4 4 —
E [AE lock (Hold)] — — 4 — — 4 4 —

376
C [AE lock only] — — 4 — — 4 4 —
B [AE/AF lock] — — 4 — — 4 4 —
t [Power aperture (open)] 4 — — — — — — —
q [Power aperture (close)] — 4 — — — — — —
i [Exposure compensation +] 4 — — — — — — —
h [Exposure compensation -] — 4 — — — — — —
n [Subject tracking] 4 4 — — — 4 4 —
b [Live view info display off] 4 4 4 — — 4 4 —
b [Framing grid display] 4 4 — — — 4 4 —
p [Zoom on/off] 4 4 4 4 — 4 4 —
O [MY MENU] 4 4 — — — 4 4 —
3 [Access top item in MY MENU] 4 4 — — — 4 4 —
K [Playback] 4 4 — — — 4 4 —
C [Take photos] — — — — 4 — — —
1 [Record videos] — — 4 4 4 — — —
m [White balance] 4 4 — — — — — —
h [Set Picture Control] 4 4 — — — — — —
y [Active D-Lighting] 4 4 — — — — — —
w [Metering] 4 4 — — — — — —
c [Release mode (save frame)] 4 4 — — — — — —
z [Focus mode/AF-area mode] 4 4 — — — — — —
H [Microphone sensitivity] 4 4 — — — — — —

377
W [Focus peaking] 4 4 — — — — — —
X [Focus (M/A)] — — — — — — — 42, 3
q [Power aperture] — — — — — — — 43
E [Exposure compensation] — — — — — — — 43
9 [ISO sensitivity] — — — — — — — 43
[None] 4 4 4 4 — 4 4 43
1 Regardless of the option selected, when [Auto-area AF], [Auto-area

AF (people)], or [Auto-area AF (animals)] is chosen for AF-area
mode, the button functions only to initiate subject-tracking AF
(0100).
2 Available with compatible lenses only.
3 Regardless of the option selected, in manual focus mode the control
ring can only be used to adjust focus.
Role Description
[Select center Pressing the control selects the center focus
K
focus point] point.
Pressing and holding the lens Fn button

registers the focus position.
[Save focus
position]

378
Role Description
Pressing the lens Fn2 button recalls the
focus position registered in [Save focus
[Recall focus position].
3
position] For more information, see “Save focus
A [AF-ON] Pressing the control initiates autofocus.
F [AF lock only] Focus locks while the control is pressed.

Exposure lock does not end when the
E [AE lock (Hold)] shutter is released. Exposure remains locked
until the control is pressed a second time or
the standby timer expires.
C [AE lock only] Exposure locks while the control is pressed.
Focus and exposure lock while the control is

B [AE/AF lock]
pressed.
Aperture widens while the Fn1 button is

pressed. Use in combination with Custom
[Power aperture
t Setting g2 [Custom controls] > [Fn2
(open)]
button] > [Power aperture (close)] for
button-controlled aperture adjustment.
Aperture narrows while the Fn2 button is

pressed. Use in combination with Custom
[Power aperture
q Setting g2 [Custom controls] > [Fn1
(close)]
button] > [Power aperture (open)] for
button-controlled aperture adjustment.

379
Role Description
Exposure compensation increases while the
Fn1 button is pressed. Use in combination
[Exposure with Custom Setting g2 [Custom controls] >
i
compensation +] [Fn2 button] > [Exposure compensation -]
for button-controlled exposure
compensation.
Exposure compensation decreases while the

Fn2 button is pressed. Use in combination
[Exposure with Custom Setting g2 [Custom controls] >
h
compensation -] [Fn1 button] > [Exposure compensation +]
for button-controlled exposure
compensation.
Pressing the control when [Auto-area AF],

(animals)] is selected for AF-area mode
enables subject tracking; the focus point will
n [Subject tracking]
change to a targeting reticle and the
monitor to a subject-tracking display.
･ To end subject-tracking AF, press the
control again or press the W (Q) button.
Press the control to hide the icons and

[Live view info shooting information on the display. Icons
b
display off] and shooting information can be displayed
by pressing the button again.
Each time you press the button, the

[Framing grid composition framing grid on the display
b
display] changes between [Off], [On (3×3)], and [On
(4×4)].

380
Role Description
Press the control to zoom the display in on
the area around the current focus point (the
p [Zoom on/off]
zoom ratio is selected in advance). Press
again to cancel zoom.
O [MY MENU] Press the control to display “MY MENU”.
Press the control to jump to the top item in

[Access top item in “MY MENU”. Place frequently-used menu
3
MY MENU] items at the top of “MY MENU” for quick
access.
K [Playback] Press the control to start playback.
Press the shutter-release button all the way

C [Take photos] down to take a photograph with an aspect
ratio of 16:9.
Press the control to start recording. Press

1 [Record videos]
again to end recording.

command dial to adjust white balance for
m [White balance] videos. Some options offer sub-options that
can be selected by rotating the sub-
command dial.
[Set Picture Press the control and rotate a command dial

h
Control] to choose a Picture Control.

y [Active D-Lighting]
to adjust Active D-Lighting for videos.

w [Metering]
to choose a video metering option.

381
Role Description
[Release mode
c to choose the release mode for photographs
(save frame)]
taken in video mode.

[Focus mode/AF- command dial to choose the focus mode,
z
area mode] the sub-command dial to choose the AF-
area mode.
[Microphone Press the control and rotate a command dial

H
sensitivity] to adjust microphone sensitivity.

command dial to choose a peaking level and
W [Focus peaking]
the sub-command dial to select the peaking
color.
The lens control ring can be used for manual

focus regardless of the option selected for
focus mode. To refocus using autofocus,
X [Focus (M/A)]
press the shutter-release button halfway or
press a control to which AF-ON has been
assigned.
Rotate the lens control ring to adjust

q [Power aperture]
aperture.
[Exposure Rotate the lens control ring to adjust

E
compensation] exposure compensation.
Rotate the lens control ring to adjust ISO

9 [ISO sensitivity]
sensitivity.

382
D Power aperture
･ Power aperture is available only in modes A and M.
･ A 6 icon in the shooting display indicates that power aperture cannot be
used.
･ The display may flicker while aperture is adjusted.
g3: AF speed
Choose the focus speed in video mode when the focus mode is set to
AF-C or AF-F.
Use [When to apply] to choose when the selected option applies.
Option Description
The camera focuses at the selected speed at all times
D [Always]
in video mode.
Focus is adjusted at the selected speed only during

[Only while
E video recording. At other times, the focus speed is
recording]
“+5”, or in other words as fast possible.

383
g4: AF tracking sensitivity
Set the AF tracking sensitivity from values 1 to 7 in video mode when
the focus mode is set to AF-C or AF-F.
･ Choose [7 (Low)] to help maintain focus on your original subject.

･ If the subject leaves the selected focus area when [1 (High)] is
selected, the camera will respond by quickly shifting focus to a new
subject in the same area.
g5: Highlight display

Choose whether shading is used to indicate highlights (bright areas of
the frame) during video recording.
Display pattern
To enable the highlight display, select [Pattern 1] or [Pattern 2].
Pattern 1 Pattern 2

384
Highlight display threshold
Choose the brightness needed to trigger the video highlight display.
The lower the value, the greater the range of brightnesses that will be
shown as highlights. If [255] is selected, the highlight display will show
only areas that are potentially overexposed.
D Highlight display
If both the highlight display and focus peaking are enabled, only focus
peaking will be displayed in manual focus mode. To view the highlight
display in manual focus mode, select [Off] for Custom Setting d8 [Focus
peaking] > [Peaking level].

385
B The setup menu: Camera setup
To view the setup menu, select the B tab in the camera menus.
The setup menu contains the following items:

Item 0 Item 0
[Format memory card] 387 [Image comment] 398
[Save user settings] 387 [Copyright information] 399
[Reset user settings] 388 [Beep options] 400
[Language] 388 [Touch controls] 401
[Time zone and date] 388 [Self-portrait mode] 402
[Monitor brightness] 389 [HDMI] 402
[Monitor color balance] 389 [Airplane mode] 402
[REC lamp brightness] 390 [Connect to smart device] 403
[Information display] 391 [Connect to computer] 405
[AF fine-tuning options] 392 [Wireless remote (ML-L7)

408
options]
[Non-CPU lens data] 394
[Conformity marking] 409
[Save focus position] 395
[USB power delivery] 410
[Image Dust Off ref photo] 395
[Energy saving (photo
[Pixel mapping] 398 412
mode)]

386
Item 0 Item 0
[Slot empty release lock] 412 [Reset all settings] 417
[Save/load menu settings] 413 [Firmware version] 417
D See also
“Setup menu defaults” (0224)
Format memory card

G button U B setup menu
Format memory cards. Note that formatting permanently deletes all
pictures and other data on the card. Before formatting, be sure to
make backup copies as required.
D During formatting
Do not turn the camera off or remove memory cards until the message
[Format memory card] clears from the display.
Save user settings

Frequently-used combinations of settings can be assigned to the U1 to
U3 positions on the mode dial (0128).

387
Reset user settings
Reset settings for U1 to U3 to default values (0129).
Language
Choose a language for camera menus and messages. The languages
available vary with the country or region in which the camera was
originally purchased.
Time zone and date

Change time zones and set the camera clock. We recommend that the
camera clock be adjusted regularly.
Option Description
Choose a time zone. [Date and time] is automatically set
[Time zone]
to the time in the new time zone.
Set the camera clock to the time in the selected [Time

[Date and time]
zone].
Choose the order in which the day, month, and year are
[Date format]
displayed.
Select [On] to turn daylight saving time on, [Off] to turn it

[Daylight
off. Selecting [On] automatically advances the clock one
saving time]
hour. The default setting is [Off].
If the camera clock has been initialized, the 1 icon is displayed in the
shooting display as a warning.

388
Monitor brightness
Press 1 or 3 to adjust monitor brightness. Choose higher values for
increased brightness, lower values for reduced brightness.
･ Higher values increase the drain on the battery.
Monitor color balance

Adjust monitor color balance to your taste.
･ Color balance is adjusted using the multi selector. Press 1, 3, 4, or
2 to adjust color balance as shown below. Press J to save changes.
1 Increase green 3 Increase magenta

2 Increase amber 4 Increase blue
･ Monitor color balance applies only to menus, playback, and the
shooting display; photos and videos taken with the camera are not
affected.

389
･ The reference image is either the last picture taken or, in playback
mode, the picture last displayed. If the memory card contains no
pictures, an empty frame will be displayed instead.
･ To choose a different picture, press the W (Q) button. Highlight the
desired picture and press J to select it as the reference image.
button.
REC lamp brightness

Set the REC lamp brightness while recording videos and time-lapse
videos. The brightness decreases from [3], [2], and [1]. When [Off] is
selected, the REC lamp does not light up or flash.
Option Description
Set the brightness when the REC lamp lights up or flashes
while recording videos or in video mode.
･ When an option other than [Off] is selected, the REC lamp
[Video
lights up while recording videos.
recording]
･ For information on the flashing of the REC lamp while
recording videos or in video mode, see “The REC lamp”
(082).

390
Option Description
Set the brightness when the REC lamp lights up or flashes
while recording time-lapse videos.
lights up while recording time-lapse videos.
[Time-lapse ･ If an option other than [Off] is selected and the battery is
video low while recording time-lapse videos, the REC lamp
recording] repeatedly flashes twice quickly.
lights up or flashes even if [Time-lapse video] is selected
for [Interval timer shooting] > [Options] in the photo
shooting menu.
Information display
Adjust the appearance of the information display according to lighting
conditions.
Dark on light Light on dark
Option Description
[Dark on To make the display easier to read in bright locations, the
w
light] monitor lights and the lettering is displayed in black.
[Light on To make the display easier to read in dark locations, the

x
dark] monitor dims and the lettering is displayed in white.

391
AF fine-tuning options
Fine-tune focus for the current lens.
･ Use only as required.
･ We recommend that you perform fine-tuning at a focus distance you
use frequently. If you perform focus-tuning at a short focus distance,
for example, you may find it less effective at longer distances.
Option Description
[AF fine- ･ [On]: Turn AF fine-tuning on.
tune] ･ [Off]: Turn AF fine-tuning off.
Fine-tune focus for the current lens. Press 1 or 3 to highlight

items and press 4 or 2 to choose from values between +20
and -20.
･ The larger the fine-tuning value, the farther the focal point
[Fine-tune
is from the lens; the smaller the value, the closer the focal
and save
point.
lens]
･ The display shows the current and previous values.
･ The camera can store values for up to 40 lens types.
･ If a lens for which values have already been saved is used,
the fine-tuning values will be overwritten.
Choose the fine-tuning values for lenses for which no values

[Default] have previously been saved using [Fine-tune and save lens].
Press 4 or 2 to choose from values between +20 and -20.

392
Option Description
List values saved using [Fine-tune and save lens].
Highlighting a lens in the list and pressing 2 displays a
[Choose lens number] dialog.
[List saved
values]
･ The [Choose lens number] dialog is used to enter the lens

identifier.
･ The serial number is automatically entered for Z mount
lenses and some F mount lenses.
D Deleting saved values

To delete values saved using [Fine-tune and save lens], highlight the
desired lens in the [List saved values] list and press O.
Creating and saving fine-tuning values

1 Attach the lens to the camera.
2 Select [AF fine-tuning options] in the setup menu, then

highlight [Fine-tune and save lens] and press 2.
An AF fine-tuning dialog will be displayed.

393
3 Press 4 or 2 to fine-tune autofocus.
･ Choose from values between +20 and −20.
･ The current value is shown by g, the previously-selected value by
j.
･ If a zoom lens is attached, you can choose separate fine-tuning
values for maximum angle (WIDE) and maximum zoom (TELE). Use
1 and 3 to choose between the two.
･ The larger the fine-tuning value, the farther the focal point is from
the lens; the smaller the value, the closer the focal point.
4 Press J to save the new value.
Choosing a default fine-tuning value

1 Select [AF fine-tuning options] in the setup menu, then
highlight [Default] and press 2.
2 Press 4 or 2 to fine-tune autofocus.

･ Choose from values between +20 and −20.
･ The current value is shown by g, the previously-selected value by
j.
･ The larger the fine-tuning value, the farther the focal point is from
the lens; the smaller the value, the closer the focal point.
3 Press J to save the new value.
Non-CPU lens data

Record data for non-CPU lenses attached using an optional mount
adapter. By registering the focal length and maximum aperture of a non-
CPU lens in the camera, you can display this data as shooting data.

394
Option Description
[Lens number] Choose a lens identifier.
[Focal length (mm)] Enter the focal length.
[Maximum aperture] Enter the maximum aperture.
Save focus position

If [On] is selected, the camera will save the focus position in effect when
the camera is turned off and restore it when the camera is turned on.
･ The focus position may change due to changes in zoom or ambient
temperature.
･ This option applies only with autofocus Z mount lenses.
･ If [On] is selected, it may be some time before you can operate the
camera after turning it on.
Image Dust Off ref photo

Acquire reference data for the Image Dust Off option in NX Studio.
Image Dust Off processes RAW images to mitigate effects caused by
dust adhering in front of the camera image sensor. For more
information, refer to NX Studio online help.

395
Acquiring Image Dust Off reference data
1 Select photo mode by rotating the photo/video selector to C.
2 Select [Image Dust Off ref photo] in the setup menu.
Highlight [Image Dust Off ref photo] and press 2.
3 Select [Start] on the Image Dust Off ref photo dialog.

･ Highlight [Start] and press J to display the shooting screen.
4 With the lens about ten centimeters (four inches) from a well-lit,
featureless white object, frame the object so that it fills the
display and then press the shutter-release button halfway.
･ In autofocus mode, focus will automatically be set to infinity.
･ In manual focus mode, set focus to infinity manually.

396
5 Press the shutter-release button the rest of the way down to
acquire Image Dust Off reference data.
･ The monitor turns off when the shutter-release button is pressed.
･ If the reference object is too bright or too dark, the camera may be
unable to acquire Image Dust Off reference data and a message
will be displayed and the camera will return to the display shown
in Step 3. Choose another reference object and press the shutter-
release button again.
D Acquiring Image Dust Off reference data

･ A lens with a focal length of at least 50 mm is recommended.
･ When using a zoom lens, zoom all the way in.
･ The same reference data can be used for photographs taken with different
lenses or at different apertures.
･ Reference images cannot be viewed using computer imaging software.
･ A grid pattern is displayed when reference images are viewed on the
camera.

397
Pixel mapping
Pixel mapping checks and optimizes the camera image sensor. If you
notice unexpected bright spots appearing in pictures taken with the
camera, perform pixel mapping as described below.
･ Pixel mapping is available only when a Z mount lens or an optional
FTZ II/FTZ mount adapter is attached.
･ To prevent unexpected loss of power, use a fully-charged battery or
1 Select [Pixel mapping] in the setup menu.

Turn the camera on, press the G button, and select [Pixel
mapping] in the setup menu.
2 Select [Start].
Pixel mapping will start. A message is displayed while the operation
is in progress.
3 Turn the camera off when pixel mapping is complete.
D Pixel mapping
･ Do not attempt to operate the camera while pixel mapping is in progress.
Do not turn the camera off or remove the battery.
･ Pixel mapping may not be available if the camera’s internal temperature is
elevated.
Image comment
Add a comment to new photographs as they are taken. Comments can
be viewed in NX Studio’s [Info] tab.

398
Input comment
Input a comment of up to 36 characters. Highlight [Input comment]
and press 2 to display a text-entry dialog. For information on text entry,
see “Text entry” (0236).
Attach comment
To attach the comment to subsequent photographs, highlight [Attach
comment], press 2, and confirm that a check (M) appears in the
adjacent check box. Press J to save changes and exit; the comment will
be attached to all subsequent photographs.
D Photo info
Comments can be viewed on the shooting data page in the photo
information display.
Copyright information
Add copyright information to new photographs as they are taken.
Copyright information can be viewed in NX Studio’s [Info] tab.
Artist/Copyright
Enter the names of the photographer (maximum 36 characters) and
copyright holder (maximum 54 characters). Highlight [Artist] or
[Copyright] and press 2 to display a text-entry dialog. For information
on text entry, see “Text entry” (0236).

399
Attach copyright information
To attach copyright information to subsequent photographs, highlight
[Attach copyright information], press 2, and confirm that a check (M)
appears in the adjacent check box. Press J to save changes and exit;
copyright information will be attached to all subsequent photographs.
D Copyright information
･ To prevent unauthorized use of the artist or copyright holder names,
make sure that [Attach copyright information] is not selected before
lending or transferring the camera to another person. You will also need
to make sure that the artist and copyright fields are blank.
･ Nikon does not accept liability for any damages or disputes arising from
the use of the [Copyright information] option.
D Photo info
Copyright information is included in the shooting data shown in the photo
information display.
Beep options
Beep on/off
Turn the beep speaker on or off.
･ If [On] is selected for [Beep on/off], beeps sound when:
- the self-timer counts down,

400
- interval-timer photography, time-lapse video recording, or focus
shift ends,
- the camera focuses in photo mode (note that this does not apply if
AF-C is selected for focus mode or when AF-A is selected and you
are shooting in AF-C, and [Release] is selected for Custom Setting
a2 [AF-S priority selection]),
- touch controls are used, or
- the shutter-release button is pressed with a write-protected
memory card inserted in the camera.
･ Select [Off (touch controls only)] to disable the beep for touch
controls while enabling it for other purposes.
･ When [On] is selected for [Silent photography] in the photo
shooting menu, a beep will not sound when the camera focuses or
while the self-timer is in operation, regardless of the settings selected
for [Beep options].
Volume
Adjust beep volume.
Pitch
Choose the pitch of the beep from [High] and [Low].
Touch controls
Adjust settings for monitor touch controls.
Enable/disable touch controls

Enable or disable touch controls. Select [Playback only] to enable touch
controls in playback mode only.

401
Full-frame playback flicks
Choose whether the next image in full-frame playback is displayed by
flicking left or by flicking right.
Option Description
S [LeftURight] Flick left to display the next picture.
T [LeftVRight] Flick right to view the next picture.
Self-portrait mode
When set to [Disable], the monitor will not switch to self-portrait mode
even if it is set to the self-portrait mode position.
HDMI
Adjust settings for connection to HDMI devices (0489).
Airplane mode
Select [Enable] to disable the camera’s built-in Bluetooth and Wi-Fi
functions.

402
Connect to smart device
Connect to smartphones or tablets (smart devices) via Bluetooth or Wi-
Fi.
Pairing (Bluetooth)
Pair with or connect to smart devices using Bluetooth.
Option Description
[Start pairing] Pair the camera with a smart device (0475).
List paired smart devices. To connect, select a

[Paired devices]
device from the list.
[Bluetooth
Select [Enable] to enable Bluetooth.
connection]
Select for upload (Bluetooth)

Select pictures for upload to a smart device. You can also opt to upload
pictures as they are taken.

403
Option Description
Select [On] to mark pictures for upload as they are
taken. Photos are uploaded in JPEG format at a size of 2
[Auto select for megapixels, even if other upload size and format
upload] options are selected with the camera. Photos taken in
video mode will not be uploaded. They must be
uploaded manually.
[Manually select Upload selected pictures. Transfer marking appears on

for upload] the selected pictures.
[Deselect all] Remove transfer marking from all pictures.
Wi-Fi connection
Connect to smart devices via Wi-Fi.
❚Establish Wi-Fi connection

❚
Initiate a Wi-Fi connection to a smart device.
･ The camera SSID and password will be displayed. To connect, select
the camera SSID on the smart device and enter the password (0478).
･ Once a connection is established, this option will change to [Close
Wi-Fi connection].
･ Use [Close Wi-Fi connection] to end the connection when desired.
❚Wi-Fi connection settings

❚
Access the following Wi-Fi settings:
Option Description
[SSID] Choose the camera SSID.
[Authentication/
Choose [OPEN] or [WPA2-PSK-AES].
encryption]

404
Option Description
[Password] Choose the camera password.
Choose a channel.
･ Select [Auto] to have the camera choose the
[Channel] channel automatically.
･ Select [Manual] to choose the channel
manually.
[Current settings] View current Wi-Fi settings.
[Reset connection Select [Yes] to reset Wi-Fi settings to default

settings] values.
Upload while off

If [On] is selected, upload of images to smart devices connected via
Bluetooth or Wi-Fi will continue even when the camera is off.
Location data (smart device)

Display latitude, longitude, altitude, and UTC (Universal Coordinated
Time) data downloaded from a smart device.
Connect to computer
Connect to computers via Wi-Fi.

405
Wi-Fi connection
Select [Enable] to connect using the settings currently selected for
[Network settings].
Network settings
Select [Create profile] to create a new network profile (0454, 0460).
･ If more than one profile already exists, you can press J to select a
profile from a list.
･ To edit an existing profile, highlight it and press 2.
Option Description
･ [Profile name]: Rename the profile. The default profile name
is the same as the network SSID.
[General] ･ [Password protection]: Select [On] to require that a
password be entered before the profile can be changed. To
change the password, highlight [On] and press 2.
･ Infrastructure mode: Adjust settings for connection to a

network via a router.
- [SSID]: Enter the network SSID.
- [Channel]: Selected automatically.
- [Authentication/encryption]: Choose [OPEN] or [WPA2-
PSK-AES].
- [Password]: Enter the network password.
･ Access-point mode: Adjust settings for direct wireless
[Wireless]
connection to the camera.
- [SSID]: Choose the camera SSID.
- [Channel]: Choose [Auto] or [Manual].
- [Authentication/encryption]: Choose [OPEN] or [WPA2-
PSK-AES].
- [Password]: If [WPA2-PSK-AES] is selected for
[Authentication/encryption], you can choose the camera
password.

406
Option Description
Adjust TCP/IP settings for infrastructure connections. An IP
address is required.
･ If [Enable] is selected for [Obtain automatically], the IP
address and sub-net mask for infrastructure mode
[TCP/IP]
connections will be acquired via a DHCP server or automatic
IP addressing.
･ Select [Disable] to enter the IP address ([Address]) and sub-
net mask ([Mask]) manually.
Options
Adjust upload settings.
❚Auto upload
❚
Select [On] to upload new photos as they are taken.
･ Upload begins only after the photo has been recorded to the
memory card. Be sure a memory card is inserted in the camera.
･ Videos and photos taken during video mode are not uploaded
automatically when recording is complete. They must instead be
uploaded from the playback display (0468).
❚Delete after upload

❚
Select [Yes] to delete photographs from the camera memory card
automatically once upload is complete.
･ Files marked for transfer before you selected [Yes] are not deleted.
･ Deletion may be suspended during some camera operations.
❚Upload file as
❚
When uploading RAW + JPEG images, choose whether to upload both
the RAW and JPEG files or only the JPEG copy.

407
･ The option chosen for [Upload file as] takes effect when [On] is
selected for [Auto upload].
❚Deselect all?
❚
Select [Yes] to remove transfer marking from all images. Upload of
images with an “uploading” icon will immediately be terminated.
MAC address
View the MAC address.
Wireless remote (ML-L7) options

Connect an optional ML-L7 Remote Control through Bluetooth. You can
also assign roles to the Fn1/Fn2 buttons on the ML-L7.
･ For the functions that can be used with the remote control and
connecting this camera and the remote control, see “ML-L7 Remote
Control” in “Other compatible accessories” (0559).
Wireless remote connection

Option Description
Start connecting a paired ML-L7. If the camera is connected to a
[Enable] smartphone or computer, connection to those devices will be
terminated.

408
Option Description
[Disable] Disconnect the ML-L7.
Save wireless remote controller

Pair the camera with an ML-L7 (0563).
Delete wireless remote controller

Delete a paired ML-L7.
Assign Fn1 button/Assign Fn2 button

Choose the role assigned to the Fn1 or Fn2 button on the ML-L7.
Option Description
[Same as camera K
Set the same role as the camera’s K button.
button]
[Same as camera G
Set the same role as the camera’s G button.
button]
[Same as camera i button] Set the same role as the camera’s i button.
[None] Pressing the button has no effect.
Conformity marking
View some of the information related to standards with which the
camera complies.

409
USB power delivery
Choose whether optional charging AC adapters or computers
connected via USB can be used to power the camera (USB power
delivery). USB power delivery allows the camera to be used while
limiting the drain on the battery.
Option Description
The camera draws power from connected devices while on.
Connected devices will also supply power when the camera is off
[Enable]
if Bluetooth upload is in progress or the memory card access
lamp is lit.
The camera does not draw power from connected devices at any
[Disable]
time.
･ Power will only be supplied to the camera when the battery is

inserted.
･ A USB power delivery icon appears in the shooting display when the
camera is powered by an external source.
･ For more information, see “Charging the battery” (065).

410
D Computer USB power delivery
･ Use the supplied USB cable or optional UC-E25 USB cable to connect the
camera to the computer. Choose a USB cable with a connector that
matches the USB connector on the computer.
･ If you use the supplied USB cable to supply power from a computer, the
camera battery will be consumed even while power is being supplied. If
you use the separately sold UC-E25 USB cable, the camera battery will not
be consumed (the camera battery may be consumed depending on your
computer model and specifications).
･ Depending on the model and product specifications, some computers
will not supply current to power the camera.
D “Power delivery” versus “charging”

The supply of power for camera operations is referred to as “power delivery”,
while the term “charging” is used when power is supplied only to charge the
camera battery. The conditions under which the power supplied by external
devices is used to power the camera or charge the battery are shown below.
Option selected for [USB power

CameraExternal power source used for
delivery]
On* Power delivery
[Enable]
Off Charging
On* —
[Disable]
Off Charging
* Includes instances in which the power switch is in the “OFF” position but
Bluetooth upload is in progress or the memory card access lamp is lit.

411
Energy saving (photo mode)
In photo mode, the shooting display will turn off to save power
approximately 15 seconds before the standby timer expires.
Option Description
[Enable] Enable energy saving. The display refresh rate may drop.
Disable energy saving. Note selecting [Disable] does not stop

[Disable] the shooting display dimming a few seconds before the standby
expires.
D Energy saving
･ Note that even when [Enable] is selected, energy saving will not function:
- if [No limit] is selected for Custom Setting c3 [Power off delay] >
[Standby timer] or if the delay selected is less than 30 seconds,
- in self-portrait mode,
- during zoom,
- while the camera is connected to another device via HDMI, or
- while the camera is connected to and exchanging data with a computer
or smartphone via USB.
･ Selecting [Disable] increases the drain on the battery.
Slot empty release lock

Choose whether the shutter can be released when no memory card is
inserted in the camera.
Option Description
[Release The shutter cannot be released when no memory
a
locked] card is inserted.

412
Option Description
The shutter can be released with no memory card
[Enable
b inserted. No pictures will be recorded; during
release]
playback, the camera displays [Demo].
Save/load menu settings

Save current camera menu settings to a memory card. You can also load
saved settings, allowing menu settings to be shared among cameras of
the same model.
･ The following settings are saved:
Settings that can be saved and loaded

[Playback display options]
PLAYBACK MENU [Picture review]
[Rotate tall]
[File naming]
[Choose image area]
[Image quality]
[Image size]
[RAW recording]
PHOTO SHOOTING MENU
[White balance]
[Set Picture Control] (Custom Picture Controls

are saved as [Auto])
[Color space]

413
[Active D-Lighting]
[Long exposure NR]
[High ISO NR]
[Vignette control]
[Diffraction compensation]
[Auto distortion control]
[Flicker reduction shooting]
[Metering]
PHOTO SHOOTING MENU
[Flash control]
[Flash mode]
[Flash compensation]
[Focus mode]
[AF-area mode]
[Vibration reduction] (the options available

vary with the lens)
[Auto bracketing]
[File naming]
[Frame size/frame rate]
[Video quality]
VIDEO RECORDING MENU
[Video file type]
[White balance]

414
[Set Picture Control] (Custom Picture Controls
are saved as [Auto])
[Active D-Lighting]
[High ISO NR]
[Vignette control]
[Diffraction compensation]
[Auto distortion control]
[Flicker reduction]
[Metering]
VIDEO RECORDING MENU [Focus mode]
[AF-area mode]
[Vibration reduction] (the options available

vary with the lens)
[Electronic VR]
[Microphone sensitivity]
[Attenuator]
[Frequency response]
[Wind noise reduction]
[Timecode] (excepting [Timecode origin])
CUSTOM SETTINGS MENU All items
[Save user settings]
SETUP MENU [Language]
[Time zone and date] (except [Date and time])

415
[REC lamp brightness]
[Information display]
[Non-CPU lens data]
[Save focus position]
[Image comment]
[Copyright information]
SETUP MENU
[Beep options]
[Touch controls]
[HDMI]
[USB power delivery]
[Energy saving (photo mode)]
[Slot empty release lock]
The current contents of “My Menu”

MY MENU
[Choose tab]
The current contents of the recent settings

RECENT SETTINGS menu (up to 20 items)
[Choose tab]
Save menu settings

Save settings to a memory card. If the card is full, an error will be
displayed and settings will not be saved. Saved settings can only be
used with other cameras of the same model.

416
Load menu settings
Load saved settings from a memory card. Note that [Load menu
settings] is available only when a memory card containing saved
settings is inserted.
D Saved settings
Settings are saved to files named “NCSET***”. “***” is an identifier that varies
from camera to camera. The camera will not be able to load settings if the file
name is changed.
Reset all settings

Reset all settings except [Language] and [Time zone and date] to their
default values. Copyright information and other user-generated entries
are also reset. Once reset, settings cannot be restored.
We recommend that you save settings using the [Save/load menu
settings] item in the setup menu before performing a reset.
Firmware version
View the current camera firmware version. If new firmware for the
camera is on a memory card, you can update the firmware.

417
A Updating the firmware
To update the camera firmware, you can use either a computer or smart
device.
･ When using a computer: You can confirm if there is a new firmware
version at the Nikon Download Center. For the update procedure, see the
firmware download website.
･ When using a smart device: If the camera and your smart device are
already paired using the SnapBridge app, the app will notify you when
there is new firmware for your camera. You can then transfer the firmware
to the memory card in the camera by using your smart device. For the
update procedure, see the SnapBridge app online help. The timing of the
notification may differ from the timing at which the update is released on
the Nikon Download Center.

418
N The retouch menu: Creating
retouched copies
To view the retouch menu, select the N tab in the camera menus.
The items in the retouch menu are used to trim or retouch existing
pictures.
･ The retouch menu is grayed out if a memory card is not inserted in
the camera or if a memory card does not contain pictures.
･ Retouched copies are saved to new files, separate from the original
pictures.
･ The retouch menu contains the following items:
Item 0 Item 0
7 [RAW processing] 423 a [Distortion control] 433
k [Trim] 426 e [Perspective control] 434
8 [Resize] 427 l [Monochrome] 435
i [D-Lighting] 431 o [Overlay pictures]* 436
j [Red-eye correction] 432 9 [Trim video] 443
Z [Straighten] 433
* Not displayed when [Retouch] is selected in the playback i menu.
N The retouch menu: Creating retouched copies

419
Creating retouched copies
1 Select an item in the retouch menu.
Press 1 or 3 to highlight an item, 2 to select.
2 Select a picture.
･ Highlight a picture using the multi selector.

button.
･ Press J to select the highlighted picture.
3 Select retouch options.

･ For more information, see the section for the selected item.
･ To exit without creating a retouched copy, press G. The retouch
menu will be displayed.

420
4 Create a retouched copy.
･ Press J to create a retouched copy.

･ Retouched copies are indicated by a p icon.

421
D Retouching the current picture
To create a retouched copy of the current image, press i and select
[Retouch].
D Retouch
･ The camera may not be able to display or retouch images that were taken
or retouched using other cameras or that have been retouched on a
computer.
･ If no actions are performed for a brief period, the display will turn off and
any unsaved changes will be lost. To increase the time the display remains
on, choose a longer menu display time using Custom Setting c3 [Power
off delay] > [Menus].
D Retouching copies
･ Most items can be applied to copies created using other retouch options,
although multiple edits may result in reduced image quality or faded
colors.
･ With the exception of [Trim video], each item can be applied only once.
･ Some items may be unavailable depending on the items used to create
the copy.
･ Items that cannot be applied to the current image are grayed out and
unavailable.
D Image quality
･ Copies created from RAW pictures are saved at an [Image quality] of
[JPEG fine].
･ Copies created from JPEG pictures are the same quality as the original.
･ In the case of dual-format pictures recorded in image-quality settings of
RAW + JPEG at the same time, only the RAW copy will be retouched.
D Image size
Except in the case of copies created with [RAW processing], [Trim], and
[Resize], copies are the same size as the original.

422
RAW processing: Converting RAW to JPEG
G button U N retouch menu
The process of converting RAW images to other formats such as JPEG is
referred to as “RAW processing”. JPEG copies of RAW pictures can be
created on the camera as described below.
1 Select [RAW processing] in the retouch menu.
Highlight [RAW processing] and press 2.
2 Choose how pictures are selected.
Option Description
Create JPEG copies of selected RAW images.
[Select picture(s)]
Multiple RAW images can be selected.
Create JPEG copies of all RAW pictures taken on

[Select date]
selected dates.
Create JPEG copies of all RAW pictures in a selected

[Select folder]
folder.

423
3 Select photographs.
If you chose [Select picture(s)]:
･ Highlight pictures using the multi selector.

button.
･ To select the highlighted picture, press the W (Q) button. Selected
pictures are marked by a $ icon. To deselect the current picture,
press the W (Q) button again; the $ icon will no longer be
displayed. All images will be processed using the same settings.
･ Press J to proceed once selection is complete.
If you chose [Select date]:
･ Highlight dates using the multi selector and press 2 to select (M)
or deselect (U).
･ All images taken on dates marked with a check (M) will be
processed using the same settings.
If you chose [Select folder]:
Highlight a folder and press J to select; all images in the selected
folder will be processed using the same settings.

424
4 Choose settings for the JPEG copies.
･ The settings in effect when the photograph was taken appear
below a preview.
･ To use the setting in effect when the photograph was taken, if
applicable, select [Original].
1 Image quality (0241) 6 High ISO NR (0259)

2 Image size (0241) 7 Color space (0258)
3 White balance (0244) 8 Vignette control (0260)
4 Exposure compensation 9 Active D-Lighting (0165)
(0134) 10 Diffraction compensation
5 Set Picture Control (0251) (0260)
･ To exit without copying the photographs, press the K button.

425
5 Copy the photographs.
･ Highlight [EXE] and press J to create JPEG copies of the selected

photographs.
･ If multiple photos are selected, a confirmation dialog will be
displayed after you highlight [EXE] and press J; highlight [Yes]
and press J to create JPEG copies of the selected photos.
･ To cancel the operation before all copies have been created, press
the G button; when a confirmation dialog is displayed, highlight
[Yes] and press J.
D RAW processing
･ RAW processing is available only with RAW images created with this
camera. RAW images created with other cameras, RAW images created
with NX Tether, or images in formats other than RAW cannot be selected.
･ [Exposure compensation] can only be set to values between −2 and +2
EV.
Trim
Create a cropped copy of the selected photograph. The photograph is
displayed with the selected crop shown in yellow; create a cropped copy
as described below.
To Description
Size the crop Press X or W (Q) to choose the crop size.

426
To Description
Change the crop Rotate the main command dial to choose the
aspect ratio aspect ratio.
Position the crop Use the multi selector to position the crop.
Save the crop Press J to save the current crop as a separate file.
D Cropped pictures
･ Depending on the size of the cropped copy, playback zoom may not be
available when cropped copies are displayed.
･ The crop size appears at upper left in the crop display. The size of the copy
varies with crop size and aspect ratio.
Resize
Create small copies of selected photographs.
Resizing multiple images

If you accessed the retouch menu via the G button, you can resize
multiple selected images.

427
1 Select [Resize] in the retouch menu.
Highlight [Resize] and press 2.
2 Choose a size.
･ Highlight [Choose size] and press 2.

･ Highlight the desired size (length in pixels) using 1 and 3 and
press J.

428
Option Description
Resize selected pictures. Multiple pictures can be
[Select picture(s)]
selected.
[Select date] Resize all pictures taken on selected dates.
[Select folder] Resize all pictures in a selected folder.

429
4 Choose pictures.
If you chose [Select picture(s)]:

button.
pictures are indicated by a 8 icon. To deselect the current picture,
press the W (Q) button again; the 8 will no longer be displayed.
The selected pictures will all be copied at the size selected in Step
2.
If you chose [Select date]:
･ Highlight dates using the multi selector and press 2 to select (M)
or deselect (U).
･ All pictures taken on dates marked with a check (M) will be copied
at the size selected in Step 2.
Highlight a folder and press J to select; all pictures in the selected
folder will be copied at the size selected in Step 2.

430
5 Save the resized copies.
･ A confirmation dialog will be displayed; highlight [Yes] and press

J to save the resized copies.
･ To cancel the operation before all copies have been created, press
the G button; when a confirmation dialog is displayed, highlight
[Yes] and press J.
D Resize
Depending on the copy size, playback zoom may not be available when
resized copies are displayed.
D-Lighting
D-Lighting brightens shadows. It is ideal for dark or backlit photographs.
Before After
The edit display shows before and after images.

431
･ Press 4 or 2 to choose the amount of correction performed. The
effect can be previewed in the edit display.
･ Press J to save the retouched copy.
Red-eye correction
Correct “red-eye” caused by light from the flash reflecting from the
retinas of portrait subjects.
･ Red-eye correction is available only with photographs taken using a
flash.
･ Red-eye that cannot be detected by the camera will not be corrected.
D Red-eye correction
･ Note the following:
- Red-eye correction may not always produce the expected results.
- In very rare circumstances, red-eye correction may be applied to
portions of the image that are not affected by red-eye.
･ Check the preview thoroughly before proceeding.

432
Straighten
Rotate pictures by up to ±5° in increments of approximately 0.25°.
･ The effect can be previewed in the edit display.

･ The greater the rotation, the more will be trimmed from the edges.
･ Press 4 or 2 to choose the amount of straightening performed.
Distortion control
Create copies with reduced peripheral distortion; this can reduce barrel
distortion in pictures taken with wide-angle lenses or pin-cushion
distortion in pictures taken with telephoto lenses. Select [Auto] to let
the camera correct distortion automatically and then make fine
adjustments using the multi selector. Select [Manual] to reduce
distortion manually.

･ Note that [Manual] must be used with copies created using the
[Auto] option and with photos taken using the [Auto distortion

433
control] option in the photo shooting menu. Manual distortion
control cannot be further applied to copies created using [Manual].
･ Press 4 to reduce pin-cushion distortion, 2 to reduce barrel
distortion.
D Distortion control
Note that greater amounts of distortion control result in more of the edges
being cropped out.
Perspective control
Create copies that reduce the effects of perspective in photos taken
looking up from the base of a tall object.

･ Note that greater amounts of perspective control result in more of
the edges being cropped out.
･ Use the multi selector (1, 3, 4, or 2) to adjust perspective.

434
Before After
Monochrome
Copy photographs in monochrome. [Monochrome] gives you a choice
of the following monochrome tints:
Option Description
[Black-and-white] Copy photographs in black-and-white.
[Sepia] Copy photographs in sepia.
[Cyanotype] Copy photographs in blue-and-white monochrome.
･ In the case of [Sepia] or [Cyanotype], color saturation can be

adjusted using the multi selector. Press 1 to increase, 3 to decrease.
The changes are reflected in the preview.

435
Overlay pictures
Combine existing photographs to create a single picture that is saved
separately from the originals. One RAW image can be overlaid on
another using additive blending ([Add]), or multiple images can be
combined using [Lighten] or [Darken].
Add
Overlay two RAW images to create a single new JPEG copy.
1 Select [Overlay pictures] in the retouch menu.
Highlight [Overlay pictures] and press 2.

436
2 Select [Add].
Highlight [Add] and press 2 to display edit options with [Picture 1]

highlighted.
3 Highlight the first image.
･ Press J to display a picture-selection dialog listing only RAW

images, where you can use the multi selector to highlight the first
photograph in the overlay.
button.

437
4 Select the first image.
Press J to select the highlighted photograph and return to the

preview display; the selected image will appear as [Picture 1].
5 Select the second image.
Press 2 and select [Picture 2], then select the second photo as
described in Steps 3 and 4.
6 Adjust gain.
･ The overlay of [Picture 1] and [Picture 2] can be previewed in the

“Preview” column. Highlight [Picture 1] or [Picture 2] and
optimize exposure for the overlay by pressing 1 or 3 to adjust
gain.
･ Choose from values between 0.1 and 2.0 in increments of 0.1.
･ The effects are relative to the default value of 1.0 (no gain). For
example, selecting 0.5 halves gain.

438
7 Select the “Preview” column.
･ Press 4 or 2 to place the cursor in the “Preview” column.

･ To proceed without previewing the overlay, highlight [Save] and
press J.
8 Preview the overlay.
･ To preview the overlay, highlight [Overlay] and press J.

･ To select new photos or adjust gain, press W (Q). You will be
returned to Step 6.
9 Save the overlay.
Press J while the preview is displayed to save the overlay and

display the resulting image.

439
D [Add]
･ Colors and brightness in the preview may differ from the final image.
･ Only RAW images created with this camera can be selected. Images
created with other cameras or in other formats cannot be selected.
･ The overlay is saved at an [Image quality] of [JPEG fine].
･ RAW pictures can be combined only if they were created with the same
options selected for:
- [Choose image area]
- [RAW recording]
･ The overlay has the same photo info (including date of recording,
metering, shutter speed, aperture, shooting mode, exposure
compensation, focal length, and image orientation) and values for white
balance and Picture Control as the photograph selected for [Picture 1].
Copyright information, however, is not copied to the new image. The
comment is similarly not copied; instead, the comment currently active on
the camera, if any, is appended.
Lighten and darken

The camera compares multiple selected pictures and selects only the
brightest or darkest pixels at each point in the image to create a single
new JPEG copy.

440
1 Select [Lighten] or [Darken].
After selecting [Overlay pictures] in the retouch menu, highlight
either [Lighten] or [Darken] and press 2.
･ [Lighten]: The camera compares the pixels in each picture and
uses only the brightest.
･ [Darken]: The camera compares the pixels in each picture and uses
only the darkest.
Option Description
[Select individual
Select pictures for the overlay one-by-one.
pictures]
[Select consecutive Select two pictures; the overlay will include the
pictures] two pictures and all images between them.
The overlay will include all pictures in the

[Select folder]
selected folder.

441
3 Select pictures.
If you chose [Select individual pictures]:
button.
pictures are marked by a $ icon. To deselect the current picture,
press the W (Q) button again; the $ icon will no longer be
displayed. The selected pictures will be combined using the option
selected in Step 1.
If you chose [Select consecutive pictures]:
･ All pictures in a range chosen using the multi selector will be
combined using the option selected in Step 1.
- Use W (Q) to select the first and last pictures in the desired
range.
- The first and last pictures are indicated by % icons and the
pictures between them by $ icons.
- You can alter your selection by using the multi selector to
highlight different pictures to serve as the first or last frame. Press
the A (g) button to switch the cursor between the start and
end points.
button.
Highlight the desired folder and press J to overlay all pictures in the
folder using the option selected in Step 1.

442
4 Save the overlay.
･ A confirmation dialog will be displayed; highlight [Yes] and press
J to save the overlay and display the resulting picture.
･ To interrupt the process and display a confirmation dialog before
the operation is complete, press the G button; to save the
current overlay “as is” without adding the remaining pictures,
highlight [Save and exit] and press J. To exit without creating an
overlay, highlight [Discard and exit] and press J.
D [Lighten]/[Darken]
･ The overlay will include only pictures created with this camera. Pictures
created with other cameras cannot be selected.
･ The overlay will include only pictures created with the same options
selected for:
- [Choose image area]
- [Image size]
･ The image quality setting for the completed overlay is that of the highest
quality picture it contains.
･ Overlays that include RAW pictures will be saved at an image quality of
[JPEG fine].
･ The size of overlays that include both RAW and JPEG images is
determined by the JPEG picture.
Trim video
Create a copy from which unwanted footage has been removed (0201).

443
O My Menu/m Recent settings
To view [MY MENU], select the O tab in the camera menus.
O My Menu: Creating a custom menu

My Menu can be used to create and edit a customized list of up to 20
items from the playback, photo shooting, video recording, Custom
Settings, setup, and retouch menus. Options can be added, deleted, and
reordered as described below.
❚Adding items to My Menu

❚
1 Select [Add items] in [O MY MENU].
Highlight [Add items] and press 2.

444
2 Select a menu.
Highlight the name of the menu containing the item you wish to
add and press 2.
3 Select an item.
Highlight the desired menu item and press J.
4 Position the new item.
Press 1 or 3 to position the new item and press J to add it to My

Menu.

445
5 Add more items.
･ The items currently displayed in My Menu are indicated by a check

mark (L).
･ Items indicated by a V icon cannot be selected.
･ Repeat Steps 1–4 to select additional items.
❚Removing items from My Menu

❚
1 Select [Remove items] in [O MY MENU].
Highlight [Remove items] and press 2.
2 Select items.
･ Highlight items and press 2 to select (M) or deselect.

･ Continue until all the items you wish to remove are selected (L).

446
3 Remove the selected items.
Press J; a confirmation dialog will be displayed. Press J again to

remove the selected items.
D Removing items while in My Menu

Items can also be removed by highlighting them in [O MY MENU] and
pressing the O button; a confirmation dialog will be displayed. Press the O
button again to remove the selected item.
❚Reordering items in My Menu

❚
1 Select [Rank items] in [O MY MENU].
Highlight [Rank items] and press 2.
2 Select an item.
Highlight the item you wish to move and press J.

447
3 Position the item.
･ Press 1 or 3 to move the item up or down in My Menu and press

J.
･ Repeat Steps 2–3 to reposition additional items.
4 Exit to [O MY MENU].
Press the G button to return to [O MY MENU].

448
❚Displaying [RECENT SETTINGS]
❚
1 Select [Choose tab] in [O MY MENU].
Highlight [Choose tab] and press 2.
2 Select [m RECENT SETTINGS].
･ Highlight [m RECENT SETTINGS] in the [Choose tab] menu and

press J.
･ The name of the menu will change from [MY MENU] to [RECENT
SETTINGS].

449
m Recent settings: Accessing recently-used
settings
❚How items are added to [RECENT SETTINGS]

❚
Menu items are added to the top of the [RECENT SETTINGS] menu as
they are used. The twenty most recently-used settings are listed.
D Removing items from the recent settings menu

To remove an item from the [RECENT SETTINGS] menu, highlight it and
press the O button; a confirmation dialog will be displayed. Press O button
again to remove the selected item.
D Displaying My Menu
Selecting [Choose tab] in the [RECENT SETTINGS] menu displays the items
shown in Step 2 of “Displaying [RECENT SETTINGS]” (0449). Highlight [O
MY MENU] and press J to view My Menu.

450
Establishing wireless
connections to computers or
smart devices
Network options
The camera can:
･ connect to computers via Wi-Fi (0452) or
･ establish wireless connections to smartphones or tablets (smart

devices; 0474)
Network options
451
Connecting to computers via Wi-Fi
What Wi-Fi can do for you

Connect using the camera’s built-in Wi-Fi to upload selected pictures to
a computer.
The Wireless Transmitter Utility

Before you will be able to upload images via Wi-Fi, you will need to pair
the camera with the computer using Nikon’s Wireless Transmitter Utility
software.
･ Once the devices are paired, you will be able to connect to the
computer from the camera.
･ The Wireless Transmitter Utility is available for download from the
Nikon Download Center. Be sure to download the latest version after
reading the release notes and system requirements.
Infrastructure and access-point modes

Either of the following two methods can be used to establish wireless
connections between the camera and a computer.
❚Direct wireless connection (access-point mode)

❚
The camera and computer connect via direct wireless link. The camera
acts as a wireless LAN access point, letting you connect when working

452
outdoors and in other situations in which the computer is not already
connected to a wireless network and eliminating the need for
complicated adjustments to settings. The computer cannot connect to
the Internet while connected to the camera.
･ To create a new host profile, select [Direct connection to computer]

in the connection wizard.
❚Infrastructure mode
❚
The camera connects to a computer on an existing network (including
home networks) via a wireless router. The computer can still connect to
the Internet while connected to the camera.
･ To create a new network profile, select [Search for Wi-Fi network] in

the connection wizard.

453
D Infrastructure mode
･ This guide assumes you are connecting via an existing wireless network.
･ Connection to computers beyond the local area network is not supported.
You can connect only to computers on the same network.
Connecting in access-point mode

1 Select [Connect to computer] in the camera setup menu, then
highlight [Network settings] and press 2.
2 Highlight [Create profile] and press J.

454
3 Highlight [Direct connection to computer] and press J.
The camera SSID and encryption key will be displayed.

455
4 Establish a connection to the camera.
Windows:
･ Click the wireless LAN icon in the taskbar.

･ Select the SSID displayed by the camera in Step 3.
･ When prompted to enter the network security key, enter the
encryption key displayed by the camera in Step 3. The computer
will initiate a connection to the camera.
macOS:
･ Click the wireless LAN icon in the menu bar.

･ Select the SSID displayed by the camera in Step 3.

456
･ When prompted to enter the network security key, enter the
encryption key displayed by the camera in Step 3. The computer
will initiate a connection to the camera.
5 Start pairing.
When prompted, launch the Wireless Transmitter Utility on the

computer.
6 Select the camera in the Wireless Transmitter Utility.
Select the name displayed by the camera in Step 5 and click [Next].

457
7 In the Wireless Transmitter Utility, enter the authentication code
displayed by the camera.
･ The camera will display an authentication code.

･ Enter the authentication code in the dialog displayed by the
Wireless Transmitter Utility and click [Next].

458
8 Complete the pairing process.
･ When the camera displays a message stating that pairing is

complete, press J.
･ In the Wireless Transmitter Utility, click [Next]; you will be
prompted to choose a destination folder. For more information,
see online help for the Wireless Transmitter Utility.
･ A wireless connection will be established between the camera and

computer when pairing is complete.

459
9 Check the connection.
When a connection is established, the network SSID will be

displayed in green in the camera [Connect to computer] menu.
･ If the camera SSID is not displayed in green, connect to the camera
via the wireless network list on your computer.
A wireless connection has now been established between the
camera and the computer.
Pictures taken with the camera can be uploaded to the computer as
described in “Uploading pictures” (0468).
Connecting in infrastructure mode

1 Select [Connect to computer] in the camera setup menu, then
highlight [Network settings] and press 2.
2 Highlight [Create profile] and press J.

460
3 Highlight [Search for Wi-Fi network] and press J.
The camera will search for networks currently active in the vicinity
and list them by name (SSID).
D [Easy Connect]
･ To connect without entering an SSID or encryption key, press X in Step
3. Next, press J and choose from the following options:
Option Description
[Push- For routers that support push-button WPS. Press the
button WPS button on the router and then press the camera J
WPS] button to connect.
The camera will display a PIN. Using a computer, enter

[PIN-entry
the PIN on the router. For more information, see the
WPS]
documentation provided with the router.
･ After connecting, proceed to Step 6.

461
4 Choose a network.
･ Highlight a network SSID and press J.

･ Encrypted networks are indicated by a h icon. If the selected
network is encrypted (h), you will be prompted to enter the
encryption key. If the network is not encrypted, proceed to Step 6.
･ If the desired network is not displayed, press X to search again.
D Hidden SSIDs
Networks with hidden SSIDs are indicated by blank entries in the
network list.
･ To connect to a network with a hidden SSID, highlight a blank entry

and press J. Next, press J; the camera will prompt you to provide an
SSID.
･ Enter the network name and press X. Press X again; the camera will
now prompt you to enter the encryption key.

462
5 Enter the encryption key.
･ Press J and enter the encryption key for the wireless router.
･ For more information, see the documentation for the wireless
router.
･ Press X when entry is complete.

･ Press X again to initiate the connection. A message will be
displayed for a few seconds when the connection is established.

463
6 Obtain or select an IP address.
･ Highlight one of the following options and press J.
Option Description
Select this option if the network is configured to
[Obtain supply the IP address automatically. A
automatically] “configuration complete” message will be
displayed once an IP address has been assigned.
Enter the IP address and sub-net mask manually.

･ Rotate the main command dial to highlight
segments.
･ Press 4 or 2 to change the highlighted segment
and press J to save changes.
[Enter
･ Next, press X; a “configuration complete”
manually]
message will be displayed. Press X again to
display the sub-net mask.
･ Press 1 or 3 to edit the sub-net mask and press
J; a “configuration complete” message will be
displayed.
･ Press J to proceed when the “configuration complete” message is

displayed.

464
7 Start pairing.
When prompted, launch the Wireless Transmitter Utility on the

computer.
8 Select the camera in the Wireless Transmitter Utility.
Select the name displayed by the camera in Step 7 and click [Next].

465
9 In the Wireless Transmitter Utility, enter the authentication code
displayed by the camera.
･ The camera will display an authentication code.

･ Enter the authentication code in the dialog displayed by the
Wireless Transmitter Utility and click [Next].

466
10 Complete the pairing process.
･ When the camera displays a message stating that pairing is

complete, press J.
･ In the Wireless Transmitter Utility, click [Next]; you will be
prompted to choose a destination folder. For more information,
see online help for the Wireless Transmitter Utility.
･ A wireless connection will be established between the camera and

computer when pairing is complete.

467
11 Check the connection.
When a connection is established, the network SSID will be

displayed in green in the camera [Connect to computer] menu.
･ If the camera SSID is not displayed in green, connect to the camera
via the wireless network list on your computer.
A wireless connection has now been established between the
camera and the computer.
Pictures taken with the camera can be uploaded to the computer as
described in “Uploading pictures” (0468).
Uploading pictures
Pictures can be selected for upload during playback. They can also be
uploaded automatically as they are taken.
D Destination folders
By default, images are uploaded to the following folders:
･ Windows: \Users\(user name)\Pictures\Wireless Transmitter Utility
･ macOS: /Users/(user name)/Pictures/Wireless Transmitter Utility
The destination folder can be selected using the Wireless Transmitter Utility.
For more information, see online help for the Wireless Transmitter Utility.
D Access point mode

Computers cannot access the Internet while connected to the camera in
access point mode. To access the Internet, terminate the connection to the
camera and then reconnect to a network with Internet access.

468
❚Selecting pictures for upload
❚
1 Press the K button on the camera and select full-frame or
thumbnail playback.
2 Select a picture and press the i button.
3 Highlight [Select for upload to computer] and press J.
･ A white “upload” icon will appear on the picture. If the camera is

currently connected to a network, upload will begin immediately
and the icon will turn green.
･ Otherwise, upload will begin when a connection is established.
･ Repeat Steps 2–3 to upload additional pictures.
D Removing upload marking

･ Repeat Steps 2–3 to remove transfer marking from selected images.
･ To remove transfer marking from all pictures, select [Connect to
computer] > [Options] > [Deselect all?] in the setup menu.

469
❚Uploading photos as they are taken
❚
To upload new photos as they are taken, select [On] for [Connect to
computer] > [Options] > [Auto upload] in the setup menu.
･ Upload begins only after the photo has been recorded to the
memory card. Be sure a memory card is inserted in the camera.
･ Videos and photos taken during video mode are not uploaded
automatically when recording is complete. They must instead be
uploaded from the playback display.
❚The transfer icon

❚
Upload status is indicated by the transfer icon.
W (white): Send
The picture has been selected for automatic upload but upload has not
yet begun.
X (green): Sending
Upload in progress.
Y (blue): Sent
Upload complete.

470
❚The status display
❚
The [Connect to computer] display shows the following:
1 Status: The status of the 3 Pictures/time remaining: The

connection to the host. The number of pictures remaining
host name is displayed in green and the time needed to send
when a connection is them. The time remaining is an
established. estimate only.
While files are being
transferred, the status display
shows “Now sending” preceded
by the name of the file being
sent. Errors are also displayed
here.
2 Signal strength: Wireless
signal strength.
D Loss of signal
Wireless transmission may be interrupted if the signal is lost. Upload of
pictures with “send” marking can be resumed by turning the camera off and
then on again once the signal has been re-established.

471
Disconnecting and reconnecting
❚Disconnecting
❚
You can end the connection by:
･ turning the camera off,
･ selecting [Disable] for [Connect to computer] > [Wi-Fi connection]
in the setup menu,
･ selecting [Enable] for [Airplane mode] in the setup menu,
･ selecting [Wi-Fi connection] > [Close Wi-Fi connection] in the
photo-mode i menu, or
･ connecting to a smart device via Wi-Fi or Bluetooth.
D Access-point mode
An error will occur if the computer’s wireless connection is disabled before
the camera’s. Disable camera Wi-Fi first.
❚Reconnecting
❚
To reconnect to an existing network:
･ select [Enable] for [Connect to computer] > [Wi-Fi connection] in
the setup menu, or
･ select [Wi-Fi connection] > [Establish Wi-Fi connection with
computer] in the photo-mode i menu.

472
D Access-point mode
Enable camera Wi-Fi before connecting.
D Multiple network profiles

If the camera has profiles for more than one network, it will reconnect to the
last network used. Other networks can be selected using the [Connect to
computer] > [Network settings] option in the setup menu.

473
Connecting to smart devices
The SnapBridge app

Use the SnapBridge app for wireless connections between the camera
and your smartphone or tablet (“smart device”).
･ SnapBridge apps can be downloaded from the Apple App Store® or

on Google Play™.
･ Visit the Nikon website for the latest SnapBridge news.

･ Carefully read any license agreements or the like displayed when
SnapBridge is launched and only proceed if you are willing to accept
them.
What SnapBridge can do for you

The tasks that can be performed using the SnapBridge app are outlined
below. For details, see the SnapBridge app online help:
https://nikonimglib.com/snbr/onlinehelp/en/index.html
❚Downloading pictures from the camera

❚
Download existing pictures to your smart device. Pictures can be
uploaded as they are taken.

474
❚Remote photography
❚
Control the camera and take pictures from the smart device.
Wireless connections
Use the SnapBridge app for wireless connections between the camera
and your smart device. You can connect via either Bluetooth (0475) or
Wi-Fi (0478). Connecting using Bluetooth allows pictures to be
uploaded automatically as they are taken.
Connecting via Bluetooth (pairing)

Before connecting via Bluetooth for the first time, you will need to pair
the camera and smart device.
D Before pairing
･ Enable Bluetooth on the smart device. For details, see the documentation
provided with the device.
･ Ensure that the batteries in the camera and smart device are fully charged
to prevent the devices turning off unexpectedly.
･ Check that there is space available on the camera memory card.
❚Pairing
❚
Pair the camera and smart device as described below.
･ Some operations are performed using the camera, others on the
smart device.
･ Additional instructions are available via SnapBridge online help.

475
1 Camera: Select [Connect to smart device] > [Pairing (Bluetooth)]
in the setup menu, then highlight [Start pairing] and press J.
The camera name will be displayed in the monitor.
2 Smart device: Launch the SnapBridge app and tap [Connect to

camera] in the tab.
･ If this is the first time you have launched the app, you should
instead tap [Connect to camera] in the welcome display.
3 Smart device: Follow the on-screen instructions.

･ When prompted, tap the category for your camera and then tap
the “pairing” option when prompted to choose the connection
type.
･ Tap the camera name when prompted.

476
4 Camera/smart device: After confirming that the camera and
smart device display the same authentication code, follow the
on-screen instructions on both devices to complete pairing.
･ Tap the pairing button on the smart device and press the J button
on the camera.
･ The camera and smart device will each display a message when
pairing is complete. The camera will then automatically exit to the
menus.
The camera and smart device are now paired.

For information on using the SnapBridge app, see online help.

477
D Pairing error
If you wait too long between pressing the button on the camera and tapping
the button on the smart device in Step 4, the device will display an error
message and pairing will fail.
･ If you are using an Android device, tap [OK] and return to Step 1.
･ If you are using an iOS device, dismiss the SnapBridge app and check that
it is not running in the background, then request iOS to “forget” the
camera before returning to Step 1. The request to “forget” the camera is
made via the iOS “Settings” app.
D Disabling Bluetooth
To disable Bluetooth, select [Disable] for [Connect to smart device] >
[Pairing (Bluetooth)] > [Bluetooth connection] in the camera setup menu.
❚Connecting to a previously-paired smart device

❚
Once the smart device has been paired with the camera, you will be able
to connect simply by enabling Bluetooth on both the smart device and
camera and launching the SnapBridge app.
Connecting via Wi-Fi (Wi-Fi mode)

In Wi-Fi mode, the camera connects directly to the smart device via Wi-
Fi, no Bluetooth pairing required.

478
D Before connecting (Wi-Fi mode)
･ Enable Wi-Fi on the smart device. For details, see the documentation
provided with the device.
･ Ensure that the batteries in the camera and smart device are fully charged
to prevent the devices turning off unexpectedly.
･ Check that there is space available on the camera memory card.
❚Connecting
❚
Follow the steps below to establish a connection between the camera
and smart device in Wi-Fi mode.
･ Some operations are performed using the camera, others on the
smart device.
･ Additional instructions are available via SnapBridge online help.
1 Smart device: Launch the SnapBridge app, open the tab, tap
, and select [Wi-Fi mode].
･ If this is the first time you have launched the app, you should
instead tap [Connect to camera] in the welcome display. When
prompted, tap the category for your camera and then tap the “Wi-
Fi” option when prompted to choose the connection type.
2 Camera/smart device: Turn the camera on when prompted.

Do not use any of the controls in the app at this point.

479
3 Camera: Select [Connect to smart device] > [Wi-Fi connection] in
the setup menu, then highlight [Establish Wi-Fi connection] and
press J.
The camera SSID and password will be displayed.
D Enabling Wi-Fi
You can also enable Wi-Fi by selecting [Wi-Fi connection] > [Establish
Wi-Fi conn. with smart device] in the i menu for shooting mode.

480
4 Smart device: Follow the on-screen instructions to establish a
Wi-Fi connection.
･ On iOS devices, the “Settings” app will launch. Tap [< Settings] to
open [Settings], then scroll up and tap [Wi-Fi] (which you’ll find
near the top of the settings list) to display Wi-Fi settings.
･ In the Wi-Fi settings display, select the camera SSID and enter the
password displayed by the camera in Step 3.
5 Smart device: After adjusting device settings as described in

Step 4, return to the SnapBridge app.
･ After establishing a Wi-Fi connection to the camera, the smart
device will display Wi-Fi mode options.
･ The camera will display a message stating that the connection is
complete.
The camera and smart device are now connected via Wi-Fi.
For information on using the SnapBridge app, see online help.

481
D Terminating Wi-Fi mode
To end the Wi-Fi connection, tap in the SnapBridge tab. When the icon
changes to , tap and select [Exit Wi-Fi mode.].

482
Troubleshooting
Solutions to some common issues are listed below.
･ Troubleshooting information for the SnapBridge app can be found in
the app’s online help, which can be viewed at:
https://nikonimglib.com/snbr/onlinehelp/en/index.html
･ For information on the Wireless Transmitter Utility, see the utility’s
online help.
Problem Solution
Connection settings require adjustment. Check
The camera displays a
settings for the host computer or wireless router
TCP/IP error.
and adjust camera settings appropriately (0406).
The camera displays a The memory card is inserted incorrectly or not at all.
“no memory card” Confirm that the memory card is correctly inserted
error. (062).
Upload is interrupted Upload will resume if the camera is turned off and
and fails to resume. then on again (0468).
If [Auto] is selected for [Channel] when you are

connecting to a smart device, choose [Manual] and
The connection is select the channel manually (0404).
unreliable. If the camera is connected to a computer in
infrastructure mode, check that the router is set to a
channel between 1 and 8 (0406).
Troubleshooting
483
Cabled connections to
computers and HDMI devices
Connecting to computers via USB
Connect the camera using the supplied USB cable. You can then use
Nikon NX Studio software to copy pictures to the computer for viewing
and editing. For information on establishing wireless connections to
computers, see “Connecting to computers via Wi-Fi” (0452) in
“Establishing wireless connections to computers or smart devices”.
Installing NX Studio
You will need an Internet connection when installing NX Studio. Visit the
Nikon website for system requirements and other information.
･ Download the latest NX Studio installer from the website below and
follow the on-screen instructions to complete installation.
･ Note that you may be unable to download pictures from the camera
using earlier versions of NX Studio.
Copying pictures to a computer using NX

Studio
See online help for detailed instructions.

484
1 Connect the camera to the computer.
After turning the camera off and ensuring that a memory card is
inserted, connect the supplied USB cable as shown.
2 Turn the camera on.

･ The Nikon Transfer 2 component of NX Studio will start. Nikon
Transfer 2 image transfer software is installed with NX Studio.
･ If a message is displayed prompting you to choose a program,
select Nikon Transfer 2.
･ If Nikon Transfer 2 does not start automatically, launch NX Studio
and click the “Import” icon.
3 Click [Start Transfer].
Pictures on the memory card will be copied to the computer.

485
4 Turn the camera off.
Disconnect the USB cable when transfer is complete.

486
D Windows 10 and Windows 8.1
Windows 10 and Windows 8.1 may display an AutoPlay prompt when the
camera is connected.
Click the dialog and then click [Nikon Transfer 2] to select Nikon Transfer 2.
D macOS
If Nikon Transfer 2 does not start automatically, confirm that the camera is
connected and then launch Image Capture (an application that comes with
macOS) and select Nikon Transfer 2 as the application that opens when the
camera is detected.
D Transferring videos
Do not attempt to transfer videos from the memory card while it is inserted
in a camera of a different make or model. Doing so could result in the videos
being deleted without being transferred.
D Connecting to computers
･ Do not turn the camera off or disconnect the USB cable while transfer is in
progress.
･ Do not use force or attempt to insert the connectors at an angle. Be sure
also to keep the connectors straight when disconnecting the cable.

487
･ Always turn the camera off before connecting or disconnecting a cable.
･ To ensure that data transfer is not interrupted, be sure the camera battery
is fully charged.
D USB hubs
Connect the camera directly to the computer; do not connect the cable via a
USB hub or keyboard. Connect the camera to a pre-installed USB port.
A Using a card reader

Pictures can also be copied from a memory card inserted in a third-party card
reader. You should however check that the card is compatible with the card
reader.

488
Connecting to HDMI devices
The camera can be connected to TVs, recorders, and other devices
featuring HDMI connectors. Use a third-party HDMI cable (Type D).
These items must be purchased separately. Always turn the camera off
before connecting or disconnecting an HDMI cable.
1 HDMI connector for connection 2 HDMI connector for connection

to camera to external device*
* Choose a cable with a connector that matches the connector on the

HDMI device.
TVs
･ After tuning the TV to the HDMI input channel, turn the camera on
and press the K button to view pictures on the television screen.
･ Audio playback volume can be adjusted using the controls on the TV.
Camera controls cannot be used.
･ If the camera is paired with a smart device running the SnapBridge
app, the device can be used to control playback remotely while the
camera is connected to a TV. See the SnapBridge app online help for
details.
Recorders
The camera can record video directly to connected HDMI recorders. Use
the [HDMI] item in the setup menu to adjust settings for HDMI output.

489
Some recorders will start and stop recording in response to camera
controls.
❚Output resolution
❚
Choose the format for images output to the HDMI device. If [Auto] is
selected, the camera will automatically choose the appropriate format.
❚Advanced
❚
Adjust settings for connection to the HDMI device.
Option Description
The RGB video signal input range varies with the HDMI device.
[Auto], which matches the output range to the HDMI device, is
recommended in most situations. If the camera is unable to
determine the correct RGB video signal output range for the
HDMI device, you can choose from the following options:
[Output
･ [Limited range]: For devices with an RGB video signal input
range]
range of 16 to 235. Choose this option if you notice a loss of
detail in shadows.
･ [Full range]: For devices with an RGB video signal input
range of 0 to 255. Choose this option if you notice that
shadows are “washed out” or too bright.

490
Option Description
Choosing [On] allows camera controls to be used to start and
stop recording when the camera is connected via HDMI to a
third-party recorder that supports the Atomos Open Protocol.
･ External recording control is available with Atomos
SHOGUN, NINJA, and SUMO-series Monitor recorders. For
more information on device features and operation, contact
the manufacturer or refer to the documentation provided
with the recorder.
･ The camera display will turn off automatically when the
time selected for Custom Setting c3 [Power off delay] >
[Standby timer] expires, ending HDMI output. When
[External
recording videos to an external device, select [Standby
recording
timer] and choose [No limit] or a time longer than the
control]
anticipated recording time.
･ An icon will be displayed in the camera monitor when [On]
is selected: A is displayed during standby, B during
video recording. During recording, check the recorder and
recorder display to ensure that footage is being saved to the
device.
･ If [On] is selected and a memory card is not inserted in the
camera, the REC lamp will not light up during video
recording on an external recorder.
･ Note that selecting [On] may disrupt the footage output to
the device.

491
D No HDMI output
If the video frame size and rate is set to 1920×1080 120p, 1920×1080 100p, or
1920×1080 slow-motion, HDMI output is not available.
D Zoom
If you zoom in on the display during video recording, the video being
recorded will be displayed at 1:1 (100%) on HDMI devices. During video
recording standby, if you set the frame size to 3840 × 2160 and zoom in on
the display, the display on the HDMI devices will be at a frame size of 1920 ×
1080.

492
On-camera flash photography
“On-camera” versus “remote”
You can take pictures using an optional flash unit mounted on the
camera accessory shoe or one or more remote flash units.
･ When using a flash, select [Off] for [Silent photography] in the
photo shooting menu.
Camera-mounted flash units

Take pictures using a flash unit mounted on the camera. See the
following pages for more information.
Remote flash photography

Take pictures with one or more remote flash units using wireless flash
control (Advanced Wireless Lighting, or AWL). For more information, see
“Remote flash photography” (0505).
“On-camera” versus “remote”

493
Using an on-camera flash
1 Mount a flash unit on the camera accessory shoe.
See the documentation provided with the unit for details.
2 Turn on the camera and flash unit.

The flash will begin charging; the flash-ready indicator (c) will
appear in the shooting display when charging is complete.
3 Choose the flash control mode (0497) and flash mode (0498).
4 Adjust shutter speed and aperture.
5 Take pictures.

494
D Shutter speed
Shutter speed can be set as follows when an optional flash unit is used:
Mode Shutter speed

b Set automatically by camera (1/200 s–1/60 s)
P, A Set automatically by camera (1/200 s–1/60 s)*
S 1/200 s–30 s
M 1/200 s–30 s, Bulb, Time
* Shutter speed may be set as slow as 30 s if slow sync, rear-curtain sync, or

slow sync with red-eye reduction is selected for flash mode.
D Third-party flash units

The camera cannot be used with flash units that would apply voltages over
250 V to the camera’s X contacts or short-circuit contacts on the accessory
shoe. Use of such flash units could not only interfere with normal operation
of the camera but also damage the flash sync circuits of the camera and/or
flash.
D i-TTL flash control

When an optional flash unit that supports the Nikon Creative Lighting
System is attached and set to TTL, the camera uses monitor pre-flashes for
balanced or standard “i-TTL fill-flash” flash control. i-TTL flash control is not
available with flash units that do not support the Nikon Creative Lighting
System. The camera supports the following types of i-TTL flash control:
Flash control Description

The camera uses “i-TTL balanced fill-flash” flash control for a
i-TTL natural balance between the main subject and ambient
balanced fill- background lighting. After the shutter-release button is
flash pressed and immediately before the main flash, the flash
unit emits a series of monitor pre-flashes which the camera

495
Flash control Description
i-TTL
uses to optimize flash output for a balance between the
balanced fill-
main subject and ambient background lighting.
flash
Flash output is adjusted to bring lighting in the frame to a

standard level; the brightness of the background is not
Standard i-
taken into account. Recommended for shots in which the
TTL fill-flash
main subject is emphasized at the expense of background
details, or when exposure compensation is used.
･ Standard i-TTL fill-flash is activated automatically when [Spot metering]

is selected.

496
Flash control mode
When a flash unit (an SB-500, SB-400, or SB-300) is mounted on the
camera, the flash control mode, flash level, and other flash settings can
be adjusted using the [Flash control] > [Flash control mode] item in
the photo shooting menu.
･ Settings for flash units other than the SB-500, SB-400, and SB-300 can
only be adjusted using flash unit controls.
Option Description
･ Flash output is adjusted automatically in response to shooting
conditions.
[TTL]
･ Flash compensation can be adjusted using [Flash
compensation] in the photo shooting menu.
･ Choose the flash level manually.

[Manual]
･ Flash output is selected using [Manual output amount].
Flash control mode

497
Flash modes
Use the [Flash mode] item in the photo shooting menu to choose the
effect produced by the flash. The options available vary with the
shooting mode.
Available
Option Description
in
This mode is recommended in most
[Fill flash] situations. In modes P and A, shutter
b, P, S, A,
I (front-curtain speed will automatically be set to values
M
sync) between 1/200 s (or 1/4000 s with auto FP
high-speed sync) and 1/60 s.
Use for portraits. The flash unit performs a

red-eye reduction flash before the flash
fires, reducing “red-eye”.
･ A flash unit with red-eye reduction is
required. If you use a flash unit that
does not support red-eye reduction, the
[Red-eye J icon in the shooting display will b, P, S, A,
J
reduction] flash. M
･ The desired results may not be achieved
if the subject or camera moves before
the shutter is released (this setting is
not recommended with moving
subjects or in other situations requiring
a quick shutter response).
Flash modes
498
Available
Option Description
in
As for “fill flash”, except that shutter speed
slows automatically to capture
background lighting at night or under low
[Slow sync] light.
L P, A
(Slow sync) ･ Note that photos may be prone to
blurring due to camera shake at slow
shutter speeds.
･ Use of a tripod is recommended.
Use to include background lighting in

portraits. Red-eye reduction is combined
with slow shutter speeds to capture
background lighting at night or under low
[Slow sync + light.
red-eye] ･ A flash unit with red-eye reduction is
(red-eye required. If you use a flash unit that
K P, A
reduction does not support red-eye reduction, the
with slow K icon in the shooting display will
sync) flash.
･ Note that photos may be prone to
shutter speeds.
The flash fires just before the shutter

closes, creating the effect of a stream of
light behind moving light sources.
[Rear- ･ Selecting P or A after choosing this
M curtain option sets the flash mode to slow sync. P, S, A, M
sync] ･ Note that photos may be prone to
shutter speeds.
Flash modes
499
Available
Option Description
in
b, P, S, A,
s [Flash off] The flash does not fire.
M
D Studio strobe lighting

Rear-curtain sync cannot be used with studio flash systems, as the correct
synchronization cannot be obtained.
Flash modes
500
Flash compensation
Flash compensation is used to deliberately alter flash output, for
example in order to change the brightness of the subject relative to the
background. Via the [Flash compensation] item in the photo shooting
menu, flash output can be increased to make the main subject appear
brighter, reduced to prevent glare, or otherwise fine-tuned to produce
the desired result.
･ Choose from values of from −3 to +1 in steps of 1/3.

･ At values other than ±0.0, a Y icon will appear in the shooting
display.
･ Normal flash output can be restored by setting flash compensation to
±0.0. Flash compensation is not reset when the camera is turned off.
Flash compensation
501
FV lock
This feature is used to lock flash output for CLS-compatible flash units,
letting you take multiple photos or recompose shots without changing
the flash level. Your subject need not be in the center of the frame,
giving you more freedom when composing shots.
･ Flash output is adjusted automatically for any changes in ISO
sensitivity and aperture.
･ FV lock is not available in b mode.
1 Assign [FV lock] to a control using Custom Setting f2 [Custom

controls (shooting)].
2 Mount a CLS-compatible flash unit on the camera accessory

shoe.
3 Turn the flash unit on and choose a flash control mode of TTL or
monitor pre-flash qA or A.
･ If you are using an SB-500, SB-400, or SB-300 mounted on the
camera accessory shoe, choose [TTL] for [Flash control] > [Flash
control mode] in the photo shooting menu.
･ For information on other flash units, see the documentation
provided with the unit.
FV lock
502
4 Focus.
Position the subject in the center of the frame and press the shutter-
release button halfway to focus.
5 Lock flash level.

･ After confirming that the flash-ready indicator (c) appears in the
shooting display, press the [FV lock] control; the flash unit will
emit a monitor pre-flash to determine the appropriate flash level.
･ Flash output will lock and an FV lock icon (r) will appear in the
shooting display.
6 Recompose the shot.
FV lock
503
7 Press the shutter-release button the rest of the way down to
shoot.
If desired, additional pictures can be taken without releasing FV lock.
Repeat Steps 6 to 7 to take additional shots.
8 Release FV lock.
Press the [FV lock] control to release FV lock and confirm that the FV
lock icon (r) is no longer displayed in the shooting display.
FV lock
504
Remote flash photography
What is remote flash photography?
Take pictures with one or more remote flash units using wireless flash
control (Advanced Wireless Lighting, or AWL). For information on using a
flash unit mounted on the camera accessory shoe, see “On-camera flash
photography” (0493).
Throughout this chapter, operations involving the camera and accessories

connected to the camera are indicated by C, operations involving remote
flash units by f. For more information on using remote flash units (f), see
the documentation provided with the flash unit.
What is remote flash photography?

505
Controlling remote flash units
Remote flash units can be controlled via optical signals from an optional
flash unit mounted on the camera accessory shoe and functioning as a
master flash (optical AWL). For information on compatible flash units,
see “Features available with CLS-compatible flash units” (0535).
･ If the flash unit in question is an SB-500, settings can be adjusted

from the camera. For more information, see “Using optical AWL with
the SB-500” (0506). See the documentation provided with the flash
units for more information.
･ Settings for other flash units must be adjusted using flash unit
controls. For more information, see the documentation provided with
the flash unit in question.
Using optical AWL with the SB-500

When an optional flash unit SB-500 is mounted on the accessory shoe of
the camera, [Wireless flash options] is displayed in [Flash control] in
the photo shooting menu. Group flash can be performed by selecting
[Optical AWL] in [Wireless flash options].

506
1 C: Highlight [Group flash options] in the [Flash control] display
and press 2.

507
2 C: Adjust flash output and choose the channel and flash control
mode.
･ Choose the flash control mode and flash level for the master flash
and the remote flash units in each group.
Option Description
TTL i-TTL flash control.
qA Auto aperture. Available only with compatible flash units.
M Choose the flash level manually.
––
The remote units do not fire. [Comp.] cannot be adjusted.
(off)
･ Select [3] for [Channel].
3 f: Set the channel of the remote flash units to [3].

508
4 f: Group the remote flash units.
･ Choose a group (A or B).
･ There is no limit on the number of remote flash units that may be
used. The practical maximum, however, is three per group, as the
light emitted by the remote flash units will interfere with
performance if more flash units are used.
5 C/f: Compose the shot and arrange the flash units.

･ See the documentation provided with the flash units for more
information.
･ Test-fire the units and confirm that they are functioning normally.
To test-fire the units, press the test button on the master flash.
6 C/f: Take the photograph after confirming that the flash-ready

lights for all flash units are lit.
D Remote flash photography

･ Position the sensor windows on the remote flash units to pick up the light
from the master flash. Particular care is required if the master flash is
mounted on a hand-held camera.
･ Be sure that direct light or strong reflections from the remote flash units
do not enter the camera lens (in [TTL] mode) or the photocells on the
remote flash units ([qA] mode). Otherwise light from the flash units may
interfere with exposure.
･ Even if [––] is selected for [Master flash] > [Mode], the master flash may
emit low-intensity timing flashes. These flashes may appear in
photographs taken at short range. This can be prevented by choosing low
ISO sensitivities or small apertures (high f-numbers).
･ After positioning the remote flash units, take a test shot and view the
results in the camera display.

509
Troubleshooting
Before contacting customer support
You may be able to resolve any issues with the camera by following the
steps below. Check this list before consulting your retailer or Nikon-
authorized service representative.
Check the list of common problems.

Common problems and solutions are listed in the following
STEP 1 sections:
･ “Problems and solutions” (0512)
･ “Alerts and error messages” (0521)
Turn the camera off and remove the battery, then wait about
a minute, re-insert the battery and turn the camera on.
STEP 2 The camera may continue to write data to the memory card
after shooting. Wait at least a minute before removing the
battery.
Search Nikon websites.

･ For support information and answers to frequently asked
STEP 3 questions, visit the website for your country or region (028).
･ To download the latest firmware for your camera, visit:

510
STEP 4 Consult a Nikon-authorized service representative.
D Restoring default settings
･ Depending on current settings, some menu items and other features may
be unavailable. To access menu items that are grayed out or features that
are otherwise unavailable, try restoring default settings using the [Reset
all settings] item in the setup menu.
･ Note, however, that wireless network profiles, copyright information, and
other user-generated entries will also be reset. Once reset, settings cannot
be restored.

511
Problems and solutions
Solutions to some common issues are listed below.
Battery/display
● The camera is on but does not respond:
･ Wait for recording and other operations to end.
･ If the problem persists, turn the camera off.
･ If the camera does not turn off, remove and reinsert the battery.
- Any data currently being recorded will be lost.
- Data that have already been recorded are not affected by removing
the battery.
● The display in the monitor turns off without warning:
Choose longer delays for Custom Setting c3 [Power off delay].
Shooting
● The camera takes time to turn on:
More time will be needed to find files if the memory card contains large
numbers of files or folders.
● The shutter cannot be released:
･ Is a memory card inserted, and if so, does it have space available?
･ Is the memory card write-protected?
･ If you selected mode S after selecting a shutter speed of “Bulb” or
“Time” in mode M, choose a different shutter speed.
･ Is [Release locked] selected for [Slot empty release lock] in the setup
menu?
● The camera is slow to respond to the shutter-release button:
Select [Off] for Custom Setting d3 [Exposure delay mode].
● Burst shooting is unavailable:
Burst shooting cannot be used in conjunction with HDR.

512
● Photos are out of focus:
･ Is the camera in manual focus mode? To enable autofocus, select AF-A,
AF-S, AF-C, or AF-F for focus mode.
･ Autofocus does not perform well under the following conditions. In
these cases, use manual focus or focus lock. Autofocus does not perform
well if: there is little or no contrast between the subject and the
background, the focus point contains objects at different distances from
the camera, the subject is dominated by regular geometric patterns, the
focus point contains areas of sharply contrasting brightness, background
objects appear larger than the subject, or the subject contains many fine
details.
● The beep does not sound:
･ Is [On] selected for [Silent photography] in the photo shooting menu?
･ If AF-C is selected for focus mode or if AF-A is selected and you are
shooting in AF-C, a beep will not sound when the camera focuses.
･ Select an option other than [Off] for [Beep options] > [Beep on/off] in
the setup menu.
･ The beep does not sound in video mode.
● The full range of shutter speeds is not available:
Using a flash restricts the range of shutter speeds available. Flash sync
speed can be set to values of 1/200–1/60 s using Custom Setting e1 [Flash
sync speed]. When using flash units that support auto FP high-speed
sync, choose [1/200 s (Auto FP)] for a full range of shutter speeds.
● Focus does not lock when the shutter-release button is pressed
halfway:
If AF-C is selected for focus mode or if AF-A is selected and you are
shooting in AF-C, press the A (g) button to lock the focus.
● Focus-point selection is not available:
Not available when [Auto-area AF], [Auto-area AF (people)], or [Auto-
area AF (animals)] is selected for AF-area mode.

513
● The camera is slow to record photos:
Is [On] selected for [Long exposure NR] in the photo shooting menu?
● Photographs and videos do not appear to have the same
exposure as the preview shown in the display:
･ The effects of changes to settings that affect exposure and color are not
visible in the display when [Off] is selected for Custom Setting d6 [Apply
settings to live view].
･ Note that changes to [Monitor brightness] have no effect on images
recorded with the camera.
● Flicker or banding appears in video mode:
Select [Flicker reduction] in the video recording menu and choose an
option that matches the frequency of the local AC power supply.
● Bright regions or bands appear:
Bright regions or bands may occur if the subject is lit by a flashing sign,
flash, or other light source with brief duration.
● Smudges appear in photographs:
･ Are there smudges on the front or rear (mount-side) lens elements?
･ Is there foreign matter on the image sensor? See “Manual cleaning”
(0569), or consult a Nikon-authorized service representative.
● Bokeh is irregular:
With fast shutter speeds and/or fast lenses, you may notice irregularities in
how Bokeh is shaped. The effect can be mitigated by choosing slower
shutter speeds and/or higher f-numbers.
● Pictures are affected by noticeable ghosting or flare:
You may notice ghosting or flare in shots that include the sun or other
bright light sources. These effects can be mitigated by attaching a lens
hood or by composing shots with bright light sources well out of the
frame. You can also try such techniques as removing lens filters, choosing
a different shutter speed, or using silent photography.

514
● Shooting ends unexpectedly or does not start:
･ Shooting may end automatically to prevent the camera overheating, for
example if:
- The ambient temperature is high
- The camera has been used for extended periods to record videos
- The camera has been used in continuous release modes for extended
periods
･ If photographs cannot be taken because the camera is running hot, turn
the camera off and wait for it to cool before trying to take photographs
again. Note that the camera may feel warm to the touch, but this does
not indicate a malfunction.
● Image artifacts appear in the display during shooting:
･ To reduce noise, adjust settings such as ISO sensitivity, shutter speed, or
Active D-Lighting.
･ At high ISO sensitivities, noise may become more noticeable in long
exposures or in pictures recorded when the camera temperature is
elevated.
･ Randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, or bright spots may arise as a result
of increases in the temperature of the camera’s internal circuits. Turn the
camera off when it is not in use.
･ Randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, lines or unexpected colors may
appear if you press the X button to zoom in on the view through the
lens during shooting.
･ Note that the distribution of noise in the display may differ from that in
the final picture.
･ This issue can sometimes be addressed by checking and optimizing the
image sensor. Perform pixel mapping using [Pixel mapping] in the
setup menu.
● The camera cannot measure a value for preset manual white
balance:
The subject is too dark or too bright.

515
● Certain pictures cannot be selected as sources for preset manual
white balance:
Pictures created with cameras of other types cannot serve as sources for
preset manual white balance.
● White balance (WB) bracketing is unavailable:
･ White balance bracketing is not available when a RAW or RAW + JPEG
option is selected for image quality.
･ White balance bracketing cannot be used in multiple exposure and HDR
modes.
● The effects of [Set Picture Control] differ from image to image:
[Auto] is selected for [Set Picture Control] or as the basis for a custom
Picture Control created using [Manage Picture Control], or [A] (auto) is
selected for [Quick sharp], [Contrast], or [Saturation]. For consistent
results over a series of photographs, choose a setting other than [A] (auto).
● The option selected for metering cannot be changed:
The option selected for metering cannot be changed during exposure
lock.
● Exposure compensation is not available:
Changes to exposure compensation in mode M apply only to the
exposure indicator and have no effect on shutter speed or aperture.
● Uneven shading may appear in long exposures:
Uneven shading may appear in long exposures shot at shutter speeds of
“Bulb” or “Time”. The effect can be mitigated by selecting [On] for [Long
exposure NR] in the photo shooting menu.
● Sound is not recorded with videos:
･ Is [Microphone off] selected for [Microphone sensitivity] in the video
recording menu?
･ Was the video recorded with [Manual] chosen for [Microphone
sensitivity] in the video recording menu and a low sensitivity selected?

516
Playback
● RAW pictures are not visible during playback:
The camera displays only the JPEG copies of pictures taken with [RAW +
JPEG fine], [RAW + JPEG normal], or [RAW + JPEG basic] selected for
[Image quality].
● Pictures taken with other cameras are not displayed:
Pictures recorded with other types of camera may not display correctly.
● Not all photos are visible during playback:
Select [All] for [Playback folder] in the playback menu.
● “Tall” (portrait) orientation photos are displayed in “wide”
(landscape) orientation:
･ Is [Off] selected for [Rotate tall] in the playback menu?
･ Auto image rotation is not available during picture review.
･ Camera orientation may not be correctly recorded in photos taken with
the camera pointing up or down.
● Pictures cannot be deleted:
･ Is the memory card write-protected?
･ Are the pictures protected?
● Pictures cannot be retouched:
･ The pictures cannot be further edited with this camera.
･ There is insufficient space on the memory card to record the retouched
copy.
● The camera displays the message, [Folder contains no pictures.]:
Select [All] for [Playback folder] in the playback menu.
● RAW pictures cannot be printed:
･ Print JPEG copies of the pictures created using a tool such as the [RAW
processing] item in the retouch menu.
･ Copy the pictures to a computer and print them using NX Studio or
other software that supports the RAW format.

517
● Pictures are not displayed on HDMI devices:
Confirm that an HDMI cable is correctly connected.
● Output to HDMI devices does not function as expected:
･ Confirm that an HDMI cable is correctly connected.
･ Is [On] selected for [HDMI] > [Advanced] > [External recording
control] in the setup menu?
･ Pictures may display correctly if default settings are restored using the
[Reset all settings] item in the setup menu.
● The effects of [Set Picture Control], [Active D-Lighting], or
[Vignette control] are not visible:
In the case of RAW images, the effects can only be viewed using Nikon
software. View RAW images using NX Studio.
● Pictures cannot be copied to a computer:
Depending on the operating system, you may be unable to upload
pictures when the camera is connected to a computer. Copy pictures from
the memory card to a computer using a card reader or other device.
Bluetooth and Wi-Fi (wireless networks)

● Smart devices do not display the camera SSID (network name):
･ Navigate to the setup menu and confirm both that [Disable] is selected
for [Airplane mode] and that [Enable] is selected for [Connect to smart
device] > [Pairing (Bluetooth)] > [Bluetooth connection].
･ Confirm that [Connect to smart device] > [Wi-Fi connection] is
enabled in the setup menu.
･ Try disabling and re-enabling wireless network features on the smart
device.
● The camera cannot connect to printers and other wireless
devices:
The camera cannot establish wireless connections with devices other than
smartphones, tablets, computers, and the ML-L7 Remote Control.

518
● Pictures cannot be uploaded to smart devices via auto upload:
･ If [Foreground] is selected for [Auto link] > [Link mode] in the
SnapBridge tab, pictures will not be uploaded to the smart device
automatically while the SnapBridge app is running in the background.
Pictures will only be uploaded when the SnapBridge app is displayed
(running in the foreground) on the smart device.
･ Check that the camera is paired with the smart device.
･ Check that the camera and smart device are configured for connection
via Bluetooth.
● The camera cannot download location data from the smart
device:
･ The camera may be unable to download or display location data from
smart devices depending on the version of the operating system and/or
SnapBridge app used.
･ If [Foreground] is selected for [Auto link] > [Link mode] in the
SnapBridge tab, location data will not be downloaded to the camera.
Instead, they will be embedded in photographs after they are uploaded
to the smart device.
Miscellaneous
● The date of recording is not correct:
Is the camera clock set correctly? The clock is less accurate than most
watches and household clocks; check it regularly against more accurate
timepieces and reset as necessary.
● Menu items cannot be selected:
Some items are not available at certain combinations of settings.
● [Wireless remote (ML-L7) options] cannot be selected, or the
camera cannot be paired with the ML-L7 Remote Control using
[Save wireless remote controller] in [Wireless remote (ML-L7)
options]:
･ Use a fully-charged battery.

519
･ Confirm that [Airplane mode] in the setup menu is set to [Disable].
･ The remote control cannot be used while the camera is connected to
and exchanging data with a computer or smartphone via USB. End the
USB connection.
● The camera does not respond even when the ML-L7 Remote
Control is used:
･ The camera and ML-L7 Remote Control (optional) are not connected.
Press the power button on the remote control to connect them. If L is
not displayed on the shooting screen, pair again and connect (0563).
･ Confirm that [Wireless remote (ML-L7) options] > [Wireless remote
connection] in the setup menu is set to [Enable].
･ Confirm that [Airplane mode] in the setup menu is set to [Disable].
･ The remote control cannot be used while the camera is connected to
and exchanging data with a computer or smartphone via USB. End the
USB connection.

520
Alerts and error messages
This section lists the alerts and error messages that appear in the camera
display.
Alerts
The following alerts appear in the camera display:
Alert Problem Solution

H Low battery. Ready spare battery.
･ Ensure that the lens is correctly

attached.
･ Ensure that retractable lenses are
Lens is not correctly extended.
l
attached. ･ This indicator is also displayed
when a non-CPU lens is attached
via a mount adapter, but in this
case no action need be taken.
Bulb “Bulb” selected in ･ Change shutter speed.

(flashes) mode S. ･ Select mode M.
Time “Time” selected in ･ Change shutter speed.

(flashes) mode S. ･ Select mode M.

521
･ Lower ISO sensitivity.
･ Shooting mode P: Use third-party
ND (neutral density) filter (filter can
Subject too bright; also be used if alert is still displayed
limits of camera after following settings are
exposure metering adjusted in mode S or A).
system exceeded. ･ Shooting mode S: Choose faster
(The shutter speed.
exposure ･ Shooting mode A: Choose smaller
indicator and aperture (higher f-number).
shutter
speed or ･ Increase ISO sensitivity.
aperture ･ Shooting mode P: Use optional
display flash) flash unit (flash can also be used if
Subject too dark; alert is still displayed after
limits of camera following settings are adjusted in
exposure metering mode S or A).
system exceeded. ･ Shooting mode S: Choose slower
shutter speed.
･ Shooting mode A: Choose wider
aperture (lower f-number).
Photo may be underexposed. Check

Flash has fired at full distance to subject and settings such
power. as aperture, flash range, and ISO
c (flashes) sensitivity.
Subjects appear dark

Use optional flash unit.
and underexposed.

522
･ Delete pictures from memory card
･ Memory
until there is room for additional
insufficient to
pictures to be recorded. Copy
record further
Full (flashes) pictures you wish to keep to
photos.
computer or other device before
･ Camera has run out
proceeding.
of file numbers.
･ Insert new memory card.
Press shutter-release button again. If

error persists or appears frequently,
Err (flashes) Camera malfunction.
consult Nikon-authorized service
representative.
The memory card is

Card Slide the lock switch to the “write”
write-protected
(flashes) position (0590).
(“locked”).
Error messages
The following error messages may appear in the camera display:
● Shutter release disabled. Recharge battery.
Battery exhausted.
･ Replace with spare battery.
･ Charge battery.
● This battery cannot be used. It does not communicate properly
with this camera. To use the camera safely, choose a battery
designated for use in this camera.
･ Battery info not available.
- Battery cannot be used. Contact Nikon-authorized service
representative.
- Battery level is extremely low; charge battery.
･ Battery cannot supply data to camera.
- Replace third-party batteries with genuine Nikon batteries.

523
● No memory card.
Memory card not inserted or inserted incorrectly.
･ Check that card is inserted correctly.
● Cannot access this memory card. Insert another card.
Error accessing memory card.
･ Check that camera supports memory card.
･ If error persists after card has been repeatedly ejected and reinserted,
card may be damaged. Contact retailer or Nikon-authorized service
representative.
● Memory card is locked. Slide lock to "write" position.
The memory card is write-protected (“locked”).
･ Slide the lock switch to the “write” position (0590).
● This card is not formatted. Format the card.
Memory card is not correctly formatted.
･ Format memory card.
･ Replace with correctly-formatted memory card.
● FTZ mount adapter firmware version not supported. Upgrade FTZ
firmware.
The firmware of the mount adapter is not the latest version.
･ Update the firmware of the mount adapter to the latest version. For
information on firmware updates, see the Nikon website for your area.
● Recording interrupted. Please wait.
Memory card does not support required video write speed.
･ Use card that supports required write speed or change option selected
for [Frame size/frame rate] in video recording menu.
● The camera is too hot. It cannot be used until it cools. Please wait.
Camera will turn itself off.
･ Camera’s internal temperature is elevated.
- Suspend shooting until camera has cooled.
･ High battery temperature.

524
- Remove battery and wait for it to cool.
● Folder contains no pictures.
･ Folder contains no pictures.
- Insert memory card that contains pictures.
･ No pictures in folder selected for playback.
- Use [Playback folder] item in playback menu to select folder that
contains pictures.
● Cannot display this file.
･ File has been modified using computer application or does not conform
to DCF file standard.
･ File is corrupt.
- Do not overwrite images using computer applications.
● Cannot select this file.
Selected picture cannot be retouched.
･ Retouch options are available only with pictures taken with or previously
retouched on camera.
● This video cannot be edited.
Selected video cannot be edited.
･ Videos created with other devices cannot be edited.
･ Videos under two seconds long cannot be edited.

525
Technical notes
Compatible lenses and accessories
The camera can be used with all Z mount lenses.
Confirm that the lens name includes “NIKKOR Z”.
A Compatible F mount lenses

F mount lenses can be mounted on Z mount cameras using an FTZ II/FTZ
mount adapter.
･ Some features may not be available depending on the lens used.
Information on the F mount lenses that can be used with Z mount cameras
and on any restrictions that may apply can be found in Compatible F Mount
Lenses, available from the Nikon Download Center:
Compatible lenses and accessories

526
Display in the monitor
The monitor shows information on current settings. Other icons or
warnings may occasionally be displayed, for example when settings are
changed.
Monitor
❚Photo mode
❚
1 Shooting mode (0120) 6 Interval timer indicator (0292)

2 Flexible program indicator 1 icon (074)
(0121) “No memory card” indicator
3 User setting mode (0128) (062, 0530)
4 AF-area brackets (092) 7 Release mode (0136)
5 Flash mode (0498) 8 Focus point (075, 092)
9 Focus mode (090)
10 AF-area mode (092)

527
11 Active D-Lighting (0165) 19 Exposure and flash bracketing
12 Picture Control (0147) indicator (0267)
13 Bluetooth connection indicator WB bracketing indicator
(0403) (0272)
Airplane mode (0402) ADL bracketing indicator
14 White balance (0109, 0153, (0275)
0244) HDR indicator (0286)
15 Multiple exposure indicator
Image area (0240)
16 (0279)
Image size (0162)
20 Number of shots in exposure
and flash bracketing sequence
18 i icon (0145)
(0267)
Number of shots in WB
bracketing sequence (0272)
Number of shots in ADL
bracketing sequence (0275)
HDR exposure differential
(0286)
Number of multiple exposure
(0279)

528
21 Exposure indicator 26 ISO sensitivity (0131)
Exposure (0125) 27 ISO sensitivity indicator (0131)
Exposure compensation Auto ISO sensitivity indicator
(0134) (0132)
Auto bracketing (0266) 28 Exposure compensation
22 Flash-ready indicator (0494) indicator (0134)
23 “k” (appears when memory 29 Flash compensation indicator
remains for over 1000 (0501)
exposures; 064) 30 Subject-tracking AF (0100)
24 Number of exposures 31 Aperture (0123, 0124)
remaining (064, 0592) 32 Shutter speed (0121, 0124)
25 Wi-Fi connection indicator 33 FV lock indicator (0502)
(0165) 34 Metering (0163)
Remote-control connection
35 Autoexposure (AE) lock (0142)
indicator (0563)

529
36 Battery indicator (063) 41 Focus indicator (0103)
37 USB power delivery (0410) 42 Vibration reduction (0168)
38 Flicker detection (0261) 43 Touch shooting (042, 0101)
39 Shutter type (0350) 44 Live view preview indicator
Silent photography (0114) (0352)
40 Exposure delay mode (0349) 45 Temperature warning
D Temperature warnings
･ If the camera temperature becomes elevated, a temperature warning and
count-down timer will be displayed. When the timer reaches zero, the
shooting display will turn off.
･ The timer turns red when the thirty second mark is reached. In some
cases, the timer may be displayed immediately after the camera is turned
on.
D No memory card inserted

If no memory card is inserted, a “no memory card” indicator and [–E–] will
appear in the shooting display.

530
● The information display
1 Shooting mode (0120) 6 Exposure indicator

2 Flexible program indicator Exposure (0125)
(0121) Exposure compensation
3 User setting mode (0128) (0134)
4 Shutter speed (0121, 0124) Exposure and flash
5 Aperture (0123, 0124) bracketing (0267)
WB bracketing (0272)
ADL bracketing (0275)

531
7 Flash compensation indicator 12 i icon (0145)
(0501) 13 ISO sensitivity (0131)
8 Exposure compensation 14 ISO sensitivity indicator (0131)
indicator (0134) Auto ISO sensitivity indicator
Exposure compensation value (0132)
(0134) 15 FV lock indicator (0502)
9 Exposure and flash bracketing 16 Autoexposure (AE) lock (0142)
indicator (0267)
WB bracketing indicator
(0272)
ADL bracketing indicator
(0275)
HDR indicator (0286)
Multiple exposure indicator
(0279)
10 “k” (appears when memory
remains for over 1000
exposures; 064)
11 Number of exposures
remaining (064, 0592)

532
17 Bluetooth connection indicator 29 AF-area mode (092)
(0403) 30 Focus mode (090)
Airplane mode (0402) 31 Vibration reduction (0168)
18 Wi-Fi connection indicator 32 Active D-Lighting (0165)
(0165) 33 Metering (0163)
Remote-control connection 34 Image size (0162)
indicator (0563) 35 White balance (0109, 0153,
19 Long exposure noise reduction 0244)
indicator (0258)
36 Set Picture Control (0147)
20 Shutter type (0350)
Silent photography (0114)
38 Flash mode (0498)
21 Exposure delay mode (0349)
39 Temperature warning
22 Interval timer indicator (0292)
1 icon (074)
23 Flash control mode (0497)
24 “Beep” indicator (0400)
25 Battery indicator (063)
26 USB power delivery (0410)
27 Wi-Fi connection (0165)
28 Release mode (0136)

533
❚Video mode
❚
1 Recording indicator (080) 8 Release mode (still

“No video” indicator (082) photography; 0139)
2 External recording control 9 Sound level (0175)
(0489) 10 Microphone sensitivity (0175)
3 Frame size and rate/Video 11 Frequency response (0332)
quality (0172) 12 Electronic VR indicator (0178)
4 Time remaining (080) 13 Highlight display (0384)
5 Timecode (0333)
6 File name (0239)
7 Wind noise reduction (0177)

534
Compatible flash units
The Nikon Creative Lighting System (CLS)

Nikon’s advanced Creative Lighting System (CLS) supports a variety of
features thanks to improved communication between the camera and
compatible flash units.
Features available with CLS-compatible flash

units
Flash unit 0 Flash unit 0
SB-5000 535 SB-R200 544
SB-910/SB-900/SB-800 537 SB-400 546
SB-700 539 SB-300 547
SB-600 541 SU-800 549
SB-500 542
❚SB-5000
❚
Supported features
Single flash
i-TTL balanced fill-flash 41

i-TTL
Standard i-TTL fill-flash 42
qA Auto aperture 4
A Non-TTL auto -
GN Distance-priority manual 4

535
Supported features
M Manual 4
RPT Repeating flash 4
Optical Advanced Wireless Lighting
Master
Remote flash control 4
i-TTL i-TTL 4
[A : B] Quick wireless flash control 4
qA Auto aperture 4
A Non-TTL auto -
M Manual 4
Remote
i-TTL i-TTL 4
qA/A Auto aperture/non-TTL auto 43
M Manual 4
Radio-controlled Advanced Wireless Lighting -
Color Information Communication (flash) 4
Color Information Communication (LED light) -
Auto FP high-speed sync 44
FV lock 45

536
Supported features
Red-eye reduction 4
Camera modeling illumination -
Unified flash control -
Camera flash unit firmware update 4
1 Not available with spot metering.

2 Can also be selected via the flash unit.
3 Choice of qA and A depends on the option selected with the master
flash.
4 Available only in i-TTL, qA, A, GN and M flash control modes.
5 Available only in i-TTL flash control mode or when the flash is configured
to emit monitor pre-flashes in qA or A flash control mode.
❚SB-910/SB-900/SB-800
❚
Supported features
Single flash

i-TTL
qA Auto aperture 43
A Non-TTL auto 43
M Manual 4
Master

537
Supported features
i-TTL i-TTL 4
[A : B] Quick wireless flash control -
qA Auto aperture 4
A Non-TTL auto -
M Manual 4
Remote
i-TTL i-TTL 4
qA/A Auto aperture/non-TTL auto 44
M Manual 4
FV lock 46
Red-eye reduction 4

538
3 qA/A mode selection is performed on the flash unit using custom
settings.
4 Choice of qA and A depends on the option selected with the master
flash.
5 Available only in i-TTL, qA, A, GN, and M flash control modes.
to emit monitor pre-flashes in qA or A flash control mode.
7 Firmware updates for the SB-910 and SB-900 can be performed from the
camera.
❚SB-700
❚
Supported features
Single flash

i-TTL
qA Auto aperture -
A Non-TTL auto -
M Manual 4
RPT Repeating flash -
Master
i-TTL i-TTL 4

539
Supported features
qA Auto aperture -
A Non-TTL auto -
M Manual 4
Remote
i-TTL i-TTL 4
qA/A Auto aperture/non-TTL auto -
M Manual 4
FV lock 43
Red-eye reduction 4

2 Available only in i-TTL, GN, and M flash control modes.
3 Available only in i-TTL flash control mode.

540
❚SB-600
❚
Supported features
Single flash

i-TTL
qA Auto aperture -
A Non-TTL auto -
GN Distance-priority manual -
M Manual 4
Master
Remote flash control -
i-TTL i-TTL -
qA Auto aperture -
A Non-TTL auto -
M Manual -
Remote
i-TTL i-TTL 4

541
Supported features
M Manual 4
FV lock 44
Red-eye reduction 4
Camera flash unit firmware update -

3 Available only in i-TTL and M flash control modes.
❚SB-500
❚
Supported features
Single flash

i-TTL
qA Auto aperture -

542
Supported features
A Non-TTL auto -
M Manual 42
Master
i-TTL i-TTL 42
qA Auto aperture -
A Non-TTL auto -
M Manual 42
Remote
i-TTL i-TTL 4
M Manual 4
Color Information Communication (LED light) 4

543
Supported features
FV lock 44
Red-eye reduction 4

2 Can be selected using the [Flash control] item in the camera menus.
❚SB-R200
❚
Supported features
Single flash
i-TTL balanced fill-flash -

i-TTL
Standard i-TTL fill-flash -
qA Auto aperture -
A Non-TTL auto -
M Manual -
Master

544
Supported features
i-TTL i-TTL -
qA Auto aperture -
A Non-TTL auto -
M Manual -
Remote
i-TTL i-TTL 4
M Manual 4
Color Information Communication (flash) -
FV lock 42
Red-eye reduction -

545
❚SB-400
❚
Supported features
Single flash

i-TTL
qA Auto aperture -
A Non-TTL auto -
M Manual 42
Master
i-TTL i-TTL -
qA Auto aperture -
A Non-TTL auto -
M Manual -
Remote
i-TTL i-TTL -

546
Supported features
M Manual -
Auto FP high-speed sync -
FV lock 43
Red-eye reduction 4

❚SB-300
❚
Supported features
Single flash

i-TTL
qA Auto aperture -

547
Supported features
A Non-TTL auto -
M Manual 42
Master
i-TTL i-TTL -
qA Auto aperture -
A Non-TTL auto -
M Manual -
Remote
i-TTL i-TTL -
M Manual -

548
Supported features
Auto FP high-speed sync -
FV lock 43
Red-eye reduction -

❚The SU-800 Wireless Speedlight Commander

❚
When mounted on a CLS-compatible camera, the SU-800 can be used as
a commander for SB-5000, SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, SB-700, SB-600,
SB-500, or SB-R200 flash units. Group flash control is supported for up to
three groups. The SU-800 itself is not equipped with a flash.
Supported features
Single flash
i-TTL balanced fill-flash -

i-TTL
Standard i-TTL fill-flash -
qA Auto aperture -
A Non-TTL auto -
M Manual -

549
Supported features
Master
i-TTL i-TTL -
qA Auto aperture -
A Non-TTL auto -
M Manual -
Remote
i-TTL i-TTL -
M Manual -
Color Information Communication (flash) -
FV lock 43
Red-eye reduction -

550
Supported features
1 Available during close-up photography only.

2 Disabled when RPT is selected for flash control mode.
to emit monitor pre-flashes in qA flash control mode.
Notes and tips for optional flash units

When using an optional flash unit, be sure also to read the
documentation supplied with the unit.
･ If the unit supports CLS, refer to the section on CLS-compatible
digital SLR cameras. This camera is not included in the “digital SLR”
category in the documentation for the SB-80DX, SB-28DX, and
SB-50DX.
･ If the flash-ready indicator (c) flashes for about three seconds after a
photograph is taken in i-TTL or non-TTL auto mode, the flash has fired
at full power and the photograph may be underexposed (CLS-
compatible flash units only).
･ i-TTL flash control can be used at ISO sensitivities between 100 and
12800.
･ At ISO sensitivities over 12800, the desired results may not be
achieved at some ranges or aperture settings.
･ In mode P, the maximum aperture (minimum f-number) is limited
according to ISO sensitivity, as shown below:
Maximum aperture (f-number) at ISO equivalent of:

100 200 400 800 1600 3200 6400 12800
4 5 5.6 7.1 8 10 11 13

551
* If the maximum aperture of the lens is smaller than given above, the
maximum value for aperture will be the maximum aperture of the
lens.
･ The SB-5000, SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, SB-700, SB-600, SB-500, and
SB-400 provide red-eye reduction in red-eye reduction and slow-sync
with red-eye reduction flash modes.
･ “Noise” in the form of lines may appear in flash photographs taken
with an SD-9 or SD-8A high-performance battery pack attached
directly to the camera. Reduce ISO sensitivity or increase the distance
between the camera and the battery pack.
･ When an SC-series 17, 28, or 29 sync cable is used for off-camera flash
photography, correct exposure may not be achieved in i-TTL mode.
We recommend that you select standard i-TTL fill-flash. Take a test
shot and view the results in the camera display.
･ In i-TTL, do not use any form of flash panel (diffusion panel) other
than the flash unit’s built-in flash panel or supplied bounce adapter.
Using other panels may produce incorrect exposure.

552
D Flash photography
Flash photography cannot be combined with some camera features,
including:
･ [Continuous H (extended)] for the release mode,
･ HDR (high dynamic range), and
･ silent photography.
D Using FV lock with optional flash units

･ FV lock is available with optional flash units in TTL and (where supported)
monitor pre-flash qA and monitor pre-flash A flash control modes (see
the documentation provided with the flash unit for more information).
･ Note that when Advanced Wireless Lighting is used to control remote
flash units, you will need to set the flash control mode for the master or at
least one remote group to TTL, qA, or A.
D Other flash units

The following flash units can be used in non-TTL auto (A) and manual modes.
The options available do not vary with the lens used.
Flash unit Supported features

SB-80DX, SB-28DX, SB-28, SB-26, Non-TTL auto, Manual, Repeating flash,
SB-25, SB-24 Rear-curtain sync1
SB-50DX, SB-23, SB-29, SB-21B,

Manual, Rear-curtain sync1
SB-29S
SB-30, SB-272, SB-22S, SB-22, SB-20, Non-TTL auto, Manual, Rear-curtain

SB-16B, SB-15 sync1
1 Available when the camera is used to select the flash mode.

2 Mounting an SB-27 on the camera automatically sets the flash mode to
TTL, but setting the flash mode to TTL disables the shutter release. Set
the SB-27 to A.

553
D Metering areas for FV lock
The areas metered when FV lock is used with optional flash units are as
follows:
･ Stand-alone flash unit
Flash control mode Metered area

i-TTL 6-mm circle in center of frame
Auto aperture (qA) Area metered by flash exposure meter
･ Remote flash units
Flash control mode Metered area

i-TTL Entire frame
Auto aperture (qA)

Area metered by flash exposure meter
Non-TTL auto (A)
D Flash compensation for optional flash units

In i-TTL and auto aperture (qA) flash control modes, the flash compensation
selected with the optional flash unit or the camera [Flash control] item is
added to the flash compensation selected with the [Flash compensation]
item in the photo shooting menu.
A Studio strobe lighting

To adjust the color and brightness of the view through the lens so that shots
are easier to frame, select [Off] for Custom Setting d6 [Apply settings to live
view].

554
Other compatible accessories
A variety of accessories are available for your Nikon camera.
D Compatible accessories
･ Availability may vary with country or region.
･ See our website or brochures for the latest information.
● Power sources
･ EN-EL25 Rechargeable Li-ion Battery: Can be used with Nikon Z 30
digital cameras.
･ MH-32 Battery Charger: Can be used to recharge EN-EL25 batteries.
･ EH-7P Charging AC Adapter: The EH-7P can be used to charge batteries
inserted in the camera.
- The battery will not charge while the camera is on.
- The charging AC adapter can be used to power the camera; to do so,
select [Enable] for [USB power delivery] in the setup menu. For more
information, see “USB power delivery” (0410).
● Filters
･ Neutral Color (NC) filters can be used to protect the lens.
･ Filters may cause ghosting when the subject is framed against a bright
light, or when a bright light source is in the frame. Filters can be removed if
ghosting occurs.
･ Matrix metering may not produce the desired results with filters with
exposure factors (filter factors) over 1× (Y44, Y48, Y52, O56, R60, X0, X1, C-
PL, ND2S, ND4, ND4S, ND8, ND8S, ND400, A2, A12, B2, B8, B12). We suggest
that [Center-weighted metering] be selected instead. See the filter
documentation for details.
･ Filters intended for special-effects photography may interfere with
autofocus or the in-focus indicator (I).
● USB cables
･ UC-E24 USB Cable: A USB cable with a type C connector for connection to
the camera and a type A connector for connection to the USB device.

555
･ UC-E25 USB Cable: A USB cable with two type C connectors.
● Hot shoe adapters

AS-15 Sync Terminal Adapter: Mount the AS-15 on the camera hot shoe to
connect studio strobe lights or other flash equipment via a sync terminal.
● Accessory shoe covers

BS-1 Accessory Shoe Cover: A cover protecting the accessory shoe when no
flash unit is attached.
● Body caps
BF-N1 Body Cap: The body cap prevents dust entering the camera when no
lens is in place.
● Mount adapters
FTZ II/FTZ Mount Adapter: An adapter that allows NIKKOR F mount lenses
to be used with digital cameras that support interchangeable Z mount
lenses.
･ For information on attaching, removing, maintaining, and using mount
adapters, refer to the documentation supplied with the device.
* If a warning message prompting you to update is displayed on the
camera when a mount adapter is mounted on the camera, update to the
latest version. For information on firmware updates, see the Nikon
website for your area.
● Microphones
･ ME-1 Stereo Microphone: Connect the ME-1 to the camera microphone
jack to record stereo sound. Using an external microphone also reduces the
chance of picking up equipment noise, such as the sounds produced
during video recording when focus is achieved using autofocus.
･ ME-W1 Wireless Microphone: A wireless Bluetooth microphone. Use the
ME-W1 for off-camera recording.
● Remote controls
ML-L7 Remote Control: Pair it with the camera and shoot videos and photos
remotely.

556
D Attaching and removing the accessory shoe cover
The optional BS-1 Accessory Shoe Cover slides into the shoe as shown. To
remove the cover, hold the camera firmly, press the cover down with a thumb
and slide it in the direction shown.
Charging the camera with the charging AC

adapter
When a battery is inserted in the camera, the optional EH-7P Charging
AC Adapter can be used to charge the battery. Note that in countries or
regions where required, charging AC adapters are supplied with a plug
adapter attached; the shape of the plug adapter varies with the country
of sale.

557
･ After confirming that the camera is off, connect the charging AC
adapter (q) and plug the adapter in. The battery charges while the
camera is off. Keep the plug straight during insertion and removal.
- The camera charge lamp (w) lights amber while charging is in

progress. The lamp turns off when charging is complete.
- An exhausted battery will fully charge in about 1 hour and 40
minutes.
- Unplug the charging AC adapter and remove the cable from the
camera when charging is complete.
D The charging AC adapter

If the battery cannot be charged using the charging AC adapter, for example
because the battery is not compatible or the temperature of the camera is
elevated, the charge lamp will flash rapidly for about 30 seconds and then
turn off. If the charge lamp is off and you did not observe the battery
charging, turn the camera on and check the battery level.

558
A Powering the camera with the charging AC adapter
･ If [Enable] is selected for [USB power delivery] in the setup menu, the
charging AC adapter will power the camera when the camera is turned
on. For more information, see ““Power delivery” versus “charging”” (0411).
･ The battery will not charge while the camera is powered by an outside
source.
ML-L7 Remote Control

You can operate the camera from the remote control by pairing*
(0563) the optional ML-L7 Remote Control with the camera. With this
camera, you can perform the operation in “Parts and functions of the
remote control (for Z 30)” (0560).
* Connecting the camera and remote control via Bluetooth is called
“pairing” here.
･ Only one remote control can be paired per camera. When pairing
another remote control, only the last paired remote control is
enabled.
･ Also see the documentation supplied with the ML-L7 Remote
Control.
D Notes when using the remote control

The remote control cannot be used in the following cases.
･ When [Airplane mode] in the camera setup menu is set to [Enable]
･ While the camera is connected to and exchanging data with a computer
or smartphone via USB

559
❚Parts and functions of the remote control (for Z 30)
❚
Part Function
1 － button Same operation as the W (Q) button on the camera.
2 ＋ button Same operation as the X button on the camera.
Video-
3 record Press to start recording, and press again to end recording.
button
When pressed, the remote control turns on and starts

searching for a paired camera. If you press and hold it for 3
Power
4 seconds or longer, the remote control will start searching
button
for unpaired cameras. Pressing the power button while the
remote control is on will turn it off.
The remote control status and shooting operation status

5 Status lamp are indicated by the color and behavior of the lamp
(0563).

560
Part Function
Corresponds to the shutter-release button on the
camera.
･ When using autofocus, the shutter is released after
focusing with autofocus.
･ When shooting with autofocus, press the shutter-release
button on the camera halfway beforehand to focus.
･ If you do not want to change the focus position when
Shutter-
you press the shutter-release button on the remote
6 release
control, focus with the camera beforehand, and then set
button
the focus mode to manual focus.
･ There is no halfway press or press and hold function. You
cannot use the continuous shooting function, which
requires press and hold.
･ Bulb photography is not available. If you set the camera
to bulb photography, operation works the same way as
time photography.
Multi
7 Same operation as the multi selector on the camera.
selector

561
Part Function
8 J (select) button Same operation as the J button on the camera.
Use functions registered beforehand (0409).

Fn1 (function ･ By default, pressing the Fn1 button on the remote
9 1)/Fn2 (function control is the same operation as the K button on
2) button the camera, while the Fn2 button is the same
operation as the G button.

562
A Standby timer when using the remote control
When the standby timer of the camera expires and the monitor is off, turn on
the remote control and then press and hold the shutter-release button or
video-record button on the remote control to return to the original state.
A Remote control status lamp (for Z 30)
Color Status Description

Green Flashing about every second Detecting paired camera
Flashing quickly (about every 0.5

Green Pairing
seconds)
Green Flashing about every 3 seconds Connected to the camera
Orange Flashes once Start shooting photo
Orange Flashes twice End shooting photo
Red Flashes once Start recording video
Red Flashes twice End recording video
❚Connecting for the first time: Pairing

❚
When using the remote control for the first time, you must pair it with
the camera.

563
1 Select [Wireless remote (ML-L7) options] > [Save wireless
remote controller] in the camera setup menu and press J.
･ The camera will standby for pairing.

･ If the camera is connected to a smartphone or computer,
connection to those devices will be terminated.
2 Press and hold the power button on the remote control (3

seconds or longer).
･ The camera and remote control will start pairing. In the meantime,
the remote control status lamp flashes at about 0.5 second
intervals.
･ When pairing is complete, the camera and remote control will be
connected. L and Z are displayed in the shooting display.
･ If a message indicating that pairing failed is displayed, start over

from Step 1.

564
❚To connect with a paired remote control
❚
1 Select [Wireless remote (ML-L7) options] > [Wireless remote
connection] > [Enable] in the camera setup menu and press J.
2 Press the power button on the remote control.

･ The camera and remote control are automatically connected.

565
Software
The following Nikon software can be used with the camera:
● Computer software
Nikon computer software is available from the Nikon Download Center.
Check the version and system requirements and be sure to download the
latest version.
･ NX Tether: Use for tethered photography when the camera is connected to
a computer. Exposure, white balance, and other camera settings can be
adjusted remotely using controls in the computer display.
･ NX Studio*: View and edit photos and videos shot with Nikon digital
cameras. Use NX Studio software to fine-tune photos shot in Nikon’s unique
NEF/NRW (RAW) formats or convert them to JPEG or TIFF (RAW processing).
NX Studio can be used not only with RAW pictures but also with JPEG and
TIFF photos shot with Nikon digital cameras for such tasks as editing tone
curves and enhancing brightness and contrast.
* Existing users should be sure to download the latest version, as earlier
versions may be unable to download pictures from the camera.
･ Wireless Transmitter Utility: The Wireless Transmitter Utility is required if
the camera is to be connected to a network. Pair the camera with the
computer and download pictures via Wi-Fi.
･ Webcam Utility: A module that allows you to connect the camera to a
computer with a USB cable and use the camera as a webcam. When you
select an external camera in web conferencing software, “Webcam Utility”
is displayed. Select it to use it as a webcam. Check the Webcam Utility page
on the Nikon Download Center for compatible cameras, usage, operating
environment, and precautions during use.
● Smartphone (tablet) apps

Smartphone (tablet) apps are available from the Apple App Store® and
Google Play™. For the latest information on our apps, visit the Nikon
website.
Software
566
･ SnapBridge: Download photos and videos from the camera to your smart
device via a wireless connection.
･ NX MobileAir (offers in-app purchases)*: Import pictures from a camera
connected to your smart device via USB and upload them wirelessly to an
FTP server.
* Supported features and operating systems vary by country and region.
Software
567
Caring for the camera
Storage
When the camera will not be used for an extended period, remove the
battery. Before removing the battery, confirm that the camera is off. Do
not store the camera in locations that:
･ are poorly ventilated or subject to humidities of over 60%
･ are next to equipment that produces strong electromagnetic fields,
such as televisions or radios
･ are exposed to temperatures above 50 °C (122 °F) or below −10 °C (14
°F)
Cleaning
The procedure varies with the part that requires cleaning. The
procedures are detailed below.
･ Do not use alcohol, thinner, or other volatile chemicals.
❚Camera body
❚
Use a blower to remove dust and lint, then wipe gently with a soft, dry
cloth. After using the camera at the beach or seaside, wipe off sand or
salt with a cloth lightly dampened in distilled water and dry the camera
thoroughly.
Important: The following are not covered under warranty:
･ damage caused by the entry of dust, sand, or other foreign matter
into the camera, and
･ damage caused by using an aerosol blower too close to the camera.
❚Lens
❚
This glass element is easily damaged: remove dust and lint with a
blower. If using an aerosol blower, keep the can vertical to prevent the

568
discharge of liquid that could damage glass elements. To remove
fingerprints and other stains, apply a small amount of lens cleaner to a
soft cloth and clean with care.
❚Monitor
❚
Remove dust and lint with a blower. When removing fingerprints and
other stains, wipe the surface lightly with a soft cloth or chamois leather.
Do not apply pressure, as this could result in damage or malfunction.
Manual cleaning
Dirt or dust entering the camera when lenses are exchanged or the body
cap is removed may adhere to the surface of the image sensor and
affect your photographs. The sensor can be cleaned manually as
described below. Note, however, that the sensor is extremely delicate
and easily damaged; we recommend that manual cleaning be
performed only by a Nikon-authorized service representative.
1 Turn the camera off and remove the lens.
2 Holding the camera so that light can enter the camera, examine
the image sensor for dust or lint.
If no foreign objects are present, proceed to Step 4.

569
3 Remove any dust and lint from the sensor with a blower.
･ Do not use a blower-brush. The bristles could damage the sensor.

･ Dirt that cannot be removed with a blower can only be removed
by Nikon-authorized service personnel. Under no circumstances
should you touch or wipe the sensor.
4 Replace the lens or supplied body cap.

570
D Foreign matter on the image sensor
Foreign matter entering the camera when lenses or body caps are removed
or exchanged (or in rare circumstances lubricant or fine particles from the
camera itself ) may adhere to the image sensor, where it may appear in
photographs taken under certain conditions. To prevent entry of foreign
matter when attaching the body cap or exchanging lenses, avoid dusty
environments and be sure to remove all dust and other foreign matter that
may be adhering to the camera mount, lens mount, or body cap. To protect
the camera when no lens is in place, be sure to replace the supplied body
cap. For foreign matter adhering to the image sensor, clean the image sensor
as described in “Manual cleaning” (0569), or have the sensor cleaned by
authorized Nikon service personnel. Photographs affected by the presence of
foreign matter on the sensor can be retouched using the clean image options
available in some imaging applications.
D Servicing the camera and accessories

The camera is a precision device and requires regular servicing; Nikon
recommends that the camera be inspected once every one to two years, and
that it be serviced once every three to five years (note that fees apply to
these services).
･ Frequent inspection and servicing are particularly recommended if the
camera is used professionally.
･ Any accessories regularly used with the camera, such as lenses or optional
flash units, should be included when the camera is inspected or serviced.

571
Caring for the camera and battery:
Cautions
Camera care
● Do not drop
Do not drop the camera or lens or subject them to blows. The product may
malfunction if subjected to strong shocks or vibration.
● Keep dry
Keep the camera dry. Rusting of the internal mechanism caused by water
inside the camera can not only be expensive to repair but can in fact cause
irreparable damage.
● Avoid sudden changes in temperature

If you bring the camera from a cold place to a warm place, or from a warm
place to a cold place, water droplets may form inside and outside the camera
and cause damage. When you bring the camera to a place with a
temperature difference, place the camera in a carrying case or plastic bag
and seal it beforehand. When the camera has adapted to the ambient
temperature, take it out from the bag and use it.
● Keep away from strong magnetic fields

Static charges or the magnetic fields produced by equipment such as radio
transmitters could interfere with the monitor, corrupt data stored on the
memory card, or affect the product’s internal circuitry.
● Do not leave the lens pointed at the sun

Do not leave the lens pointed at the sun or other strong light source. Intense
light may damage the image sensor or cause fading or “burn in”. Photographs
taken with the camera may exhibit a white blur effect.
● Lasers and other bright light sources

Do not direct lasers or other extremely bright light sources toward the lens,
as this could damage the camera’s image sensor.
Caring for the camera and battery: Cautions

572
● Cleaning
When cleaning the camera body, use a blower to gently remove dust and lint,
then wipe gently with a soft, dry cloth. After using the camera at the beach or
seaside, wipe off any sand or salt using a cloth lightly dampened in fresh
water and then dry the camera thoroughly.
● Cleaning the lens

This glass element is easily damaged: remove dust and lint with a blower. If
using an aerosol blower, keep the can vertical to prevent the discharge of
liquid that could damage glass elements. To remove fingerprints and other
stains from the lens, apply a small amount of lens cleaner to a soft cloth and
wipe the lens carefully.
● Do not touch the image sensor

Under no circumstances should you exert pressure on the image sensor, poke
it with cleaning tools, or subject it to powerful air currents from a blower.
These actions could scratch or otherwise damage the sensor.
● Cleaning the image sensor

For information on cleaning the image sensor, see “Manual cleaning” (0569).
● The lens contacts

Keep the lens contacts clean. Avoid touching them with your fingers.
● Store in a well-ventilated area

To prevent mold or mildew, store the camera in a dry, well-ventilated area. Do
not store the camera with naphtha or camphor moth balls, next to
equipment that produces strong electromagnetic, or where it will be
exposed to extremely high temperatures, for example near a heater or in an

573
enclosed vehicle on a hot day. Failure to observe these precautions could
result in product malfunction.
● Long-term storage
To prevent damage caused by, for example, leaking battery fluid, remove the
battery if the product will not be used for an extended period. Store the
camera in a plastic bag containing a desiccant. Do not, however, store the
leather camera case in a plastic bag, as this may cause the material to
deteriorate. Store the battery in a cool, dry place. Note that desiccant
gradually loses its capacity to absorb moisture and should be replaced at
regular intervals. To prevent mold or mildew, take the camera out of storage
at least once a month, insert the battery, and release the shutter a few times.
● Turn the product off before removing the battery

Removing the battery while the camera is on could damage the product.
Particular care should be taken not to remove or disconnect the power
source while images are being recorded or deleted.
● Notes on the monitor

･ The monitor is constructed with extremely high precision; at least 99.99%
of pixels are effective, with no more than 0.01% being missing or defective.
Hence while the monitor may contain pixels that are always lit (white, red,
blue, or green) or always off (black), this is not a malfunction. Images
recorded with the device are unaffected. Your understanding is requested.
･ Images in the monitor may be difficult to see in a bright light.
･ Do not apply pressure to the monitor. The monitor could malfunction or
suffer damage. Dust or lint on the monitor can be removed with a blower.
Stains can be removed by wiping the monitor lightly with a soft cloth or
chamois leather. Should the monitor break, care should be taken to avoid
injury from broken glass. Be careful that liquid crystal from the monitor
does not touch the skin or enter the eyes or mouth.
･ The display may rapidly flicker on and off during burst photography.
Watching the flickering display could cause you to feel unwell. Discontinue
use until your condition improves.

574
● Bright lights and back-lit subjects
Noise in the form of lines may in rare cases appear in pictures that include
bright lights or back-lit subjects.
Battery care
● Precautions for use
･ If improperly handled, batteries may rupture or leak, causing the product to
corrode. Observe the following precautions when handling batteries:
- Turn the product off before replacing the battery.
- Batteries may be hot after extended use.
- Keep the battery terminals clean.
- Use only batteries approved for use in this equipment.
- Do not short or disassemble batteries or expose them to flame or
excessive heat.
- When the battery is not inserted in the camera, insulate the terminals. If
there is a terminal cover, attach the terminal cover to the battery. If there
is no terminal cover, keep the battery separate in a plastic bag or other
non-conductive container.
･ If the battery is hot, for example immediately after use, wait for it to cool
before charging. Attempting to charge the battery while its internal
temperature is elevated will impair battery performance, and the battery
may not charge or charge only partially.
･ If the battery will not be used for some time, remove it from the camera for
storage. The battery should be stored in a cool, dry location with an
ambient temperature of 15 °C to 25 °C (59 °F to 77 °F). Avoid hot or
extremely cold locations.
･ Batteries should be charged within six months of use. During long periods
of disuse, charge the battery once every six months before returning it to a
cool location for storage.
･ Remove the battery from the camera when not in use. The camera and
charger draw minute amounts of charge even when off and could draw the
battery down to the point that it will no longer function.

575
･ Do not use the battery at ambient temperatures below 0 °C (32 °F) or above
40 °C (104 °F). Failure to observe this precaution could damage the battery
or impair its performance. Charge the battery indoors at ambient
temperatures of 5 °C–35 °C (41 °F–95 °F). The battery will not charge if its
temperature is below 0 °C (32 °F) or above 60 °C (140 °F).
･ Capacity may be reduced and charging times increase at battery
temperatures from 0 °C (32 °F) to 15 °C (59 °F) and from 45 °C (113 °F) to 60
°C (140 °F).
･ Batteries in general exhibit a drop in charging capacity at low ambient
temperatures.
･ Batteries in general exhibit a drop in available capacity at low ambient
temperatures. The change in capacity with temperature is reflected in the
camera battery-level display. As a result, the battery display may show a
drop in capacity as the temperature drops, even if the battery is fully
charged.
･ Batteries may be hot after use. Observe due caution when removing
batteries from the camera.
● Charge batteries before use

Charge the battery before use. The supplied battery is not fully charged at
shipment.
● Ready spare batteries

Before taking photographs, ready a spare battery and keep it fully charged.
Depending on your location, it may be difficult to purchase replacement
batteries on short notice.
● Have fully-charged spare batteries ready on cold days

Partially-charged batteries may not function on cold days. In cold weather,
charge one battery before use and keep another in a warm place, ready to be
exchanged as necessary. Once warmed, a cold battery may recover some of
its charge.

576
● Battery level
･ Turning the camera on or off repeatedly when the battery is fully
discharged will shorten battery life. Batteries that have been fully
discharged must be charged before use.
･ A marked drop in the time a fully charged battery retains its charge when
used at room temperature indicates that it requires replacement. Purchase
a new rechargeable battery.
● Do not attempt to charge fully-charged batteries

Continuing to charge the battery after it is fully charged can impair battery
performance.
● Recycling used batteries

Recycle rechargeable batteries in accord with local regulations, being sure to
first insulate the terminals with tape.

577
Specifications
Nikon Z 30 digital camera

Type
Type Digital camera with support for interchangeable lenses
Lens mount Nikon Z mount
Lens
･ Z mount NIKKOR lenses
Compatible
･ F mount NIKKOR lenses (mount adapter required;
lenses
restrictions may apply)
Effective pixels
Effective
20.9 million
pixels
Image sensor
Type 23.5 × 15.7 mm CMOS sensor (Nikon DX format)
Total pixels 21.51 million
Dust-
Image Dust Off reference data (NX Studio software
reduction
required)
system
Specifications
578
Storage
･ [DX (24×16)] selected for image area:
- 5568 × 3712 (Large: 20.7 M)
- 4176 × 2784 (Medium: 11.6 M)
- 2784 × 1856 (Small: 5.2 M)
･ [1:1 (16×16)] selected for image area:
- 3712 × 3712 (Large: 13.8 M)
- 2784 × 2784 (Medium: 7.8 M)
Image size - 1856 × 1856 (Small: 3.4 M)
(pixels) ･ [16:9 (24×14)] selected for image area:
- 5568 × 3128 (Large: 17.4 M)
- 4176 × 2344 (Medium: 9.8 M)
- 2784 × 1560 (Small: 4.3 M)
･ Photographs taken while recording videos at a
frame size of 3840 × 2160: 3840 × 2160
･ Photographs taken while recording videos at other
frame sizes: 1920 × 1080
･ NEF (RAW): 12 or 14 bit

･ JPEG: JPEG-Baseline compliant with fine (approx. 1:4),
File format
normal (approx. 1:8), or basic (approx. 1:16)
(image
compression
quality)
･ NEF (RAW)+JPEG: Single photograph recorded in both
NEF (RAW) and JPEG formats
Auto, Standard, Neutral, Vivid, Monochrome, Portrait,

Landscape, Flat, Creative Picture Controls (Dream,
Picture Morning, Pop, Sunday, Somber, Dramatic, Silence,
Control Bleached, Melancholic, Pure, Denim, Toy, Sepia, Blue, Red,
System Pink, Charcoal, Graphite, Binary, Carbon); selected Picture
Control can be modified; storage for custom Picture
Controls
SD (Secure Digital) and UHS-I compliant SDHC and SDXC

Media
memory cards
Specifications
579
Storage
File system DCF 2.0, Exif 2.31
Monitor
7.5-cm/3.0-in., approx. 1040k-dot vari-angle TFT touch-
sensitive LCD with 170° viewing angle, approximately
Monitor
100% frame coverage, and color balance and 11-level
manual brightness controls
Shutter
Electronically-controlled vertical-travel focal-plane
Type mechanical shutter; electronic front-curtain shutter;
electronic shutter
Speed 1/4000 – 30 s (step sizes of 1/3 EV), bulb, time
Flash sync Synchronizes with shutter at X=1/200 s or slower;

speed supported with auto FP high-speed sync
Release
Single frame, Continuous L, Continuous H, Continuous H
Release mode
(extended), Self-timer
･ Continuous L: Approx. 1 – 4 fps

Approximate ･ Continuous H: Approx. 5 fps
frame advance ･ Continuous H (extended): Approx. 11 fps
rate * Maximum frame advance rate as measured by in-
house tests.
2 s, 5 s, 10 s, 20 s; 1–9 exposures at intervals of 0.5, 1, 2, or 3

Self-timer
s
Specifications
580
Exposure
Metering
TTL metering using camera image sensor
system
･ Matrix metering
･ Center-weighted metering: Weight of 75% given to 8
mm circle in center of frame; weighting can instead be
Metering
based on average of entire frame
mode
･ Spot metering: Meters 3.5 mm circle (about 2.5% of
frame) centered on selected focus point
･ Highlight-weighted metering
–4 – +17 EV
Range
* Figures are for ISO 100 and f/2.0 lens at 20 °C/68 °F
･ b: Auto, P: programmed auto with flexible program, S:

shutter-priority auto, A: aperture-priority auto, M:
Mode
manual
･ U1, U2 and U3: user settings modes
Exposure
Range: –5 – +5 EV, Increment: 1/3 step
compensation
Exposure lock Luminosity locked at detected value
ISO sensitivity ISO 100–51200 (step sizes of 1/3 EV); can also be set to
(Recommende approx. 1 EV above ISO 51200 (ISO 102400 equivalent) or
d Exposure to approx. 2 EV above ISO 51200 (ISO 204800 equivalent);
Index) auto ISO sensitivity control available
Active D-
Auto, Extra high, High, Normal, Low, and Off
Lighting
Multiple
Add, average, lighten, darken
exposure
Other options HDR (high dynamic range), photo mode flicker reduction
Specifications
581
Autofocus
Type Hybrid phase-detection/contrast AF
−4.5 – +19 EV
* Without low-light AF: −3 – +19 EV
Detection
* Measured in photo mode at ISO 100 and a temperature
range
of 20 °C/68 °F using single-servo AF (AF-S) and a lens with
a maximum aperture of f/1.8
･ Autofocus: Single-servo AF (AF-S), continuous-servo AF

(AF-C), AF mode auto-switch (AF-A, photo mode only),
Lens servo full-time AF (AF-F, video mode only), predictive focus
tracking
･ Manual focus (M): Electronic rangefinder can be used
209 focus points

* Number of focus points available in photo mode with
Focus points
single-point AF selected for AF-area mode and DX
selected for image area
Pinpoint AF (photo mode only), single-point AF, dynamic-

area AF (photo mode only), wide-area AF (S), wide-area AF
AF-area mode (L), wide-area AF (L-people), wide-area AF (L-animals),
auto-area AF, auto-area AF (people), auto-area AF
(animals)
Press the A (g) button or press shutter-release button

Focus lock
halfway (single-servo AF/AF-S)
Flash
TTL: i-TTL flash control; i-TTL balanced fill-flash is used
Flash control with matrix, center-weighted, and highlight-weighted
metering, standard i-TTL fill-flash with spot metering
Front-curtain sync, slow sync, rear-curtain sync, red-eye

Flash mode
reduction, red-eye reduction with slow sync, off
Specifications
582
Flash
Flash –3 – +1 EV (step size of 1/3 EV) available in modes P, S, A,
compensation and M
Flash-ready Lights when optional flash unit is fully charged; flashes as

indicator underexposure warning after flash is fired at full output
Accessory ISO 518 hot-shoe with sync and data contacts and safety
shoe lock
Nikon Creative i-TTL flash control, optical Advanced Wireless Lighting, FV

Lighting lock, Color Information Communication, auto FP high-
System (CLS) speed sync
White balance
Auto (3 types), natural light auto, direct sunlight, cloudy,
shade, incandescent, fluorescent (3 types), flash, choose
White balance color temperature (2500 K–10,000 K), preset manual (up to
6 values can be stored), all with fine-tuning except choose
color temperature
Bracketing
Bracketing Exposure and/or flash, white balance, and ADL
Video
Metering
TTL metering using camera image sensor
system
Metering
Matrix, center-weighted, or highlight-weighted
mode
Specifications
583
Video
･ 3840 × 2160 (4K UHD): 30p (progressive)/25p/24p
･ 1920 × 1080: 120p/100p/60p/50p/30p/25p/24p
･ 1920 × 1080 slow-motion: 30p (×4)/25p (×4)/24p (×5)
Frame size * Actual frame rates for 120p, 100p, 60p, 50p, 30p, 25p, and
(pixels) and 24p are 119.88, 100, 59.94, 50, 29.97, 25, and 23.976 fps
frame rate respectively
* Quality selection (normal/m) available at all sizes except
3840 × 2160, 1920 × 1080 120p/100p, and 1920 × 1080
slow-motion, when quality is fixed at m
File format MOV, MP4
Video
H.264/MPEG-4 Advanced Video Coding
compression
Audio
Linear PCM (for videos recorded in MOV format) or AAC
recording
(for videos recorded in MP4 format)
format
Audio
Built-in stereo or external microphone with attenuator
recording
option; sensitivity adjustable
device
Exposure
Range: –3 – +3 EV, Increment: 1/3 step
compensation
･ M: Manual selection (ISO 100–25600; step size of 1/3

ISO sensitivity EV); auto ISO sensitivity control (ISO 100–25600)
(Recommende available with selectable upper limit
d Exposure ･ P, S, A: Auto ISO sensitivity control (ISO 100–25600) with
Index) selectable upper limit
･ b: Auto ISO sensitivity control (ISO 100–25600)
Active D- Same as photo settings, Extra high, High, Normal, Low, and
Lighting Off
Specifications
584
Video
Time-lapse video recording, electronic vibration reduction,
Other options
time codes, with REC lamp
Playback
Full-frame and thumbnail (4, 9, or 72 images or calendar)
playback with playback zoom, playback zoom cropping,
Playback video playback, photo and/or video slide shows,
histogram display, highlights, photo information, location
data display, auto image rotation, and picture rating
Interface
Type C USB connector (SuperSpeed USB); connection to
USB
built-in USB port is recommended
HDMI output Type D HDMI connector
Stereo mini-pin jack (3.5 mm diameter; plug-in power

Audio input
supported)
Specifications
585
Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
･ Standards:
- IEEE 802.11b/g/n (Africa, Asia, Bolivia, Europe, and
Oceania)
- IEEE 802.11b/g/n/a/ac (U.S.A., Canada, Mexico)
- IEEE 802.11b/g/n/a (other countries in the Americas)
･ Operating frequency:
- 2412–2462 MHz (channel 11; Africa, Asia, Bolivia,
Europe, and Oceania)
- 2412–2462 MHz (channel 11), 5180–5825 MHz (5180–
Wi-Fi
5580 MHz, 5660–5700 MHz, and 5745–5825 MHz)
(U.S.A., Canada, Mexico)
- 2412–2462 MHz (channel 11), 5180–5805 MHz (5180–
5320 MHz and 5745–5805 MHz) (other countries in the
Americas)
･ Maximum output power (EIRP):
- 2.4 GHz band: 4.5 dBm
- 5 GHz band: 6.8 dBm (countries in the Americas)
･ Authentication: Open system, WPA2-PSK
･ Communication protocols: Bluetooth Specification

Version 4.2
- Bluetooth: 2402–2480 MHz
Bluetooth
- Bluetooth Low Energy: 2402–2480 MHz
- Bluetooth: –1.0 dBm
- Bluetooth Low Energy: –2.5 dBm
Power source
Battery One EN-EL25 rechargeable Li-ion battery
Specifications
586
Power source
Charging AC
EH-7P charging AC adapter (available separately)
adapter
Tripod socket
Tripod socket 0.635 cm (1/4 in., ISO 1222)
Dimensions/weight
Approx. 128 × 73.5 × 59.5 mm/5.1 × 2.9 × 2.4 in. (width ×
Dimensions
height × depth)
Approx. 405 g (14.3 oz.) with battery and memory card but
Weight without body cap; approx. 350 g/12.4 oz. (camera body
only)
Operating environment
Temperature 0 °C–40 °C (+32 °F–104 °F)
Humidity 85% or less (no condensation)
･ Unless otherwise stated, all measurements are performed in conformity

with Camera and Imaging Products Association (CIPA) standards or
guidelines.
･ All figures are for a camera with a fully-charged battery.
･ The sample images displayed on the camera and the images and
illustrations in this document are for expository purposes only.
･ Nikon reserves the right to change the appearance and specifications of
the hardware and software described in this document at any time and
without prior notice. Nikon will not be held liable for damages that may
result from any mistakes that this document may contain.
Specifications
587
❚EN-EL25 Rechargeable Li-ion Battery
❚
Type Rechargeable lithium-ion battery
Rated capacity 7.6 V/1120 mAh
Operating temperature 0 °C–40 °C (+32 °F–104 °F)
Dimensions Approx. 34 × 50.5 × 18 mm/1.4 × 2.0 × 0.8 in.
Weight Approx. 53 g (1.9 oz)
Specifications
588
D Disposing of data storage devices
Please note that deleting images or formatting memory cards or other data
storage devices does not completely erase the original image data. Deleted
files can sometimes be recovered from discarded storage devices using
commercially available software, potentially resulting in the malicious use of
personal image data. Ensuring the privacy of such data is the user’s
responsibility.
Before discarding a data storage device or transferring ownership to another
person, erase all data using commercial deletion software, or format the
device and then completely refill it with images containing no private
information (for example, pictures of empty sky). Care should be taken to
avoid injury when physically destroying data storage devices. Before
discarding the camera or transferring ownership to another person, you
should also use the [Reset all settings] item in the camera setup menu to
delete network settings and other personal information.
D Supported standards
･ DCF Version 2.0: The Design Rule for Camera File System (DCF) is a
standard widely used in the digital camera industry to ensure
compatibility among different makes of camera.
･ Exif version 2.31: The camera supports Exif (Exchangeable Image File
Format for Digital Still Cameras) version 2.31, a standard introduced with
the goal of improving the interoperability of printers and digital cameras,
making it easier to produce high-quality prints. Information stored with
photographs is used for optimal color reproduction when the images are
output on Exif-compliant printers. See the printer manual for details.
･ HDMI: High-Definition Multimedia Interface is a standard for multimedia
interfaces used in consumer electronics and AV devices. This standard
ensures that audiovisual data and control signals can be transmitted to
HDMI-compliant devices via a single cable connection.
Specifications
589
Approved memory cards
･ The camera can be used with SD, SDHC, and SDXC memory cards.
･ UHS-I is supported.
･ Cards rated UHS Speed Class 3 or better are recommended for video
recording and playback. Slower speeds may result in recording or
playback being interrupted.
･ When choosing cards for use in card readers, be sure they are
compatible with the device.
･ Contact the manufacturer for information on features, operation, and
limitations on use.
A The write protect switch

･ SD memory cards are equipped with a write-protect switch. Sliding the
switch to the “lock” position write-protects the card, protecting the data it
contains.
･ A “–––” indicator and a [Card] warning appear in the shooting display

when a write-protected card is inserted.
･ If you attempt to release the shutter while a write-protected card is
inserted, a warning will be displayed and no picture will be recorded.
Unlock the memory card before attempting to take or delete pictures.
Approved memory cards

590
Portable chargers (power banks)
Portable chargers can be used to power the camera or charge the
camera battery. The following table lists the portable chargers that have
been tested and approved for use, together with the approximate
number of shots that can be taken with, and the approximate number of
times the camera battery can be charged using, each device.
Number of Number of
Manufacturer Model number
shots1 charges2
PowerCore III Elite 25600
Anker 2750 8
87W
1 Camera and Imaging Products Association (CIPA) standard. Measured at

23 °C/73.4 °F (±2 °C/3.6 °F) with a NIKKOR Z DX 16–50mm f/3.5–6.3 VR
lens under the following test conditions: one photograph taken at default
settings once every 30 s. The “number of shots” is the number of shots
that can be taken using a fully-charged portable charger to supply power
to a camera with a fully-charged battery (EN-EL25).
2 The number of times the camera battery (EN-EL25) can be fully charged
using a portable charger at full charge.
･ See the documentation provided with the portable charger for
information on use.
･ Use a USB cable with two Type-C connectors supplied with the
portable charger when employing the device to power the camera or
charge the camera battery.
･ Up-to-date information on portable chargers is available on the
website of the manufacturers. Availability may vary with country or
region.
Portable chargers (power banks)

591
Memory card capacity
The following table shows buffer capacity and the approximate number
of pictures that can be stored on a 32 GB1 card at different image
qualities and sizes when [DX (24×16)] is selected for [Choose image
area]. Actual capacity varies with shooting conditions and the type of
card.
Number of
Buffer
Image qualityImage size File size exposures
capacity2
remaining
RAW (12-bit) Large Approx. 21.4 MB 873 frames 44 frames
RAW (14-bit) Large Approx. 26.8 MB 764 frames 36 frames
Large Approx. 10.4 MB 2100 frames 82 frames
JPEG fine Medium Approx. 7.2 MB 3400 frames 100 frames
Small Approx. 3.8 MB 6400 frames 100 frames
JPEG normal Medium Approx. 3.7 MB 6800 frames 100 frames
Small Approx. 2.1 MB 12,300 frames 100 frames
JPEG basic Medium Approx. 1.9 MB 12,800 frames 100 frames
Small Approx. 1.1 MB 22,100 frames 100 frames
1 Figures are for a SanDisk SD memory card (SDSDXVE-032G-JNJIP,

measured in December 2021).
2 Maximum number of exposures that can be stored in memory buffer at
ISO 100. If [Auto distortion control] is set to [On], the number of
exposures may drop.
Memory card capacity

592
Available recording time
Depending on the [Frame size and rate/Video quality] (0172) setting,
the available recording time on a 32 GB memory card when [Video file
type] is [MOV] is as follows1. The available recording time is the total
time when multiple videos are recorded. However, the actual available
recording time varies with shooting conditions and the type of card. If
the battery is fully discharged or the temperature inside the camera
rises, recording may end before the maximum length is reached or
before the memory card is full.

[Frame size/frame rate]
High quality Normal
[3840×2160; 30p]2 Approx. 28 min. —
[3840×2160; 25p]2 Approx. 28 min. —
[3840×2160; 24p]2 Approx. 28 min. —
[1920×1080; 120p]2 Approx. 28 min. —
[1920×1080; 100p]2 Approx. 28 min. —
[1920×1080; 60p]2 Approx. 72 min. Approx. 141 min.
[1920×1080; 30p ×4 (slow-motion)]3 Approx. 29 min. —

593
1 Figures are for a SanDisk SD memory card (SDSDXVE-032G-JNJIP,
measured in December 2021).
2 Each shot can be up to 125 minutes in length.
3 Each shot can be up to 3 minutes in length.

594
Battery endurance
The video footage or number of shots that can be recorded with a fully-
charged EN-EL25 rechargeable Li-ion battery is given below. Actual
endurance varies with such factors as the condition of the battery, the
interval between shots, and the options selected in the camera menus.
Photo mode (number of shots): Approx. 330 shots1
Video mode (length of footage): Approx. 75 minutes2
Actions such as the following can reduce battery endurance:
･ Keeping the shutter-release button pressed halfway
･ Repeated autofocus operations
･ Taking RAW photographs
･ Slow shutter speeds
･ Using camera Wi-Fi (wireless LAN) and Bluetooth features
･ Using the camera with optional accessories connected
･ Repeatedly zooming in and out
･ Taking pictures at low ambient temperatures
To ensure that you get the most from rechargeable Nikon EN-EL25
batteries:
･ Keep the battery contacts clean. Soiled contacts can reduce battery
performance.
･ Use batteries immediately after charging. Batteries will lose their
charge if left unused.
1 Camera and Imaging Products Association (CIPA) standard. Measured at
23 °C/73.4 °F (±2 °C/3.6 °F) with a NIKKOR Z DX 16–50mm f/3.5–6.3 VR
lens and a SanDisk SDSDXVE-032G-JNJIP memory card under the
following test conditions: one photograph taken at default settings once
every 30 s.
2 Actual battery endurance as measured under conditions specified by
CIPA. Measured at 23 °C/73.4 °F (±2 °C/3.6 °F) with a NIKKOR Z DX 16–
50mm f/3.5–6.3 VR lens and a SanDisk SDSDXVE-032G-JNJIP memory
card. Measurement performed at default settings.
Battery endurance
595
･ Each shot can be up to 125 minutes in length.
･ If the temperature inside the camera rises, recording may end before
the maximum length is reached or before the memory card is full.
Battery endurance
596
Trademarks and licenses
･ The SD, SDHC, and SDXC logos are trademarks of SD-3C, LLC.
･ Windows is either a registered trademark or a trademark of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
･ Apple®, App Store®, the Apple logos, iPhone®, iPad®, Mac, and macOS
are trademarks of Apple Inc. registered in the U.S. and/or other
countries.
･ Android, Google Play and the Google Play logo are trademarks of
Google LLC. The Android robot is reproduced or modified from work
created and shared by Google and used according to terms
described in the Creative Commons 3.0 Attribution License.
･ IOS is a trademark or registered trademark of Cisco Systems, Inc., in
the United States and/or other countries and is used under license.
･ HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are
trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing, LLC.
･ The Bluetooth® word mark and logo are registered trademarks owned
by Bluetooth SIG, Inc., and any use of such marks by Nikon is under
license.
･ Wi-Fi and the Wi-Fi logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of
the Wi-Fi Alliance.
･ All other trade names mentioned in this document or the other
documentation provided with your Nikon product are trademarks or
registered trademarks of their respective holders.
･ Use of the Made for Apple badge means that an accessory has been
designed to connect specifically to the Apple products identified in
the badge, and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple
performance standards. Apple is not responsible for the operation of
this device or its compliance with safety and regulatory standards.
Please note that the use of this accessory with an Apple product may
affect wireless performance.

597
D FreeType License (FreeType2)
Portions of this software are copyright © 2012 The FreeType Project (https://
www.freetype.org). All rights reserved.
D MIT License (HarfBuzz)

Portions of this software are copyright © 2018 The HarfBuzz Project (https://
www.freedesktop.org/wiki/Software/HarfBuzz). All rights reserved.
IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER BE LIABLE TO ANY PARTY FOR
DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE AND ITS DOCUMENTATION,
EVEN IF THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
SUCH DAMAGE. THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE
SOFTWARE PROVIDED HEREUNDER IS ON AN “AS IS” BASIS, AND THE
COPYRIGHT HOLDER HAS NO OBLIGATION TO PROVIDE MAINTENANCE,
SUPPORT, UPDATES, ENHANCEMENTS, OR MODIFICATIONS.
D Unicode® Character Database License (Unicode® Character

Database)
The software for this product uses the Unicode® Character Database License
open-source software. The terms of the software license are as follows:
COPYRIGHT AND PERMISSION NOTICE
Copyright © 1991-2022 Unicode, Inc. All rights reserved.
Distributed under the Terms of Use in
https://www.unicode.org/copyright.html.
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy
of the Unicode data files and any associated documentation (the “Data Files”)
or Unicode software and any associated documentation (the “Software”) to
deal in the Data Files or Software without restriction, including without
limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, and/or
sell copies of the Data Files or Software, and to permit persons to whom the
Data Files or Software are furnished to do so, provided that either

598
(i) this copyright and permission notice appear with all copies of the Data
Files or Software, or
(ii) this copyright and permission notice appear in associated
Documentation.
THE DATA FILES AND SOFTWARE ARE PROVIDED “AS IS”, WITHOUT
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT
LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN
NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR HOLDERS INCLUDED IN THIS
NOTICE BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, OR ANY SPECIAL INDIRECT OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING
FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF
CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR
IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THE DATA FILES OR
SOFTWARE.
Except as contained in this notice, the name of a copyright holder shall not
be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use or other
dealings in these Data Files or Software without prior written authorization of
the copyright holder.
D AVC Patent Portfolio License

THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE AVC PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE
FOR THE PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL USE OF A CONSUMER TO
(i) ENCODE VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE AVC STANDARD (“AVC VIDEO”)
AND/OR
(ii) DECODE AVC VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A
PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL ACTIVITY AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM
A VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED TO PROVIDE AVC VIDEO.
NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION MAY BE OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA, L.L.C.
SEE https://www.mpegla.com

599
Notices
● Notices for customers in the U.S.A.
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Radio Frequency
Interference Statement
Z 30
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for
a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits
are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful
interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses,
and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to
radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference
will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause
harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be
determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is
encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the
following measures:
･ Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
･ Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
･ Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that
to which the receiver is connected.
･ Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/television technician for
help.
CAUTIONS
Modifications
The FCC requires the user to be notified that any changes or
modifications made to this device that are not expressly approved by
Notices
600
Nikon Corporation may void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
Interface cables
Use the interface cables sold or provided by Nikon for your equipment.
Using other interface cables may exceed the limits of Class B Part 15 of
the FCC rules.
Nikon Inc., 1300 Walt Whitman Road, Melville, New York 11747-3064,
U.S.A.
Tel.: 631-547-4200
● Notice for customers in Canada

CAN ICES-003 (B) / NMB-003 (B)
● Notices for customers in Europe
CAUTION: RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT

TYPE. DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE INSTRUCTIONS.
This symbol indicates that electrical and electronic equipment is to be

collected separately.
The following apply only to users in European countries:

･ This product is designated for separate collection at an appropriate
collection point. Do not dispose of as household waste.
･ Separate collection and recycling helps conserve natural resources
and prevent negative consequences for human health and the
environment that might result from incorrect disposal.
･ For more information, contact the retailer or the local authorities in
charge of waste management.
Notices
601
This symbol on the battery indicates that the battery is to be collected
separately.
The following apply only to users in European countries:

･ All batteries, whether marked with this symbol or not, are designated
for separate collection at an appropriate collection point. Do not
dispose of as household waste.
･ For more information, contact the retailer or the local authorities in
charge of waste management.
Notices
602
Bluetooth and Wi-Fi (wireless LAN)
This product is controlled by the United States Export Administration
Regulations (EAR). The permission of the United States government is
not required for export to countries other than the following, which as
of this writing are subject to embargo or special controls: Cuba, Iran,
North Korea, Sudan, and Syria (list subject to change).
The use of wireless devices may be prohibited in some countries or
regions. Familiarize yourself with and obey all applicable local
regulations.
The Bluetooth transmitter in this device operates in the 2.4 GHz band.
● Notice for customers in the U.S.A. and Canada

This device complies with part 15 of FCC Rules and Innovation, Science
and Economic Development Canada’s licence-exempt RSSs. Operation is
subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING
The FCC requires the user to be notified that any changes or
modifications made to this device that are not expressly approved by
Nikon Corporation may void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
Compliance with FCC requirement 15.407(c)
Data transmission is always initiated by software, which is the passed
down through the MAC, through the digital and analog baseband, and
finally to the RF chip. Several special packets are initiated by the MAC.
These are the only ways the digital baseband portion will turn on the RF
transmitter, which it then turns off at the end of the packet. Therefore,
the transmitter will be on only while one of the aforementioned packets
is being transmitted. In other words, this device automatically

603
discontinue transmission in case of either absence of information to
transmit or operational failure.
Frequency Tolerance: ±20 ppm
There are models that support only 2.4GHz or models that support
2.4GHz / 5GHz. The Guam sales model is only compatible with 2.4GHz.
FCC Radio Frequency Interference Statement
Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the
limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules.
These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against
harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment
generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not
installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause
harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no
guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If
this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television
reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and
on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or
more of the following measures:
･ Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
･ Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
･ Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that
to which the receiver is connected.
･ Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
Co-location
This transmitter must not be co-located or operated in conjunction with
any other antenna or transmitter.
Nikon Inc., 1300 Walt Whitman Road, Melville, New York 11747-3064,
U.S.A.
Tel.: 631-547-4200
FCC/ISED RF Exposure Statement
The available scientific evidence does not show that any health
problems are associated with using low power wireless devices. There is

604
no proof, however, that these low power wireless devices are absolutely
safe. Low power Wireless devices emit low levels of radio frequency
energy (RF) in the microwave range while being used. Whereas high
levels of RF can produce health effects (by heating tissue), exposure of
low-level RF that does not produce heating effects causes no known
adverse health effects. Many studies of low-level RF exposures have not
found any biological effects. Some studies have suggested that some
biological effects might occur, but such findings have not been
confirmed by additional research. This product has been tested and
found to comply with FCC/ISED radiation exposure limits set forth for an
uncontrolled environment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF)
Exposure Guidelines and RSS-102 of the ISED radio frequency (RF)
Exposure rules. Please refer to the SAR test report that was uploaded to
FCC website.
Compliance with RSS-247 Issue 2 §6.4
Data transmission is always initiated by software, which is the passed
down through the MAC, through the digital and analog baseband, and
finally to the RF chip. Several special packets are initiated by the MAC.
These are the only ways the digital baseband portion will turn on the RF
transmitter, which it then turns off at the end of the packet. Therefore,
the transmitter will be on only while one of the aforementioned packets
is being transmitted. In other words, this device automatically
discontinue transmission in case of either absence of information to
transmit or operational failure.
● Notice for customers in Canada

For indoor use only (5150-5350MHz).

605
● Notice for customers in Europe and in countries complying with
the Radio Equipment Directive
Hereby, Nikon Corporation declares that the radio equipment type Z 30
is in compliance with Directive 2014/53/EU.
The full text of the EU declaration of conformity is available at the

following internet address:
https://imaging.nikon.com/support/pdf/DoC_N2121.pdf
Wi-Fi
- 2412–2462 MHz (channel 11; Africa, Asia, Bolivia, Europe, and
Oceania)
- 2412–2462 MHz (channel 11), 5180–5825 MHz (5180–5580 MHz,
5660–5700 MHz, and 5745–5825 MHz) (U.S.A., Canada, Mexico)
- 2412–2462 MHz (channel 11), 5180–5805 MHz (5180–5320 MHz
and 5745–5805 MHz) (other countries in the Americas)
- 5 GHz band: 6.8 dBm (countries in the Americas)
Bluetooth

606
● Notice for customers in the UK
Hereby, Nikon Corporation declares that the radio equipment type Z 30
is in compliance with Radio Equipment Regulations 2017.
The full text of the UKCA declaration of conformity is available at the

following internet address:
https://imaging.nikon.com/support/pdf/UKCA_DoC_N2121.pdf
Wi-Fi
- 2412–2462 MHz (channel 11)
Bluetooth
● Notice for customers in Singapore
Z 30
This device complies with radio-frequency regulations. The content of

certification labels not affixed to the device is given below.

607
● Notice for customers in Nigeria
● Notice for customers in Thailand
● Notice for customers in Oman
● Security
Although one of the benefits of this product is that it allows others to
freely connect for the wireless exchange of data anywhere within its
range, the following may occur if security is not enabled:
･ Data theft: Malicious third-parties may intercept wireless
transmissions to steal user IDs, passwords, and other personal
information.
･ Unauthorized access: Unauthorized users may gain access to the
network and alter data or perform other malicious actions. Note that
due to the design of wireless networks, specialized attacks may allow
unauthorized access even when security is enabled.
･ Unsecured networks: Connecting to open networks may result in
unauthorized access. Use secure networks only.
A Conformity marking
Some of the information related to standards with which the camera
complies can be viewed using the [Conformity marking] option in the setup
menu.

608
Index
Symbols G button ........................................................... 52
i button ........................................................56, 145
b (Auto) .......................................................... 75, 80 K button ................................................................86
P (Programmed auto) ...................................121 O button ..................................................................89
S (Shutter-priority auto) .............................. 121 S button ................................................. 37, 131
A (Aperture-priority auto) ..........................123 E (Exposure compensation) button
M (Manual) .......................................................... 124 ........................................................................ 38, 134
U1, U2, U3 (User setting mode) ..............128 c (Release mode) button ........................ 136
U (Single frame) ....................................136, 139 E (Self-timer) button ....................................136
V (Continuous L) .........................................137 A (g) button ............................... 51, 118, 142
W (Continuous H) ........................................137 W button .............................................................. 50
X (Continuous H (extended)) ............137 X button ..................................................................50
E (Self-timer) .....................................................137 d Help ......................................................................56
c (Continuous) ...............................................140 i menu ..........................................................56, 145
L (Silent photography) .............................. 114
x (Electronic front-curtain shutter) .....350 A
P (Mechanical shutter) ............................... 350
Access-point mode .............................452, 454
3 (Pinpoint AF) ..................................................93
Active D-Lighting ............................................165
d (Single-point AF) ........................................93
ADL bracketing .................................................275
e (Dynamic-area AF) .................................... 94
AE & flash bracketing ....................................267
f (Wide-area AF (S)) .....................................95
AE bracketing .................................................... 267
g (Wide-area AF (L)) .....................................95
AE lock ....................................................................142
1 (Wide-area AF (L-people)) .....................95
AF activation ...................................................... 342
2 (Wide-area AF (L-animals)) ....................95
AF fine-tuning options ................................ 392
h (Auto-area AF) ..............................................96
AF speed ...............................................................383
5 (Auto-area AF (people)) ..........................96
AF tracking sensitivity .................................. 384
6 (Auto-area AF (animals)) ........................ 96
AF-A (AF mode auto-switch) ...................... 90
L (Matrix metering) ......................................164
AF-area mode .......................................................92
M (Center-weighted metering) ............. 164
AF-C (Continuous AF) ......................................91
N (Spot metering) ..........................................164
AF-C priority selection ................................. 338
t (Highlight-weighted metering) ..... 164
609
AF-F (Full-time AF) .............................................91 C
AF-S (Single AF) ...................................................91
AF-S priority selection ..................................338 Calendar playback .......................................... 181
Airplane mode ..................................................402 Camera-mounted flash units ...................493
All pictures ...........................................................209 Center-weighted area .................................. 346
Animal-detection AF ....................................... 99 Center-weighted metering .......................164
Aperture .....................................................123, 124 Charging AC adapter .................................... 557
Aperture-priority auto ..................................123 Choose color temperature (White
Apply settings to live view ........................ 352 balance) ........................................................... 111
Attaching a lens ..................................................68 Choose image area ........................................ 240
Attenuator ........................................................... 332 Choose start/end point ...............................201
Auto (Set Picture Control) ..........................148 CL mode shooting speed .......................... 349
Auto (White balance) ................................... 110 Clarity (Set Picture Control) .......................151
Auto bracketing ............................................... 266 Cloudy (White balance) .............................. 111
Auto bracketing (mode M) ....................... 356 Color space ......................................................... 258
Auto c ISO sensitivity control ..................356 Color temperature .................... 113, 156, 246
Auto distortion control ..................... 261, 329 Command dial .....................................................37
Auto ISO sensitivity control .......................132 Conformity marking ......................................409
Auto upload ....................................................... 470 Connect to computer .................................. 405
Auto-area AF .........................................................96 Connect to smart device ...... 403, 474, 476
Auto-area AF (animals) ................................... 96 Continuous ......................................................... 140
Auto-area AF (people) .....................................96 Continuous AF .....................................................91
Available recording time ............................ 593 Continuous H .................................................... 137
Continuous H (extended) .......................... 137
B Continuous L ......................................................137
Contrast (Set Picture Control) ..................152
Battery ...............................................................62, 65
Control ring .........................................................103
Beep options ......................................................400
Copyright information .................................399
Bluetooth ............................................................. 475
Creative Picture Control ..............................149
Bracketing order .............................................. 357
Custom controls .............................................. 375
Brightness (Set Picture Control) ............. 152
Custom controls (playback) ......................369
Built-in microphone ......................................... 81
Custom controls (shooting) ......................359
Bulb ..........................................................................126
Custom Settings menu ............................... 335
610
Customize command dials ....................... 370 File number sequence .................................350
Customize i menu ....................57, 358, 374 Fill flash ....................................................... 163, 498
Filter effects (Set Picture Control) ......... 152
D Fine-tune optimal exposure .....................346
D-Lighting ........................................................... 431 Firmware version .............................................417
Delete .................................................. 88, 208, 229 Flange-back distance ....................................105
Detaching lenses ............................................... 69 Flash (White balance) ...................................111
Diffraction compensation ...............260, 329 Flash bracketing ...............................................267
Direct connection to computer .............455 Flash compensation ........................... 265, 501
Direct sunlight (White balance) .............111 Flash control .......................................................263
DISP button ........................................................... 48 Flash control mode ........................................497
Distortion control ............................................433 Flash mode ...............................................163, 498
Dynamic-area AF ................................................94 Flash off ...................................................... 163, 500
Flash shutter speed ........................................355
E Flash sync speed ..............................................354
Flat (Set Picture Control) .............................148
Easy Connect ..................................................... 461
Flexible program ............................................. 121
Easy exposure compensation ................. 345
Flicker reduction ..............................................329
Effect level (Set Picture Control) ............ 151
Flicker reduction shooting ........................ 261
Electronic VR ............................................178, 331
Fluorescent (White balance) ....................111
Encryption key ....................................... 455, 463
Fn1 button ...................................................59, 109
Energy saving (photo mode) ...................412
Fn2 button ......................................................59, 90
Error (wireless connection) ....................... 483
Focal plane mark ............................................. 105
Exposure comp. for flash ............................ 355
Focus indicator ................................................. 104
Exposure compensation .............................134
Focus lock ............................................................ 142
Exposure delay mode ...................................349
Focus mode ..................................... 90, 170, 179
Exposure indicator ..........................................125
Focus peaking ........................................ 106, 353
Eye-detection AF ................................................97
Focus point options .......................................344
F Focus point wrap-around ..........................343
Focus points used ...................................96, 339
Face-detection AF ............................................. 97 Focus ring ............................................................ 103
File information ................................................ 184 Focus shift shooting ......................................314
File naming ...............................................239, 325 Focus tracking with lock-on .....................339
611
Format memory card ....................................387 L
Frame size/frame rate ........................172, 325
Framing grid display ......................................353 Landscape (Set Picture Control) ............ 148
Frequency response ......................................332 Language ............................................................. 388
Full-frame playback ........................................180 Limit AF-area mode selection ................. 343
Full-time AF ............................................................91 Location data .....................................................193
FV lock ....................................................................502 Long exposure NR .......................................... 258
Long time-exposures ................................... 126
H Low-light AF .......................................................344
HDMI ............................................................ 402, 489 M

HDR (high dynamic range) ....................... 285
Hi (ISO) ................................................................... 132 MAC address ...................................................... 408
High ISO NR ............................................. 259, 329 Main command dial .........................................37
High sensitivity (Hi) ........................................132 Manage Picture Control ................... 253, 328
Highlight display ...................................185, 384 Manual (Shooting mode) ...........................124
Highlight-weighted metering .................164 Manual focus ..............................................91, 103
Histogram ....................................................... 49, 50 Manual focus ring in AF mode ............... 345
Hue (Set Picture Control) ............................152 Matrix metering ............................................... 164
Maximum shots per burst ......................... 349
I Memory buffer ..................................................139
Memory card ..............................................62, 590
Image comment ..............................................398
Memory card capacity ................................. 592
Image Dust Off ref photo ...........................395
Metering ............................................................... 163
Image quality ..........................................161, 241
MF (Manual focus) .............................................91
Image size ................................................. 162, 241
Microphone sensitivity ..................... 175, 331
Incandescent (White balance) ................111
Mid-range sharpening (Set Picture
Information display ........................................391
Control) ............................................................ 151
Infrastructure mode ............................453, 460
Mode dial ..................................................... 36, 120
Interval timer shooting ................................292
Monitor .....................................................................39
IP address ............................................................. 464
Monitor brightness ........................................ 389
ISO sensitivity .....................................................131
Monitor color balance ..................................389
ISO sensitivity settings .......................242, 326
Monochrome .....................................................435
Monochrome (Set Picture Control) ......148
612
Multiple exposure ...........................................277 Press the shutter-release button all the
My Menu .............................................................. 444 way down ..........................................................77
Press the shutter-release button halfway
N ...................................................................................77
Natural light auto (White balance) .......110 Programmed auto .......................................... 121
Network settings ........................406, 454, 460 Protect ....................................................................118
Neutral (Set Picture Control) .................... 148 Push-button WPS ............................................461
Non-CPU lens data .........................................394
Q
O Quick crop ........................................................... 196
Overlay pictures ...............................................436 Quick sharp (Set Picture Control) ..........151
Overview .............................................................. 194
R
P Rating ...........................................................116, 233
Pairing (Bluetooth) ......................................... 403 RAW processing ............................................... 423
Perspective control ........................................ 434 RAW recording ..................................................242
Photo information .......................................... 183 Rear-curtain sync ..................................163, 499
Photo shooting menu ..................................234 REC lamp brightness .....................................390
Photo/video selector ............................... 75, 80 Recent settings .................................................450
Picture review ....................................................231 Rechargeable Li-ion battery ........................65
Pictures shot on selected dates ............. 210 Red-eye correction .........................................432
PIN-entry WPS ...................................................461 Red-eye reduction ...............................163, 498
Pinpoint AF ............................................................ 93 Release button to use dial .........................373
Pixel mapping ................................................... 398 Release mode ...............................136, 167, 265
Playback display options ............................ 230 Release mode (save frame) ............ 139, 330
Playback folder ..................................................230 Remote flash photography .......................505
Playback menu ................................................. 229 Remote photography ...................................475
Portrait (Set Picture Control) .................... 148 Reset all settings ..............................................417
Power off delay .........................................64, 348 Reset custom settings ..................................337
Preset manual (White balance) Reset photo shooting menu ....................235
...........................................................112, 156, 248 Reset user settings ...............................129, 388
Reset video recording menu ................... 325
613
Resize ......................................................................427 Single-point AF ................................................... 93
Retouch menu ..................................................419 Slide show ........................................................... 231
Reverse indicators ...........................................374 Slot empty release lock ............................... 412
RGB histogram ..................................................186 Slow sync ...................................................163, 499
Rotate tall ............................................................. 231 Slow-motion video ........................................ 174
SnapBridge ..........................................................474
S Spot metering ...................................................164
Saturation (Set Picture Control) ..............152 SSID ............................................................... 455, 462
Save current frame .........................................204 Standard (Set Picture Control) ................ 148
Save focus position ........................................395 Standby timer .......................................................64
Save user settings .................................128, 387 Storage folder ....................................................235
Save/load menu settings ........................... 413 Store points by orientation .......................340
Search for Wi-Fi network ............................ 461 Straighten ............................................................ 433
Select for upload ............................................. 199 Sub-command dial ...........................................37
Select for upload (Bluetooth) .................. 403 Subject-tracking AF ....................................... 100
Select for upload to computer ............... 469
T
Selected pictures .............................................209
Self-portrait mode .................................. 40, 402 Thumbnail ........................................................... 181
Self-timer .........................................137, 140, 348 Time .........................................................................126
Set Picture Control ...............................147, 251 Time zone and date .......................................388
Set the clock ..........................................................71 Time-lapse video .............................................305
Setup menu ........................................................386 Timecode ............................................................. 333
Shade (White balance) ................................ 111 Toning (Set Picture Control) ..................... 152
Sharpening (Set Picture Control) ...........151 Touch controls .......................................... 42, 401
Shooting data ....................................................189 Touch shutter .....................................................101
Shutter speed ......................................... 121, 124 Trim ..........................................................................426
Shutter type ........................................................350 Trim video ............................................................443
Shutter-priority auto ..................................... 121
Shutter-release button AE-L .....................347
U
Silent photography ............................. 114, 322 Upload while off .............................................. 405
Single AF ..................................................................91 USB cable ...................................................................4
Single frame .............................................136, 139 USB power delivery ........................................410
614
User setting mode ..........................................128
V
Vibration reduction ........................................168
Video file type ................................................... 326
Video quality ............................................172, 325
Video recording menu .................................324
Video-record button ........................................ 81
View all in continuous mode ...................354
Vignette control .................................... 260, 329
Virtual horizon ..............................................49, 50
Vivid (Set Picture Control) .......................... 148
W
WB bracketing ...................................................272
White balance ..............................109, 153, 244
Wi-Fi connection ............. 165, 178, 404, 406
Wi-Fi mode ..........................................................478
Wide-area AF (L) ................................................. 95
Wide-area AF (L-animals) ...............................95
Wide-area AF (L-people) ................................95
Wide-area AF (S) ................................................. 95
Wind noise reduction ...................................333
Wireless remote (ML-L7) options ...........408
Wireless Transmitter Utility ........................452
Z
Zoom ...................................................................... 206
615
No reproduction in any form of this document, in whole or in
part (except for brief quotation in critical articles or reviews),
may be made without written authorization from NIKON
CORPORATION.
CT2I04(11)
6MO03811-04

Z30RG (En) 04

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Z30RG (En) 04

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Z30RG (En) 04

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

DIGITAL CAMERA

• Read this document thoroughly before using the camera.

For information on charging the battery, see “Charging the battery”

2 Attach a lens (068).

Z 30 Model Name: N2121

2 To focus, press the shutter-release button halfway (i.e, lightly

3 Without lifting your finger from the shutter-release button,

4 View the picture.

When your first photo can’t wait

･ Memory cards are sold separately.

D The Nikon Download Center

0 This icon marks references to other sections in this document.

A For your safety

About this document

Getting to know the camera 29

Basic photography and playback 75

Shooting controls 120

The i menu 145

Menu guide 212

Establishing wireless connections to computers

Cabled connections to computers and HDMI

On-camera flash photography 493

Remote flash photography 505

DANGER: Failure to observe the precautions marked with this icon

Do not disassemble or modify this product. Do not touch internal

Should you notice any abnormalities such as the product producing

For your safety

Do not aim the flash at the operator of a motor vehicle.

Keep this product out of reach of children.

Do not entangle, wrap or twist the straps around your neck.

Do not use batteries, chargers, AC adapters, or USB cables not

For your safety

Do not handle with bare hands in locations exposed to extremely high

Do not leave the product where it will be exposed to extremely high

For your safety

Do not transport cameras or lenses with tripods or similar accessories

Charge only as indicated.

Follow the instructions of airline personnel.

For your safety

Keep batteries out of reach of household pets and other animals.

Do not immerse batteries in water or expose to rain.

Discontinue use immediately should you notice any changes in the

When batteries are no longer needed, insulate the terminals with

If battery liquid comes into contact with a person’s skin or clothing,

For your safety

● Notice concerning prohibition of copying or reproduction

● Use only Nikon brand electronic accessories

For more information about Nikon brand accessories, contact a local

1 Eyelet for camera strap (061) 7 E button (038, 0134)

Parts of the camera

Parts of the camera

Parts of the camera

D Product serial number

Parts of the camera

1 Shooting mode (0120) 6 Active D-Lighting (0165)

Parts of the camera

Parts of the camera

1 Recording indicator (080) 4 Release mode (still

Parts of the camera